CEREMA Construction OA PDF

=OMMT
jbjl^o=
d=====
The Technical Department for Transport, Roads and Bridges Engineering and Road Safety (Service d'tudes
techniques des routes et autoroutes - Stra) is a technical department within the Ministry of Transport and
Infrastructure. Its field of activities is the road, the transportation and the engineering structures.
The Stra supports the public owner

The Stra supplies State agencies and local communities (counties, large cities and urban communities) with
informations, methodologies and tools suited to the specificities of the networks in order to:
improve the projects quality;
help with the asset management;
define, apply and evaluate the public policies;
guarantee the coherence of the road network and state of the art;
put forward the public interests, in particular within the framework of European standardization;
bring an expertise on complex projects.
The Stra, producer of the state of the art

Within a very large scale, beyond the road and engineering structures, in the field of transport, intermodality,
sustainable development, the Stra:
takes into account the needs of project owners and prime contractors, managers and operators;
fosters the exchanges of experience;
evaluates technical progress and the scientific results;
develops knowledge and good practices through technical guides, softwares;
contributes to the training and information of the technical community.
The Stra, a work in partnership

The Stra associates all the players of the French road community to its action: operational services; research
organizations; Scientific and Technical Network (Rseau Scientifique et Technique de l'Equipement RST), in
particular the Public Works Regional Engineering Offices (Centres d'tudes techniques de l'Equipement
CETE), companies and professional organizations; motorway concessionary operators; other organizations such
as French Rail Network Company (Rseau Ferr de France RFF) and French Waterways Network (Voies
Navigables de France - VNF); Departments like the department for Ecology and Sustainable Development
The Stra regularly exchanges its experience and projects with its foreign counterparts, through bilateral co-
operations, presentations in conferences and congresses, by welcoming delegations, through missions and
expertises in other countries. It takes part in the European standardization commissions and many authorities
and international working groups. The Stra is an organization for technical approval, as an EOTA member
(European Organisation for Technical Approvals).
jbjl^o=
d=====
Collection les outils
This document is the translation of the work "MEMOAR

Mmento pour la mise en oeuvre sur ouvrages d'art" published
in march 2007 under the reference 0512CD.
Working group
This document is the result of collective work done within the scientific and technical network (CETE
(Technical Engineering Center for Infrastructures) DOA (engineering structures Divisions), LRPC
(French Public Works Research Laboratory), LCPC (French Central Public Works Research Laboratory),
Stra (Technical Department for Transport, Roads and Bridges Engineering and Road Safety).
The list of members who participated in the different working groups is given below.
Member Organization
Antoine A. South West CETE DOA
Arnaud S. Lyon LRPC
Aubagnac C Autun LRPC (former Toulouse LRPC)
Benneton J.P Lyon LRPC
Cannard H. Autun LRPC
Carls J.C Mediterranean CETE DOA
Chaput D. Angers LRPC
Chazottes J.P LREP
Cochet D. Bordeaux LRPC (Former Strasbourg LRPC)
D'Aloia L. LCPC
Dantec P. Clermont-Ferrand LRPC
Dauvilliers M. LROP
Duval F. Rouen LRPC
Fragnet M. Stra/CTOA
Geoffroy J.M Clermont-Ferrand LRPC
Houssin C. Nancy LRPC
Lacoste G. Stra/CTOA Owner
Launaire Y. Strasbourg LRPC
Lavigne J. Bordeaux LRPC
Le Bas P. Central Normandy CETE DOA
Le Mestre G. Saint-Brieuc LRPC (Former Aix En Provence LRPC )
Lelivre A. Rouen LRPC
Leroy R. LCPC
Malaterre D. Toulouse LRPC
Meuric Y Stra/CTOA Supervisor
Nguon T Stra/CTOA Supervisor
Nicolas R. West CETE DOA
Petot D. DDE 01 (Former LROP)
Prost J. Lyon LRPC
Renard J. LROP
Renault J. LREP
Roenelle P. Lyon LRPC
Rouanet D. Angers LRPC
Runfola P. Nice LRPC
Sudret J.P Autun LRPC
Wendling J.C Autun LRPC
We would like to thank every one who contributed to this work for their help, their comments or their
observations and particularly:
Delfosse G. (project initiator), Jaffr Y., Haiun G., Criado D., Maurel C., de Matteis D.
Without forgetting the project managers and leaders of CDOA (departmental civil engineering units) who
participated in proof reading and validation of the datasheets.
Introduction
As early as 1995, the engineering structures design cycle realized that something was missing in the production of
simple methodological documents dealing with supervision and inspection of the construction of engineering
structures. External listening made through CDOA (departmental civil engineering unit) clubs confirmed this
need strongly expressed by project managers.
The purpose of this document is to satisfy this demand by actors working in the field performing project
management functions, without necessarily requiring major training actions or external assistance.
The expression of this need was particularly strong because there has been a strong movement towards local
project management of construction work for engineering structures in regional subdivisions. Since such
supervision in this technical field is only done periodically, it rarely has all the skills necessary for the function.
The introduction of quality assurance was experienced differently by different project managers, although it was
accompanied by broad and extensive information. The diversity of companies cultures does not facilitate
acceptance of the quality approach in the construction of engineering structures.
Furthermore, increased complexity of standardization and the introduction of European standards lead to
increasingly frequent updates of CCTG type regulatory texts that must refer to these standards.
The influence of these various factors can be measured through experience feedback from laboratories which are
often called to work on sites to give advice to project management, in addition to their traditional missions.
Remember that the main document dealing with the subject, the G.G.O.A 70 (G.M.O. level 2) published in
August 1970, has never been updated. Although some principles of good construction remain valid, the
evolution of standards and the introduction of QAPs (Quality Assurance Plans) are enough to make it obsolete.
Apart from the G.G.O.A 70 and some training courses distributed in C.I.F.P.(Inter-regional professional training
centers), there are not many documents dealing with construction problems (fascicle 63, fascicle 64, fascicles
65A and 65B, fascicle 66, fascicle 68,...). Although many guides have been distributed by Stra since then, they
frequently deal with design problems and construction arrangements at the same time as problems related to
good construction. The project manager will often find an answer to his questions in them, but among
considerations that are completely unrelated to his immediate concerns.
Secondly, these documents are distributed in all services, but experience shows that if they are not confidential,
persons who are responsible for project management in the works phase are not very familiar with them.
This is the spirit in which the MEMOAR guide (Guide for construction on bridges) was produced.
In order to quickly satisfy this demand, it was decided to produce a collection of technical datasheets, each
dealing independently with a particular subject so that it is easier to keep them up to date, but they are all
contained on an Intranet site and then published on a CD-Rom.
These datasheets are separated into two major families:
datasheets that provide keys to supervision:

clear a stop point before concreting,
operations prior to acceptance,
concrete cover, etc.
informative datasheets:
concrete mix design;
bearing level differences,
measurement of the coefficient of transmission of prestressing steels,
handling of reinforcement cages, etc.
Each datasheet describes important points to be examined, the method by which this examination should be
made, and observations to be made. It does not summarize values mentioned in regulations and standards so
that it will remain relatively long term, but it does attempt to specify limits of the "non-conformity".
Informative datasheets comprise essential information for understanding methods; they are written in simple
form but enable the decision maker to evaluate the influence on the final quality of technical solutions that the
Contractor proposes to implement.
Each datasheet is designed so as to bring out essential points for a given technique or process. It always includes
a final paragraph referring to the available literature on the subject (standard documents, regulatory documents
or guides).
We would like this document to be enriched over time, as a function of needs, by operating experience and
comments that our readers will undoubtedly wish to make.
Contact : Memoar.SETRA@equipement.gouv.fr
Contents
Chapter I: Preparatory actions

Datasheet No. Issue date Purpose of this datasheet
1 February 2005 Analysis of the QAP
2 February 2005 Layout of structures and topographic monitoring of works
3 February 2005 Order of external check of detailed design
4 February 2005 Review of detailed design principles
5 February 2005 Signature of the assumption and design notes
6 February 2005 Signature of construction drawings
Chapter II: Foundations

1 February 2005 Execution of excavations for shallow foundations and execution of

lagging of these excavations
2 February 2005 Diaphragm walls and barrettes
3 February 2005 Sheet piles walls
4 February 2005 Bored piles
Chapter III: Reinforcing steels

1 February 2005 Reinforcing steels - Prefabrication, transport, storage and placing

Chapter IV: Prestressing steels
1 February 2005 Bare strands
2 February 2005 Protected strands
3 February 2005 Prestressing bars
4 February 2005 Prestressing ducts
5 February 2005 Anchorages
6 February 2005 Installation of prestressing ducts
7 February 2005 Threading and tensioning of prestressing tensile elements
8 February 2005 Protection products and cachetage
Chapter V: Temporary works

1 February 2005 Stability of formwork
2 February 2005 Concrete surfaces
3 February 2005 Shoring and falsework
Chapter VI: Prefabrication

1 February 2005 Prefabrication in the factory

Chapter VII: Concreting
1 February 2005 Concrete mix design and suitability survey
2 February 2005 Production of concrete in plant - Transport and acceptance on site
3 February 2005 Placement of concrete
4 February 2005 Concrete vibration
5 February 2005 Curing and stripping
6 February 2005 Concrete construction joints
Chapter VIII: Bearings

1 February 2005 Laminated elastomeric bridge bearings
2 February 2005 Pot bearings
3 February 2005 Bearing Raised embossments
4 February 2005 Jacking / Wedging
Chapter IX: Road restraint systems

1 February 2005 Installation of road restraint systems (safety barriers and pedestrian
parapets)
Chapter X: Waterproofing layers

1 February 2005 Working up of waterproofing layers
Chapter XI: Expansion joints

1 February 2005 Working up of expansion joints

Chapter XII: Site audit
1 February 2005 Quality control
Chapter XIII: Operations prior to

acceptance
1 February 2005 The initial detailed inspection
2 February 2005 Tests and interpretation of tests
Chapter XIV: Durability zero point

1 Current draft Durability zero point
Chapter XV: Structure works

documentation file
1 February 2005 Structure works documentation file

Chapter I: Preparatory actions
Guide for construction on bridges MEMOAR Collection of technical datasheets
Datasheet No. I-1

the QAP), but it must apply to the construction
work site.
"Analysis of the QAP"

3. Important points to be examined
Preamble
1. Purpose of this datasheet
The composition of the analysis varies depending on
This datasheet relates to the analysis of a QAP the QAP production phases.
(Quality Assurance Plan) presented by the
Contractor. The following method relates to work preparation
phases, knowing that the analysis of the SOPAQ
It is an action prior to the works phase, the (Quality Assurance Plan Organizational Scheme)
purpose of which is to obtain a Quality reference when the proposal is handed over and before the
document satisfying the needs of the contract. contract is signed is applicable mainly to identification
of the parties concerned, assignment of tasks, a brief
The check of the QAP application (particularly the description of specific difficulties on the site, the
use of following-up sheets) is not dealt with (see each source of the main supplies, personnel means, general
technical datasheets by subject and Quality control means in terms of equipment and the company
datasheets). quality organization.
- the general organization document

2. Generalities
The analysis relates to descriptions of the responsible
The QAP describes the organization, means, staff, the Contractors organization and general
operating methods (and the corresponding internal internal inspection methods including management of
inspection) that will be used by the Contractor in nonconformities.
order to obtain the required quality to satisfy the
contract requirements. It is composed of a general In particular, it is checked that a Quality Manager is
organization document, procedures and following-up actually appointed for the site and that there is an
sheets. inspection plan comprising :
The main contractor's QAP is complemented by the list of actions to be checked ;

subcontractor or supplier QAPs (sometimes the inspection type (internal, external, exterior) ;
composed of nothing other than procedures). the frequency : random or systematic ;
the nature of the inspection : PC (Critical Point)
Obviously, the QAP must be sent to the project or PA (Stop Point) ;
management supervisor before the beginning of the
notice and response times ;
work that it deals with, and before the dates
mentioned in the contract.
All "Quality" documents shall be managed in - the work execution procedures

the same way as detailed design documents
(design notes and drawings), in other words it The procedures shall include the following chapters :
must be accompanied by production of an
purpose ;
agreement by the project management supervisor
before the defined date (otherwise there is a risk reference documentation ;
of assumed tacit agreements and/or disputes). In means :
this respect, it is preferable if the Contractor is personnel, including a description of the
obliged to stop work until a stop point has been qualification of persons involved and
cleared, even if planed finishing dates have been references for inspection personnel ;
exceeded. equipment, with supply of any agreements ;
materials, with certifications of products
Finally, certification of companies does not supplied, if any ;
exempt them from producing a particular QAP.
methods, operating methods ;
This may comprise or refer to elements of the quality
system produced for certification (to be attached to inspections ;
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 1 Datasheet No. I-1 : Analysis of the QAP

sensitive points (critical or stop points) and Appendices to datasheet No. I-

associated deadlines (notices and responses). 1
Procedures given in the appendix only concern a few
frequent fields, procedures in other fields are dealt "Reinforcement" field
with in the corresponding specific datasheets.
"supply and bending of reinforcement"
- following-up sheets (attached to procedures) procedure
It is checked that headings and boxes are sufficient to "Prestressing" field

guarantee a formal internal check and traceability of
products and/or actions. "prestressing/grouting" procedure
It is checked that a nonconformity sheetis proposed. "Concrete" field
"supply" procedure
4. Documents to be viewed "placement" procedure
"surface " procedure
The QAP is analyzed with reference to the following
documents :
CCTG (Cahier des Clauses Techniques Gnrales

- General Technical clauses) leaflet 65 A ;
CCTP (Cahier des Clauses Techniques
Particulires - Particular Technical Clauses)
CCAP (Cahier des Clauses Administratives
Particulires - Particular conditions of contract) ;
current standards ;
implementation of Quality Assurance Plans
Construction of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete structures Guide for
contractors and Supervisors. Stra (Technical
Centre for Highways & Motorways) Technical
guide., December 1991, 53 p. (Stra reference
F9175) ;
recommendation notice to public clients dealing
with management and quality assurance when
issuing and during execution of work contracts.
Recommendation No. T1-87. BO No. 88-11, April
20 1988 ;
production of the quality master plan (SDQ)
Recommendation No. T1-89 to building public
clients. BOCCRF (Report of the opinions of the
Competition Council), March 27 1990 (in
particular, see G5 : Monitoring of operations
critical points stop points).

Procedure for supply/bending and placement of Procedure for prestressing/grouting

reinforcement
Reminder : a document specific to the site shall be

The following points need to be dealt with : provided.
Supply It is essential to assure that the prestressing procedure

includes an approval or a distribution or usage
Presentation of datasheets corresponding to authorization and that the reinforcement is approved
reinforcement and to any selected couplings or is authorized for supply or for use. Finally, make
(necessarily accepted for use of the NF AFCAB sure that there is a CMP (contractor prestressing
(French Association for Certification of Concrete supervisor) on the site and that the CMP is qualified.
Reinforcement) "steels for reinforced concrete" mark
and NF AFCAB "Butt connection or anchorage of The following points need also to be dealt with :
concrete reinforcement devices" mark).
Materials
Bending
Procurement and storage conditions
If the reinforcing steel supplier is AFCAB
reinforcement ;
certified, his QAP is accepted a priori.
ducts ;
If the reinforcing steel supplier is not AFCAB
certified, his QAP shall satisfy requirements of anchorages (wedge plate, flat plate, wedges) ;
the certification regulation and the on-site components of cement grout, flexible products
acceptance shall be done in accordance with the (grease, wax, etc.).
provisions of standard NF A35-027 (contact an
RST (Scientific & Technical Community) specialist on Equipment
the subject). Insertion and tensioning
Description of the equipment and supply of taring
Placement and calibration datasheets (contact an RST specialist on
the subject)
If the steel fitter is AFCAB certified, his QAP is
accepted a priori for measures that are not Grouting
specifically related to the site.
Description of the equipment and supplies (mixer,
If the steel fitter is not AFCAB certified, his tank, pump) (contact an RST specialist on the subject)
QAP shall satisfy the requirements of the
certification regulation (contact an RST specialist on Prestressing program
the subject).
The procedure shall deal with methods of Placement of ducts and built-in parts (to be
acceptance of reinforcements and prefabricated described)
elements, storage methods before placement, Suitability
fixing conditions on site (and if parts are welded, Take account of transmission coefficients
qualification of personnel), methods of launching
reinforcement and supporting conditions Tensioning
(number and type of bar supports). To be described with :
minimum concrete strength ;
Internal inspection tensioning order ;
Description of the verification of placed method of measuring elongations ;
reinforcement (proposal to clear stop points). pressure/elongation directives ;
Who ? Notice time ? Response time ? internal inspection methods
Existence of a following-up sheet. cutting off overlengths (stop point).

Provisional and final protection of Procedure for "concrete supply"

tensioned cables
To be described with :
The concrete supply procedure must deal with the
grouting program ; following points (a specific QAP may be produced) :
internal inspection methods. Study of the concrete formula with
reference to the requirements of the
Personnel CCTP according to :
organization chart ; environment and frost class ;
prestressing Supervisor (CMP) and adaptation to cold and hot weather ;
replacements ; alkali-reaction and sulfate reaction ;
execution personnel. and as according to the Contractors
specification (rheology, early strength, pour
method, Practical Working Time (DPU).
The enclosures should consist of :
Checks on references or the design
origin and references of the test
CMP and the tensioning
team (contact an RST specialist on the subject).
cable identification datasheets
cable tensioning sheets Following-up Production tool
cable grouting sheets documents main batching plant
pressure/elongation directives standby batching plant
grouting sheets suitability
accepted for the NF mark (general or particular
test
procedure)
nonconformity sheet
Internal production inspection means
(components, fresh and hardened
concrete)
Transport means (ready-mix trucks)
Production suitability (that can
integrate placement constraints)
program to be supplied (workability of
concrete, number of mixes, tests, etc.) ;
essential stop points.

Procedure for "concrete placement" Procedure for "concrete surfaces"
The following points need to be dealt with : The following points need to be dealt with :
Products Feasibility of pouring and

s t r i p p a b i l i t y o f c o n c r e t e s (starting from
method of concrete acceptance on site ;
formwork and reinforcement drawings) ;
description of the curing compound if any
(accepted for the NF "Additives for concretes, Capability of concretes to satisfy
mortars and grouts Curing compounds" p l a n n e d u s e s (firstly free water content and thin
mark. elements, and secondly largest aggregate size) ;
Suitability of pouring and vibration
Equipment m e a n s (control element) ;
unloading means (crane, pump, belt, hopper, Suitability of formwork procedures
tube, etc.) ; (including skin and stripping agent), t h e n u m b e r
number, diameter and type of vibrators (check of their reuses and rotation frequency
frequency). if applicable ;
Age when stripping
P l a c e m e n t (after checking shoring and discussion
Check of surfaces obtained with
with the COP (contractor permanent Works
record of any defects :
Supervisor) if necessary)
color variations ;
weather conditions (temperature, wind, rain) ;
efflorescence ;
condition of formwork ;
dark spots ;
condition of reinforcement interaction with
mottling ;
the "reinforcement" field
rust traces ;
liaison with the batching plant ;
bleeding ;
progress method ;
honeycombing ;
vibration method (thickness of layers, vibration
time) ; blisters ;
finishing method ; cracks ;
curing type and execution time. results mentioned on a following-up datasheet.
Internal inspection
analysis and verification of the delivery
voucher, particularly the "weighings" part ;
check the volumetric yield on fresh concrete ;
method of checking early strength ;
production of information test cylinders ;
maturity method.
Following-up sheet

Datasheet No. I-2

This consists of representing the line of cables, pipes
and buried structures in the site, using distinct stakes.
"Layout of structures and It may be done at the same time as or after the
general setting-out.
topographic monitoring of According to the CCAG, the project manager is
works" responsible for collecting information . However, the
CCAP often supersedes the CCAG and assigns this
task to the Contractor.
The CCAP also fixes dates by which the Contractor

1. Purpose of this datasheet and
must notify network operators. The Contractor's
generalities obligations in the subject, that in particular are
This datasheet describes the layout and topographic mentioned in the general SPS (Safety and Protection
monitoring of structures to be constructed. of Health) coordination plan, consist of making the
Declaration of Intent to Begin operations (DICT) in
General layout drawing for structures the forms and within the times specified in the
(article 27.1 in the CCAG - Cahier des Clauses regulations, to each network manager concerned by
Administratives Gnrales - General Conditions of the works.
Contract).
Finally, the Contractor is required to comply with the
This drawing is produced by the project manager provisions of decree 91-1147, October 14 1991
(either in his design office or by an outside design related to execution of works close to some
office). It defines the position of the structure with underground, overhead or underwater transport or
respect to fixed benchmarks, wherever possible distribution structures. This decree defines the
related to the Lambert system and the different protection perimeters for each type of
(NGF/IGN69) French Ordnance Survey. network, depending on the nature of the work to be
done.
Note : it is useful if this drawing shows which
reference benchmarks were used to produce it. When If the setting-out is done before the contract, the
existing benchmarks are not nearby, it is also useful if Contractor is notified of the special setting-out
the project manager installs benchmarks close to the drawing (exceptional case) ;
structure to be built before the project starts, If the special setting-out was not done before the
(indicating the position of the benchmarks on the contract, it will be done by the Contractor at his
general layout drawing). own expense, jointly with the project
management supervisor and representatives of
General setting-out (articles 27.2 in the CCAG and the networks (general case). In this case, the
7 in the CCAP) operation is summarized in a report drawn up by
the project manager and notified to the
This consists of representing structure center lines in Contractor.
the site using numbered stakes, related in plan and in If unidentified structures are discovered during the
elevation to the fixed benchmarks on the general works, the Contractor informs the project manager in
layout drawing. writing. He then makes a joint survey with the
project management supervisor and he must
If the setting-out is done before the contract postpone works adjacent to the discovered structure
starts, the general layout drawing notified to the until the project manager has made a decision (in a
Contractor will contain an indication of the Service Order), about measures to be taken.
position of the stakes ;
If the setting-out is not done before the contract, The special setting-out will be defined in a report
it will be done by the Contractor at his own signed by the project manager and notified to the
expense, jointly with the project management Contractor.
supervisor. In this case, the operation is followed
by a report drawn up by the project manager and Complementary setting-out (article 27.5 in the
notified to the Contractor. CCAG)
Special setting-out (articles 27.3 in the CCAG and 7 It complites the general setting-out.
in the CCAP)
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 1 Sheet No. I-2 : Layout of structures and topographic monitoring of works
This setting-out is one of the Contractor's obligations Benchmarks must be easy to use, particularly when
. It is often necessary to obtain enough precision in pouring a deck, so as to monitor any movements in
the future dimensions of the structure. falsework and to check the extrados level.
A distinction must be made between stakes placed for Contracts issued by the Ministry of Infrastructure
the purposes of the complementary setting-out and normally require that the project management
stakes placed for the purposes of the general setting- supervisor should verify complementary setting-out
out. (particularly if they are designed using the CAPT-
DCE software).
The Contractor is solely responsible for this
operation, even if the project management supervisor .
agree for the work.
Additional setting-out is necessary when the general

setting-out does not directly define the detailed layout
of all structures to be constructed. For example, the
additional setting out determines the exact location of
columns, piers, abutments, footings, etc., in the work
site.

Structures to be constructed are attached either to the general layout for a route (for example for a "new" road
outline), or to a local benchmark (when widening a structure).
In the first case, the project manager produced several documents before the works, and also made a general layout
of the route. The documents may have been produced at different periods by different persons.
Therefore, it is important to collect all documents concerned before the work starts, and to make sure that they are
consistent.
Before the work starts
Nature of the inspection Resources PA PC Comments
General setting-out
Prior validation of the general layout Design Office, Check that this document agrees with the
drawing drawing, computer route layout documents.
listings of road Check that the drawing is made using the
center lines right versions of the layout coordinates.
General setting-out operation Surveyor, stakes, X In principle, the main center lines are
layout drawing sufficient to position the structure to be
built, but it is essential that these center
lines should be defined unambiguously if
there is any risk of confusion, particularly
in the case in which the center lines of
footing s and the center lines of bearings
are not coincident.
Remember also that it will be difficult to
set out some important points of the
structure at a later date due to the
configuration of the site and/or
construction of some parts of the
structure. Therefore, a few secondary
benchmarks should be added for safety
reasons.
General setting-out notification See reminders above.
Special setting-out
Collection of information Project managers Network operators are usually identified

Design Office by the project managers Design Office
during the project preparation period,
Contractor and therefore it may be useful to contact
this design office.
Declaration of Network operators must be informed by
Intent to Begin the Contractor not less than ten days
operations (DICT) before the work start date (DICT
decree 91-1147, article 7).
Special setting-out operation Surveyor, network X

operators, stakes,
layout drawing,
network drawings
Special setting-out notification See reminders above.
During the work

Nature of the work Means PA PC Comments
General and special setting-out
Check benchmarks (stakes) Visual check, Check the condition of the benchmarks
layout drawing (anchorage to the ground, collision by
vehicles, etc.).
In doubt, check correspondence with the
layout drawing.
Transfer of benchmarks Surveyor, stakes, Prior approval of the project manager.

layout drawing Write a .
Complementary setting-out
Check complementary setting out Surveyor, layout X See reminders above.
done by the Contractor drawing
3. Documents to be supplied to the project management supervisor
declarations of intent to begin operations ; layout drawing for structures.
4. Documents to be viewed on site

layout drawing ;
layout and formwork drawings done by the Contractor.
5. Bibliography
Execution of work close to some underground, overhead or underwater transport or distribution structures.
Decree 91-1147, October 14 1991. Official Journal, November 9 1991.
Datasheet No. I-3

Note : The description of tasks inherent to checking
of detailed design and on-site monitoring are
described in the following separate sheets :
"Order of external check - No. I-4 review of detailed design principles ;
- No. I-5 signature of assumption and design notes ;
of detailed design" - No. I-6 signature of construction drawings.
2. Comments
1. Purpose of this datasheet and It is highly desirable that the design office responsible
generalities for the external check of the detailed design
("inspection office") should be appointed during the
The purpose of this datasheet is to help the project call for bids phase and that its mission should be
management supervisor write parts making up the extended to include assistance to the project
design office call for bids file for the external check management supervisor with evaluating the bids and
of the detailed design. then in finalizing the construction contract. To
achieve this, it is essential that the inspection office
This check is made within the external check should have all documents describing the early stages
performed by the project management supervisor. of the project.
The end purpose of the external check is to assure
that the work done is high quality. The choice of the Another advantageous organization consists of
inspection office is very important in this respect. extending the service provided by the design office
that did the previous design. In this case, the external
His role is to verify construction documents to assure check of the detailed design must be a conditional
that the quality of the constructed structure will phase of the initial contract.
comply with the requirements of the Client in three
aspects :
3. Composition of the file
conformity with the contract technical
specifications ; The design office call for bids file for carrying out an
conformity with regulatory documents and good external check of the detailed design is composed of
practice in force ; the following documents based on the General
monitoring of quantities. conditions of contract applicable to public contracts
for Intellectual Services (CCAG PI Cahier des
This mission is not equivalent to the mission done for Clauses Administratives Gnrales - PI General
buildings, in which "inspection" offices are called in Conditions of Contract -Intellectual mission) :
to assure that the construction is covered by
Tender regulations (RC) ;
insurance companies. The mission must enable the
project manager to sign construction documents Commitment document (AE) ;
necessary for the project. 1 Particular Conditions of contract (CCAP Cahier
des Clauses Administratives Particulires) ;
Particular Technical Clauses (CCTP Cahier des
Clauses Techniques Particulires) ;
Unit and Fixed Price Schedule (BPUF) ;
1 The CCTG Travaux (Cahier des Clauses Techniques Framework for Cost Estimate (DE).
Gnrales - General Technical Clauses -Woks) leaflet
65 A and the CCAG (General conditions of contract) Articles in the CCTP and the list of the BPUF prices
specify that all documents supplied by the Contractor are discussed in appendices 1 and 2.
should be submitted to the project manager for
signature (except for some documents dealing mainly Note : the CCTP and CCAP may be put together in
with second category temporary works). The a single document called the common requirements
Contractor cannot begin construction without this book (CPC).
signature. The contract contains the list of temporary
structures classified in the first category ; otherwise,
the Contractor shall produce a list of them at the
same time as the construction program and submit it
to the project management supervisor for a decision.
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 1 Datasheet No. I-3 : Order of external check of detailed design
4. For further information refer to : As an option (depending on the division of detailed

design services finalized by the project management
sheet No. I-4 review of the bases for the supervisor) ; in addition to these checks, the mission
detailed design ; may include also assistance to the project
sheet No. I-5 signature of assumptions notes management supervisor with interpreting the call for
and design notes ; bids and then finalization of the construction
sheet No. I-6 signature of construction contract.
drawings ;
To achieve this, the inspection office firstly makes a
the guide for control and management of bridge critical analysis of the documents produced during
design. Stra Technical guide, November 1997, 116 the bridge preliminary design phase, in order to
p. (Stra reference F9761) ; highlight the nature of problems that might be
the CCAG-Works ; encountered (particularly for variants suggested by
the CCAG-PI ; the Contractor).
CCTG leaflet 65 A.
The inspection office participates in design meetings,
Appendix 1 to sheet No. I-3 and coordination and project meetings at the request
of the project management supervisor.
Article 1 Purpose of the service
Article 4 Service procedure
title of the service ;
general presentation of the operation (description 4.1. Division of the service into steps
of the general context of the operation, The project management supervisor divides the
description of the bridge covered by the service design office service in two phases. The forecast
(main characteristics, construction times). duration of each phase is defined in the CCAP.
Article 2 Components of the CCTP Each phase is dependent on a reception issued

following a project review or a meeting that forms a
this Particular Technical Specification ; stop point. Approval of each phase will clear the
Appendix No. 1 : Bridge construction contract corresponding stop point.
file ;
Appendix No. 2 : Bridge construction program ; These phases are linked with the works contract
award contract procedure and then the detailed
Appendix No. 3 : Organization chart of the design survey. Their composition is defined below :
client and the Supervision team contract
managements quality assurance plan ; Phase 1 Assistance with bid evaluation
Appendix No. 4 : General planning for the Contract finalization
operation. review of submitted documents ;
participation in technical evaluation of the call
Article 3 Content of the service for bids ;
The service consists of checking drawings and analysis report on technical requirements
detailed design notes produced by the Contractors suggested by the Contractor ;
technical design office(s) for the construction project review with the project management
contract (and by his subcontractors). supervisor and the Contractor.
Phase 2 Detailed design checks
The purpose of the verification is to assure that the participation in the design kickoff meeting ;
documents comply with the contract specifications, verification of documents and issue of
regulations, standards and good practice in force, comments notes ;
their consistency, the legibility and exhaustiveness of
final project review with the Client and the
the drawings and design as submitted. It applies to all
project management supervisor, the Contractor
documents related to the final structures and first
and his design office(s), and the architect.
category temporary works.
The mission includes verification of the bridge trials 4.2. Integration of the service in the
program. It also includes an examination of general design procedure
procedures for carrying out the design and for The design office checking service should be included
checking reinforcement drawing schedule charts. in the general procedure for the operation and the
organization of the detailed design proposed by the 5.3. Documents supplied by the
Contractor and accepted by the project management inspection office :
supervisor.
Phase 1 : a contractor bids evaluation report for
dealing with the technical proposals and/or
Article 5 Service accomplishment variants presented ;
conditions Phase 2 : for each verified document and for each
index, the inspection office sends a numbered
5.1. General conditions comments note to the project management
supervisor (and possibly also to the Contractor
The general construction management function is and his design offices), notifying all points to be
done (name and title of the project management corrected, and then when the document requires
supervisor). no further comments, proposing the signature.
Site control and the necessary design work are done 5.4. Deadlines
under the control of the project management
supervisor, who sends the documents necessary for For the first index of each transmitted construction
smooth progress of the service to the inspection document, the inspection office has a time equal to
office as needs arise, and certifies the service . (duration variable between 7 and 15 calendar
performed. The project management supervisor days, to be fixed particularly depending on the
coordinates site supervision and in this respect complexity of the structure and the time taken by the
organizes design, site and phase meetings to suit project management supervisor to reply to the
needs. Contractor as fixed in the works contract) to send his
comments to the project management supervisor.
5.2. Documents supplied by the This time is reduced to (usually a week) for
project management supervisor documents sent with a higher index. These times
refer to the date of reception of documents by the
The project management supervisor provides the data
inspection office.
and documents necessary for carrying out the detailed
design check in good time, namely : 5.5. Penalties for late submission
the contractor tender document, then the If comment notes are submitted late, there will be a
contract file for the bridge construction ; penalty equal to an amount of 300 (amount to be
the bridge program ; varied as a function of the nature of the document
documents to be checked as they are produced, and the hindrance caused to the site) per late working
taking account of the forecast schedule for the day.
supply of these documents produced by the
Contractor (these documents may be transmitted The total amount of applicable penalties is limited to
directly by the Contractor to the inspection 10% of the ex VAT amount of the contract.
office, depending on the organization selected by
the project management supervisor) ;
drawings labeled "Approved for construction"
(ditto above).
Appendix 2 to sheet No. I-3
1 Help in analyzing bids Finalization of the contract

This price paid at a fixed fee for phase 1 of the service as defined in article 3 in the CCTP. It includes all
expenses inherent to carrying out this phase under conditions fixed in CCTP articles 4 and 5. In particular
it includes participation in the bid evaluation meeting and the project review before the contract is signed,
in the project management supervisor's offices.
- THE FIXED FEE :
2 Construction check
This price paid for phase 2 of the service related to verification of drawings and design notes for the
structure. It applies to all documents produced for the Contractor, and that will be used for work as
defined in article 3 in the CCTP.
In this respect, it includes all expenses inherent to production of this phase of the service under
conditions fixed in articles 4 and 5 in the CCTP, including costs of sending comment notes.
In particular, it includes participation in the design kick-off meeting and in the final project review in the
offices of the project management supervisor or on the site.
THE FIXED FEE :
3 Design meetings
This price paid for the half day of the additional design, coordination or site meeting per unit, in which
the design office participates at the request of the project management supervisor.
It includes travel to the project management supervisor's offices or to the site.
PER UNIT :
Note : The estimate shall indicate a reasonable number of meetings for which the evaluation of the bid will not be
made only on the fixed fee for verifications.
Datasheet No. I-4

as to not increase its size unnecessarily. The reader is
referred to the contract or to other more general
documents for some particular data. Obviously, the
"Review of detailed design list is not exhaustive and the project management
supervisor should adapt it to his own bridge and
principles" make sure that the special features in it are correctly
understood.
Notes : When the team responsible for the works is

1. Purpose of this datasheet and different from the team responsible for the project, it
generallities is useful if not essential that the team should specify
the history and the reasons for the choices that lead
The purpose of this datasheet is to help the project to the bridge as designed, so that an examination of
management supervisor, and when applicable, the the assumptions defined for construction are made in
external inspection office of the detailed design that full knowledge of the reasons. Note that at the time
the project management supervisor has appointed, to that this note is examined, the project management
assure that the Contractor has correctly taken account supervisor should verify the detailed design program
of all data and assumptions necessary for justification prepared by the Contractor to assure exhaustiveness
and construction of a standard structure (in the sense of the list of planned documents and that the times
of the May 5 1994 circular). necessary for design are compatible with the general
works planning.
The contract normally obliges the Contractor to
provide for approval, a document defining the
principles of the detailed design to the project Typical content of the assumptions note
management supervisor . This document is usually
produced by the detailed design office starting from 1. Chapter 1 Bridge general
the data and informations given in the contract description
technical documents, if necessary including the
Contractor's technical proposals. This document is This chapter summarizes the main geometric and
usually called the "assumptions note". functional characteristics of the structure :
Although the comment in article 32.2 in the CCTG morphology (bridge type, nature of foundations) ;
(General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65 A 1 specifies length ;
that submission of such a document is normally only spans ;
necessary when "the unusual nature of the design or transverse profile ;
the poor definition of the contract create a serious plan ;
risk of a discussion on these principles", and it does
longitudinal profile ;
not in any way eliminate the possibility of "an
exchange of views on these questions at the initiative underpass dimensions ;
of either of the two parties". static diagram ;
construction mode/phases.
As specified in the technical contract documents
written using the CAPT DCE software, we 2. Chapter 2 Regulatory texts and
recommend that an assumptions note should be technical references
requested systematically.
This chapter contains a list of the main documents
extracted from the directory of essential bridge texts
2. Datasheet contents and technical documents published by Stra (January
2005) and used for justification of bridges. It should
This datasheet fixes the typical contents of the be checked that the documents concerned are really
"assumptions note" to be provided by the Contractor. the documents forming part of the contract. The use
It gives a list of the different elements that should of calculation rules different from those used to
appear in it, for each main chapter. It only contains define the project can cause increases in quantities, or
"basic" general data useful for standard structures, so even partial redesign of structural elements.
1 August 2000 version
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 1 Sheet No. I-4 : Review of detailed design principles
General texts
Title Reference Regulatory nature
DC 79 Circular No. 79.25 dated 13.03.79 required by the regulations
Technical instruction on 1979
common directives about the
calculation of constructions
CPC (common requirements Circular No. 71.155 dated required by the regulations
book) title II Leaflet 61 29.12.1971 and its appendix I :
Design, calculation and tests of Order dated 28.12.1971 modified by
bridges Order dated 08.12.1980 and circular
Road bridge load and tests No. 71.156 dated 30.12.1971
program modified by circular 80.52 dated
09.12.1980
Heavy transport, definition of Circular letter DR R/EG3 dated required by the regulations
typical convoys and rules for 20.07.1983
checking structures
DTU NV 65 rules modified in DTU P06-002 required by the regulations
April 2000
Rules defining Snow and Wind
loads on constructions and
ancillary facilities
Rules about earthquake resistance design
Seismic zone in France Decree No.91-461 dated 14.05.1991 required by the regulations
Decree about prevention of the modified by Decree No.2000-892
seismic risk dated 13.05.2000
Classification of structures Order dated 15.09.1995 required by the regulations
Order about classification and
earthquake resistant construction
rules for bridges in the so-called
normal risk category
PS 92 rules Standard NF P06-013 required by the regulations
Earthquake resistant construction
rules rules applicable to
buildings (for foundations)
AFPS 92 guide Presses de lENPC (publishing not required by the regulations
Guide for protection of bridges house)
against earthquakes
Design guide Stra/SNCF - January 2000 not required by the regulations
Standard bridges in seismic zone
Rules about foundations and retaining structures
CCTG title V leaflet 62 93-3 TO of the MELT Official required by the regulations
Technical rules for the design and Bulletin
calculations for foundations of
civil engineering structures
CCTG leaflet 68 93-7 TO of the MELT Official required by the regulations
Execution of foundation works Bulletin
for Civil Engineering structures
General design guide Stra - December 1998 not required by the regulations
Retaining structures
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 2 Sheet No. I-4 : Review of detailed design principles
Rules for reinforced and prestressed concrete structures

CCTG Title I Section 1 leaflet 62 Special leaflet 99-8 required by the regulations
BAEL 91 revised in 99 of the MELT Official Bulletin
Technical rules for the design and
calculation of reinforced concrete
structures and constructions using
the limit states method
CCTG Title I Section II leaflet 62 Special leaflet 99-9 required by the regulations
BPEL 91 revised in 99 of the MELT Official Bulletin
Technical rules for the design and
calculation of prestressed concrete
structures and constructions
using the limit states method
CCTG leaflet 65 A Special leaflet 2000-3 of the MELT required by the regulations
Construction of Civil Engineering Official Bulletin
structures made of reinforced
concrete or post-tensioned
prestressed concrete
Addition to CCTG leaflet 65 A Special leaflet 2000-4 of the MELT required by the regulations
Construction of Civil Engineering Official Bulletin
structures made of reinforced
concrete or prestressed concrete
BT 1 Stra Guide document 1985 not required by the regulations
Technical bulletin No. 1 and its reprint
complement Design of bridge
top slabs
Bridge frames and portal frames : Stra guide document - 1992 not required by the regulations
design guide
Slab bridges. Design guide Stra guide document - 1989 not required by the regulations
PRAD Stra guide document - September not required by the regulations
Road bridges with prestressed 1996
prefabricated beams - PRAD -
Design guide
VIPP Stra guide document - February not required by the regulations
Road bridges with post-tensioned 1996
prestressed prefabricated girders -
VIPP - Design guide
PPE Stra guide document/SNCF - May not required by the regulations
Road bridges with encased beams 1995
deck - PPE - Design and
calculation guide
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 3 Datasheet No. I-4 : Review of detailed design principles
Rules for steel and composite structures

CPC (Common Requirements Special leaflet 78-9 ter of the MELT required by the regulations
Specification) Title V leaflet 61 Official Bulletin
Design and calculation of steel
bridges and constructions
CCTG leaflet 66 93-6 TO of the MELT Official required by the regulations
Execution of Civil Engineering Bulletin
structures with steel structure
Circular No. 81-63 dated 28.07.81 not required by the regulations ; this
related to rules for calculating circular should have been followed up
composite steel/concrete bridges by a special CCTG leaflet within 3
years after its issue, but it was not.
Composite bridges Stra - September 1995 not required by the regulations
Recommendations to control
cracking of slabs
Steel and composite bridges Stra/CTICM/SNCF - May 1996 + not required by the regulations
Fatigue resistance design and 97 errata
justifications guide
Rules for permanent equipments and superstructures
Cornices Stra civil engineering guide not required by the regulations
collection- December 1994
Draining of road bridges Stra - June 1989 not required by the regulations
(Evacuation of water,
embankment revetment, drainage,
gutter cornices)
Road bridge transition slabs Stra - October 1984 not required by the regulations
pot bridge bearings Stra technical guide - September not required by the regulations
Use on bridges, viaducts and 2000
similar structures
Level N safety barriers Stra civil engineering guide not required by the regulations
collection - September 2001
Level H safety barriers Stra civil engineering guide not required by the regulations
collection - September 1999
Guard rail Stra - civil engineering guide not required by the regulations
collection - April 1997
Rules about tests and temporary structures
CCTG leaflet65 A Special leaflet 2000-3 of the MELT required by the regulations
Construction of reinforced Official Bulletin
concrete or post-tensioned
prestressed concrete Civil
Engineering structures
CPC title II leaflet 61 Circular No. 71.155 dated required by the regulations
Bridge design, calculation and 29.12.1971 and its appendix I :
tests Order dated 28.12.1971 modified by
Road bridge load program and Order dated 08.12.1980 and circular
tests No. 71.156 dated 30.12.1971
modified by circular 80.52 dated
09.12.1980
CPC title V leaflet 61 Special leaflet 78-9 ter of the MELT required by the regulations
Design and calculation of steel Official Bulletin
bridges and constructions
(complying with DC71)
cable characteristics (section, fracture strength,

Chapter 3 Material properties jacking stress and force).
Values to be distinguished according to the
The following sections summarize the main prestressing systems used for each part of the bridge.
characteristics of materials to be specified in the
assumptions note. It must also contain all Structural steel (CPC (Common
assumptions necessary to determine them. Requirements Specification) Title V
leaflet 61)
Concrete (BAEL 91 revised in 99)
grade (S235, 275, 355, 420. 460) ;
strength class ; yield stress fy (depending on the plate thickness) ;
density r=2.5t/m3 ; quality class (usually K2G3 for steels covered by
characteristic strengths fc28, ft28 (fcj, ftj) ; standard NF EN 10025 and the basic quality for
instantaneous and long-term modulus of steels covered by standard NF EN 10113) ;
deformation Ei, Ed ; delivery state (N for normal state, M for
shrinkage er=2.0 x 10-4 (or 3.0 x 10-4 South East thermomechanical steels) ;
quarter of France) ; density (7.85 t/m3).
coefficient of thermal expansion lr=10-5 5m/C. Values to be distinguished according to the different
Values to be distinguished according to concretes elements making up the structure.
used for each part of the structure.
Steel concrete equivalence coefficient
Passive reinforcement (BAEL 91 (for composite structures) (Circular
revised in 99) No. 81-63 dated 28.07.81)
FeE grade (usually weldable quality) ; instantaneous coefficient ni (ni=6) ;
yield stress fe (mild steel FeE235, fe=235 MPa, long term coefficient n (n=18) ;
HA steel FeE500. fe=500 MPa) ; coefficients for calculation of on site bearing level
cracking coefficient h (smooth steels h=1. HA jacking.
h=1.6) ;
cracking condition and ultimate tensile stress x ; Characteristics of joints with regard to
cover (to be distinguished for different parts of the fatigue check (Fatigue resistance
the bridge), diameter and minimum spacing design and justifications guide)
(depending on the cracking condition) ; detail categories ;
cover and anchorage lengths, particular specific increase factor for the calculation stress
construction requirements, minimum percentages (coefficient k depending on thickness variations, etc.).
(seismic rules, rules about control of cracking of
composite bridge slabs, etc.). 3. Chapter 4 Foundation soils
Values to be distinguished according to steels used properties
for each part of the bridge (foundations, supports,
deck, superstructures, permanent equipments). The mechanical properties of soils are normally
specified in the geotechnical report attached to the
Prestressed reinforcement (BPEL 91 CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses).
revised in 99)
nature of cable (type and number of strands) ; By default, they could be determined by boreholes
made by the Contractor and submitted to the project
class (1770 or 1860 MPa) ; management supervisor for approval.
deformation modulus E (usually 190 000 MPa) ;
relaxation at 1000 hours r1000 (usually very low It is recommended that the project management
relaxation TBR, r1000=2.5%) ;system (check the supervisor should have specialists from regional
approval) ; laboratories attend to check the soils assumptions
friction in line f and in curve f ; provided by the Contractor.
anchor set g ; Surface foundations (CCTG title V
duct diameter, anchor dimensions, cover and leaflet 62 )
various construction requirements (minimum radius
of curvature, etc.) ; nature of the foundation soils ;
pressure meter modulus E ;
limit pressure pl ; Self weight of permanent equipmentss

creep pressure pf ; and superstructures
equivalent limit pressure Ple* ; A distinction must be made between characteristic,
equivalent embedment depth De ; maximum and minimum values evaluated according
resistance at tip of penetrometer ; to the provisions of DC 79. In general, fixed
bearing factor kp ; fractions are +6/-4% and +3/-2% for prefabricated
concrete elements (knowing that the weights fixed in
internal angle of friction f' ;
CAPT-DCE are slightly different : 5% and 3%).
cohesion c' ;
rheological factor a (for calculation of settlement) asphalt waterproofing layers : quantity survey
; (usually 3 cm), density 2.4 t/m3, fraction 20% ;
shape coefficient lc and ld (for calculation of prefabricated waterproofing sheet l : quantity
settlement) ; survey (usually 5 mm), density 1.3 t/m3,fraction 5%
level of the water table. ;
Values to be distinguished for each foundation unit. resin waterproofing layer : (as a reminder, average
thickness 2.5 mm, density varying from 1.10 t/m3 for
Deep foundations (CCTG title V polyurethane to 1.40 t/m3 for epoxy) ;
leaflet 62 ) roadway layer : quantity survey, density
2.4 t/m3,fraction + 40 and - 20% unless the
For each layer of ground through which piles are
resurfacing thickness is already known, in this case
installed :
fraction 20% ;
thickness of the layer ; edge gutter cornice : full of density 1.5 t/m3 mud
nature of the soil ; ;
pressure meter modulus E ; edge cornice : survey quantity according to
formwork, density depending on material ;
limit pressure pl ;
pedestrian parapet : measured (usually 20 to 50
creep pressure pf ;
kg/ml) ;
rheological factor a ; two-function pedestrian parapet 25 kg/ml ;
associated friction curve ; safety railing : schedule (usually 20 kg/ml) ;
bearing coefficient kp. BN1 : 620 kg/ml ;
Also specify : BN2 : 605 kg/ml ;
BN4 : 65 kg/ml ;
the water table level ;
BN4-16 : 70 kg/ml ;
the presence of compressible soils, dissolved
BN5 : 50 kg /ml ;
gypsum, liquefiable soils ;
BHO : 100 kg/ml ;
scouring depths at river supports etc. ;
B-hab : 86 kg/ml ;
and assumptions made to take account of them.
GBA : 620 kg/ml ;
Values to be distinguished for each support.
DBA : 700 kg/ml ;
utilities and pipes : quantity surveys, fraction
4. Chapter 5 - Actions 20% ;
miscellaneous (curbs, curb backing, lampposts,
Dead loads vertical signaling, grating, sidewalk slabs, screens) :
The weight of structures and the weight of permanent quantity surveys and/or catalogs.
equipment must be separated.
Worksite loads
Self weight of structures (DC 79) Site machinery and equipment (usually 500 kg on a
Concrete : calculated based on formwork 3 m x 3 m surface and 75 kg on the remainder
drawings assuming a density of 2.5 t/m3 for (contractual appendix B to CCTG leaflet 65 A , article
reinforced concrete ; 2.3), special equipment (forming tools, launching
Steel : calculated based on structural drawings nose, etc.)
(taking account of stiffeners, spacers, etc.) assuming a
density of 7.85 t/m3 for steel. L i v e l o a d s ( CPC title II leaflet 61 )
structure class ; transverse axis 19 kNm, moment about longitudinal

running width, loadable width ; axis 6.2 kNm ;
applicable road loads (A(l), Bc, Bt) ; two-function pedestrian parapet : moment about
military loads (Mc80, Mc120) ; longitudinal axis 15 kNm ;
dynamic load factor for B system and military BN1 and BN2 : on 5 m horizontal force
loads (making a distinction between the coefficient 100 kN/m, moment about longitudinal axis 50
for general loads and the coefficient for local loads) ; kNm/m ;
exceptional loads (3rd category convoys, C, D and BN4 and BN4-16 : horizontal force 300 kN,
E weighted by 1.1) ;sidewalk loads (usually 150 moment about longitudinal axis 200 kNm ;
kg/m2, local 450 kg/m2, 6 t wheel) ; BN5 and BHO : moment about transverse axis
braking forces, centrifugal forces ; 9.5 kNm, moment about longitudinal axis 19 kNm ;
loads on fill (usually load given in leaflet 61 title B-hab : horizontal force 120 kN, moment about
II : 1t/m2). longitudinal axis 110 kNm ;
GBA and DBA : horizontal force 570 kN over a
C l i m a t i c a c t i o n s ( CPC title II leaflet 61 ) length of 10 m, moment about longitudinal axis of
430 kNm distributed over 5 m (values within 40 ).
wind action : usually application of article 14 of The calculation results are then weighted by an
title II leaflet 61 : in temporary phase assume uncertainty coefficient (see level H barrier guide).
1250 N/m2, then 2000 N/m2 in final phase ;
Actions transmitted by other
uniform temperature variation : rare load case :
equipment
differences of + 30 C and 40 C including a quickly
varying range 10 C (calculated with the Lampposts, vertical signals, screens, etc.
instantaneous concrete modulus) and a slow range
+ 20 C/ 30 C (calculated with the long-term Vehicle shock on supports (see
concrete modulus) ; appendix D to the BAEL 91 revised in
temperature gradient (for some concrete 99)
structures) : 12 C ; force applied 1.50 m above the road surface, the
differential action of temperature for composite value of which depends on the speed of lorries +
structures : 0.5 x 10-4 to be combined with shrinkage force /5 applied at 4 m above the road surface ;
; (Extreme values 1000 kN frontal and 500 kN lateral).
snow (if applicable).
Particular actions on supports in water
Prestressing (BPEL 91 revised in 99)
hydrostatic thrust : permanent action calculated
reminder about the design value Pd (usually for the lowest water level and for the highest water
probable value Pm and complementary checks). level ;
hydrodynamic thrust : permanent action
Effect of shrinkage and creep considering the lowest and the highest water levels,
creep : see BPEL 91 revised in 99 ; using the specified current velocity ;
shrinkage : final value er = 2.0 x 10-4 (or 3.0 x 10- shock by floating bodies ;
4 south-east quarter of France). shock by boats : see appendix D of the BAEL 91
A distinction should be made between the situation revised in 99.
before starting up and the situation after
redistribution, at "infinite" time. Access fill thrust
nature of materials ;
Actions transmitted by railing systems
mechanical properties ;
The structure must be checked under the following weight of earth (usually 20 kN/m3) ;
forces combined with forces due to dead loads only, thrust coefficient (usually Ka = 0.33 ; dual
with additional weighting at ELS, limiting the stress in calculation (0.25 0.50) in the case of PIPO
passive steels to 2/3 fe. (Underpass open frame), PICF (Underpass closed
frame), POD(Double Open Portal),
railings GS2 or GS4 : moment about transverse
axis 15 kNm, moment about longitudinal axis 3.5 hydrostatic thrust (usually no thrust because
kNm ;railings GR4 or GRC : moment about drainage device).
Earthquake loads (AFPS 92 guide) Parasite forces on piles (CCTG title V

leaflet 62 )
Two calculation methods can be considered, the
spectrum calculation (general case) and the time negative friction ;
calculation. The note must indicate the selected horizontal thrust.
method and provide the corresponding information : Foundation settlement
spectrum calculation differential settlement value, depending on the
seismicity zone ; nature of the ground and the foundation type (usually
structure class ; 1 cm) ;
structural damping. associated concrete modulus (usually long-term).
time calculation Jacking

accelerograms ; differential upwards movement of one row of
structural damping. bearings compared with the next (usually 1 cm) ;
associated concrete modulus : instantaneous ;
Load for checking fatigue (composite associated road loads.
bridge) (Fatigue resistance design
and justifications guide)
5. Chapter 6 - Loads Combinations of
lorry Bf ; actions
weighting coefficient c (depending on traffic) ;
partial safety coefficient gMf ; Definitions
transverse positioning. Gmax = all permanent actions unfavorable ;
Gmin = all permanent actions favorable ;
Forces transmitted through the Ts = uniform temperature variation ;
structure to the bridge bearings
GTs = temperature gradient in service ;
(Technical guide "Laminated
elastomeric berings and pot GTr = temperature gradient during construction
bearings") ;
Fa = accident action ;
-laminated elastomeric bridge bearings :
Qr = actions due to road loads with no particular
distribution of horizontal forces to be calculated
nature ( A and B systems) ;
prorata to stiffnesses of bridge bearings, supports and
foundations ; Qrp = actions due to special road loads (military
convoys, exceptional convoys) ;
bridge bearings with sliding pots : horizontal
force = fraction of the vertical load usually 3.5% Ws = wind action in service ;
(friction) + 0.3% (placement precision) ; We = wind action in a construction situation ;
bridge bearings with fixed pots : force dependent Qpra = random actions due to on structure loads
on the longitudinal equilibrium of the structure (see under construction ;
Stra technical guide). Qprc = known actions due to on structures loads
under construction.
Forces originating from surface joints
actions on abutment walls (case of thrusting For launched steel structures :
joints) ;
G1 = fraction of structural self-weight that
actions on the deck depending on the type of
improves equilibrium ;
joint (for example cantilever) [mentioned for
reminder, since this case does not arise often for a Q1 = fraction of installation load that improves
typical bridge]. equilibrium ;
G2 = fraction of the structural self-weight that
Forces during launching or pushing deteriorates equilibrium ;
Q2 = fraction of the installation load that
horizontal forces at the top of the piers deteriorates equilibrium.
determined as a function of the vertical load reaction,
the slope and internal friction.
In service limit state Combinations of 6. Chapter 7 - Justifications Design

actions methodology
In service, rare combinations
This chapter must describe the methods used for the
Gmax + Gmin + 1.2 Qr + 0.5 GTs + 0.6 Ts justification of all structural components. It must
Gmax + Gmin + Qrp contain :
Gmax + Gmin + GTs + Ts
a description of calculation models and principles
Gmax + Gmin + Ws
used ;
In service, frequent combinations the construction phases considered ;
check criteria used according to CCTP
Gmax + Gmin + 0.72Qr (1st class bridge) requirements.
Gmax + Gmin + 0.48Qr (2nd class bridge)
Gmax + Gmin + 0.24Qr (3rd class bridge) More than in previous chapters, these methods are
Gmax + Gmin + 0.5GTs + 0.5Ts specific to the bridge type and construction
In service, quasi permanent conditions. The following paragraphs draw up a
combination general list of the main elements to be justified and a
broad outline of methods to be used. Therefore, this
Gmax + Gmin. chapter needs to be completed and adapted for each
bridge designed.
In construction phase
Gmax + Gmin + Qpra + Qprc + We ; Note that particular rules for the design of bridges
(including foundations) and bridge equipment (for
Gmax + Gmin + Qpra + Qprc + GTc.
example bearings) need to be adapted in accordance
with current regulations .
Final ultimate strength limit state
Combinations of actions JUSTIFICATION OF THE DECK
In service, fundamental combinations Reinforced concrete bgridges
1.35 Gmax + Gmin + 1.35 Qrp ; Justifications are made using the rules in the BAEL
1.35 Gmax + Gmin + 1.6 Qr + 0.8 GTs + 0.8 Ts 91 revised in 99.
;
1.35 Gmax + Gmin + 1.5 Ws ; Prestressed concrete bridges
1.35 Gmax + Gmin + 1.35 GTs + 1.35 Ts. Justifications are made using BPEL 91 revised in 99.
In construction phase, fundamental The verification class fixed in the CCTP must be
combinations mentioned.
1.35 Gmax + Gmin + Qprc + 1.50 We + 1.3 Composite bridges
Qpra ;
1.35 Gmax + Gmin + Qprc + 1.50 Qpra + 1.3 Justifications are made using Circular No. 81-63 dated
We. 28.07.81 related to calculation rules for composite
steel/concrete bridges and according to justifications
Accident combinations defined in Road bridge surface joint. The deck is
calculated in accordance with the "Composite steel
Gmax + Gmin + Fa. concrete double girder bridges - Design guide
document" printed by Stra in March 1990. The
Static equilibrium fatigue check on the structure is made according to
1.05 G2 + 0.95 G1 + 1.2 Q2 + 0.8 Q1 ; recommendations in the Stra "Fatigue resistance
design and justifications" guide.
+ longitudinal positioning error of the deck equal
to one meter. Encased beams bridges
Note : particular combinations (not defined above) Justification calculations are made according to the
could be envisaged for bridge calculations and recommendations in the "Road bridges with deck
structural calculations in a seismic zone (refer to the composed of encased beams Design and
corresponding regulatory texts). calculation" published by Stra and the SNCF in May
1995.
JUSTIFICATION OF TEMPORARY application of these rules is the reduced contact area

WORKS defined in standard pr EN 1337-5.
Justifications are made based on the requirements in Stability of piers
the CCTG leaflet 65 A .
It is recommended that the stability and
JUSTIFICATION OF BRIDGE reinforcement of piers shall be justified based on the
BEARINGS principles and design rules given in section 1.3.2 of
the "Piers and bents : PP73 Pilot file" document
Vertical reactions at bearing devices are determined
published by Stra in 1977.
taking account of transverse distribution factors.
Dynamic load factors for live loads are also taken into Transition slabs : reinforcement is justified
account. Bridge bearings on abutments are justified following the requirements given in the "Road
assuming that these abutments are blocked by bridge transition slabs" guide published by Stra in
transition slabs that have friction contact with the fill, October 1984. In calculating bearing reactions on
and therefore cannot be displaced. the structure, it should be assumed either the
maximum reaction or reaction equal to zero (slab
Further information about laminated
entirely supported on fill).
elastomeric bridge bearings
Estimate of displacements : apart from normal
The dimensions of laminated e l a s t o m e r i c bridge strength justifications, the settlements and
bearings are justified using chapters 3 and 4 in the horizontal displacements of bearings must be
document entitled "Laminated elastomeric bridge calculated.
bearings - Technical guide", published by Stra in Taking account of installation inaccuracies :
September 2000. bearing calculations are made assuming that vertical
loads from the deck are eccentric in the transverse
Further information about pot bearing Pot bearing
or longitudinal direction, and that one pile is
devices are justified in accordance with the rules given
eccentric (for deep foundations).
in chapter 4 "Design principles for a structure
comprising rubber pot bridge bearings" in the Stra Justification of bearings supporting pot bridge
"Pot bridge bearings - Use on bridges, viaducts and bearings : justifications are made following the
similar structures " technical guide, September 2000 rules given in chapter 4 "Design principles for a
and in standards NF EN 1337-1. NF EN 1337-2 and bridge comprising pot bearing ", in the Stra
pr EN 1337-5. These rules may be complemented by technical guide "Pot bridge bearings - Use on
restrictive conditions. bridges, viaducts and similar structures", September
2000.
Further information about metallic
bearing devices Justification of foundations
Elements of metallic bearing devices are sized Assumptions for foundation calculations are based
according to CPC (Common Requirements either on the geotechnical study attached to the
Specification) Title V leaflet 61, introducing the worst CCTP, or additional geotechnical boreholes made by
load combinations. the Contractor.
JUSTIFICATION OF SUPPORTS AND For steel foundations, steel corrosion overthicknesses

FOUNDATIONS are used in accordance with assumptions defined in
the CCTP or otherwise in article C.4.2.22 in CCTG
Justification are made according to the BAEL 91 title V leaflet 62 .
revised in 99. Foundations are justified using rules
given in CCTG title V leaflet 62 . JUSTIFICATION OF PERMANENT
EQUIPMENTS
Crosshead for piers and abutments
Expansion joints
The prestressing distribution rules (appendix No. 4 in
BPEL 91 revised in 99) and appendix E8 in BAEL Pavement expansion joint movements are determined
91 revised in 99 "Method of calculating using the method described in the "Road bridge
reinforcement for a concrete part submitted to local surface joint - Technical document" published by
pressures in the sense of article A.8.4", may be used Stra in 1986.
to justify the distribution of bearing reactions and
similar concentrated forces. The surface area
adjacent to pot bridge bearings to be used for
Pedestrian parapet soil permeability ;

Retaining devices are designed in accordance with the dewatering wells if any ;
requirements of chapter IV in CPC (common the different construction phases.
requirements book) title II Leaflet 61 and completed
by the approved standards in force. Justification of anchorage rods
Anchorage rods are justified in accordance with the
Safety barriers
"Recommendations for the design, calculation,
Refer to the civil works guide for forces to be used ( construction and inspection of anchorage rods"
5.4.2 for level N barriers, 5.4 for level H barriers). guide, document referred to as "TA 95
recommendations" and published by the French
Draining of water from the deck Committee for Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Water drainage systems are sized in accordance with Works in 1995.
the rules in the second part of the document
Justification of minipile foundations
"Draining of road bridges - Technical guide"
published by Stra in 1989. Refer to recommendations made by CLOUTERRE
91 and its 2002 addenda and standard XP P94-240.
Noise screens
JUSTIFICATIONS ABOUT NEARBY
It is recommended that standard EN 1794-1 should
CONSTRUCTIONS
be used.
Justification for nearby constructions, if any,
JUSTIFICATION OF RETAINING described in chapter 1 in the CCTP will be provided
STRUCTURES both for the temporary and final phases. In general,
Design assumptions for retaining structures are the checks apply essentially on the allowable nature of
supplied in the design guide specific to each type of expected displacements, and possibly on the type of
structure. In general, justification calculations take justification.
account particularly of the soil characteristics
encountered and maximum and minimum water
levels on each side of the retaining wall.
Justification of reinforced concrete

retaining walls
It is recommended that the design principles set
down in the "Retaining structures General design
guide" document published by Stra in 1998 should
be used to justify the external stability of retaining
walls and information in BAEL 91 revised in 99
should be used to justify their reinforcement.
Justification of Reinforced Earth type

structures
Reinforced walls and structures of the reinforced
earth type are justified according to the Reinforced
Earth recommendations and design rules defined in
standards NF P94-220-0 and NF P94-220-1.
Particular assumptions to be considered are stipulated
in the CCTP.
Justification of cofferdams and sheet

pile walls
The calculations shall take account of :
the steel grade ;

the type and nature of the anchorages of the
sheet piles ;
Datasheet No. I-5

"Signature of the
assumption and design
notes"
Article 29.14 specifies that the "Contractor cannot
1. Purpose of this datasheet and generalities begin construction of a bridge until he has received
approval or signature from the project management
The purpose of this datasheet is to describe the supervisor about the documents necessary for this
preliminary approach necessary to issue the signature construction. The CCAP fixes times that the project
of the assumptions note or a detailed design note. management supervisor is allowed to formulate
observations on documents transmitted by the
Note : the signature of the construction drawings is Contractor.
described in datasheet No. I-6.
Article 29.13 in the CCAG - Travaux (General 2. Purposes

Conditions of Contract - Works) specifies that "the
The purpose of the approach before the signature
drawings, design notes, detailed design and other
described in this sheet is to make an examination of
documents produced by the Contractor are submitted
design notes produced by the Contractor, to verify
to the project management supervisor for approval..."
that the structure is correctly justified by respecting
"However, if specified in the CCAP (Particular
standards, regulations and good practice in effect, and
Conditions of Contract), some or all of the
that it satisfies all particular technical specifications
documents listed above are submitted only to the
for the contract.
project management supervisor for signature". CCTG
(General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65 A does not Therefore, this detailed design verification is designed
make any distinction and its "General" article 31 to guarantee the technical value of the planned
states that all documents supplied by the Contractor structure by respecting safety and durability
are submitted to the project management supervisor requirements, and possibilities of subsequent
for signature except for some documents mainly maintenance but also aesthetics and cost control. It is
related to second category temporary works like those unrelated to the mission done by "inspection" offices
defined in articles 45 to 48 in chapter 4. for buildings, for which the objective is to obtain
insurance for the construction. Therefore, the project
CCTPs (Particular Technical Clauses) produced using
management supervisor will have considerable
the CAPT-DCE OA software this article 29, by
responsibility for the detailed design of a bridge, so
stating that the design notes are not signed. They also
that he must make very substantial check (possibly
exclude all documents related to second category
with the assistance of an external office).
temporary works, knowing that first category
temporary works are signed by the project
management supervisor. 3. Actions to be carried out
The contract contains the list of classified in the first The following table describes the various actions
category ; by default, the Contractor shall produce the necessary before signature, making a distinction
list at the same time as the construction program and between the case in which the project management
shall submit it to the project management supervisor supervisor makes the verifications himself, and the
for decision (article 41.2 in the CCTG leaflet 65 A). case in which the external check of the construction
documents is subcontracted (see sheet related to the
order for an external check of the detailed design
datasheet I-3).
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 1 Sheet No. I-5 : Signature of the assumption and design notes
The inspection mission is not subcontracted The inspection mission is subcontracted

Action 1 : document management Action 1 : document management
Make a regular review (for example every week during the make a regular review (for example before holding the
site meeting) of the forecast planning for submission of site meeting) of the forecast planning for submission of
construction documents produced by the Contractor and construction documents produced by the Contractor and
the following-up table for these documents drawn up by the follow-up table for these documents drawn up by the
the project management supervisor, and ask the project management supervisor, and anticipate delays by
Contractor for the late documents. asking the Contractor for future documents. Similarly, ask
for comment notes to be produced by the inspection
office, so as to respect contractual deadlines fixed in the
CCAP.
make sure that the inspection office has received the
design notes.
Action 2 : check the design note Special case of the assumptions note : even when the
Appendix 1 describes methods of verification and a list of inspection mission is subcontracted, it is of overriding
the main points to be examined, depending on the importance that the project management supervisor
nature of the note (general assumptions note, final examines the general assumptions note and makes sure
bridge design note, design notes for bridges under that assumptions are consistent with the data used for
construction. preparation of the project (see sheet No. I-4 "review of
detailed design principles "). Not all data and constraints
included during preparation of the project are
systematically formally translated by contract into the
contract technical documents. This examination is
necessary particularly when the Contractor proposes
design variants (even apparently minor).
Action 3 : sending a comments note to the Action 2 : sending a comments note to the Contractor
Contractor Following reception of a comments note issued by the
if the design note is validated, the project management inspection office, and validation of the content, and
supervisor informs the Contractor that he has no correction and/or additions if necessary.
particular comments on the document. The design note if neither the inspection office nor the project
can then be signed if stipulated by the contract. management supervisor has any comments on the
if the design note is not validated, the project calculation note, the project management supervisor
management supervisor informs the Contractor about his informs the Contractor that he has no particular
comments and asks for the document to be corrected comments. The calculation note can then be signed if
accordingly (send a calculation note with the next revision stipulated by the contract.
index). This procedure is repeated until the calculation if the design note is not validated, the project
note is fully conforming and can then be signed, also if management supervisor informs the Contractor about his
stipulated by the contract. comments and asks for the document to be corrected
accordingly (send a design note with the next revision
index). This procedure is repeated until the design note is
fully conforming and can then be signed, also if stipulated
by the contract.
Note : if the detailed design office does not agree with one
or several comments made by the inspection office, the
project management supervisor shall "arbitrate", by
conforming or amending the comments sent, possibly
after listening to both sides in a special meeting, or even
obtaining an additional outside opinion.
Action 4 : fill in the documents following-up table Action 3 : fill in the documents follow-up table
4. Documents to be viewed by the project management supervisor

As in the previous section, the list of documents to be viewed is given below, making a distinction between the case
in which the project management supervisor makes the verification himself and the case in which the external check
of construction documents is subcontracted.

datasheets related to the "review of detailed design datasheets related to the "review of detailed design
assumptions", to "signature of the general assumptions assumptions", to "signature of the general assumptions
note", and the "check of construction drawings" ; note", and the "check of construction drawings" ;
technical documents in the contract files (drawings, technical documents in the contract files (drawings,
specifications, etc.) ; specifications, etc.) ;
general assumptions note ; forecast planning for submission of construction
standards, design rules and technical documents (see documents ;
appendix) ; document follow-up table ;
previous comments note about the examined design external check QAP produced by the inspection office
note ; (if there is one).
forecast planning for submission of construction
documents ;
documents follow-up table.
which Stra standard structure programs are used).

Verification methods direct verification : if the note is handwritten and is
Summary list of the main points to described correctly in detail and/or if the design
be examined programs used are known and validated within the
Ministry of Infrastructures, a direct manual step-by-step
Note : the list of verifications mentioned above is not check can be made by random or complete recalculation
exhaustive. and/or verification of data input into the programs and
verification that the results are consistent.
Fast document examination verification by parallel calculations : if the program
It is recommended that the verification should begin with used by the detailed design office is not as well known or
a first fast examination of received construction if there is a need to test assumptions that are different or
documents. The purpose of this first "overview" is to complementary to those used by the Contractor or more
assure that the design is suitable in general and sufficient. generally if it is required to fully dissociate the verification
This examination deals mainly with conformity with the calculations from the construction calculations (for
project, readability, consistency and exhaustiveness of the example to avoid being influenced by the reasoning), a
design submitted. The detailed verifications cannot begin counter calculation is carried out using software available
until the end of this first step, if the design documents to the project management supervisor. The final check is
are considered to be satisfactory. then made on the results and construction measures
proposed by the Contractor.
Verification of the general assumptions note
Verification of a first category temporary works
Check on the validity, exhaustiveness and consistency of design note
assumptions with the different clauses or technical data
in the contract (geotechnical study, hydraulic, Reminder : first category temporary works are subjected
architectural study, construction phases, etc.), but also to the project management supervisor for signature.
and more globally with data and constraints integrated Articles 45 to 48 in leaflet 65 A in the CCTG state that a
during preparation of the project (see datasheet No. I-4 signature is not necessary for several documents related
"review of detailed design principles"). This "return" to to second category temporary works. CCTPs produced
the different elements on which the project was based using the CAPT-DCE OA software state that a signature
will become particularly important when the Contractor is not necessary for any documents related to second
suggests variants or adaptations of the project, even category temporary works. The first verification consists
apparently minor. of assuring that the COP (temporary works supervisor)
has signed or countersigned all documents necessary for
Verification of a final bridge design note the temporary works project.
The verification begins with the check that the general Verification methods are similar to those presented
assumptions are respected (fixed in the assumptions above. The global analysis of the load path is particularly
note) and the verification of assumptions specific to important. The main points to be examined are as
justifications, subject of the design note examined, check follows :
that justified dimensions are consistent with the
dimensions of the formwork drawings. check vertical and horizontal support reactions ;
It is also recommended that a first and global analysis of check on the longitudinal bending of bridges during
load paths should be made. One of the purposes of this launching or placement ;
analysis is to assure that all justifications have actually check transverse bending and any necessary
been made. The detailed verification can then begin. reinforcement (cross bracing, etc.) ;
Three indicative verification approaches are given below. check local forces ;
They should be used alternately or one in addition to the check general sizing (including foundations if any) of
other, depending on the part of the bridge being studied, temporary works (false work and foundations and
and the nature and understandability of the design supports, front nose, fasteners, rear noses, carriage form
produced by the Contractor. or fixed travelers, temporary supports, etc .) ;
simplified verification : if the design program used by check that methods developed by the Contractor to
the Contractor is known and validated within the construct or place the bridge are consistent with the
technical network of the Ministry of Infrastructures, he design of the bridge, particularly for actions on the
can check the data and consistency of the results (case in structure of temporary works or accessories.

Summary list of the main technical
reference documents
For guidance, the inspection may apply to technical Eurocode 4 DAN Design and sizing of composite
documents in the following partial list. Warning, these steel and concrete structures ;
documents must have been defined in the contract Stra Technical guide for the design and calculation of
otherwise Contractors cannot be obliged to respect them. transverse elements in composite road bridges ;
OTUA steel bridges bulletin No. 11 Design and
Technical instruction on 1979 common directives ; calculation of transverse elements in composite bridges ;
CPC (common requirements book) title II leaflet 61 - Stra Technical guide for the design and justification of
Road bridge loads and tests program ; metallic bridges and composite bridges, under fatigue
Eurocode 1 DAN Design principles and actions on conditions ;
structures ; Stra recommendations to control cracking of
Title V leaflet 62 - Rules for the design and composite bridge decks ;
calculation of foundations for civil engineering structures Stra Technical guide for the use of rubber pot bridge
; bearings ;
Title I leaflet 62 - CCTG section I - BAEL 91 rules Stra Technical guide for the use of laminated
revised in 99 ; elastomeric bridge bearings ;
Title I leaflet 62 - CCTG section I - BPEL 91 rules AFPS 90 recommendations, AFPS 92 guide for
revised in 99 ; seismic protection of bridges ;
Eurocode 2 DAN Design for concrete structures, Eurocode 8 DAN Design and sizing of structures for
CCTG leaflet 65 A - Construction of civil engineering earthquake resistance ;
works made of reinforced or prestressed concrete ; Design guide for typical bridges in seismic zone ;
CPC Title V leaflet 61 attached to circular No. 78.33, Stra technical bulletin No. 1 Design of bridge top
June 22 1977 Design and calculation of steel bridges slabs ;
and constructions made of steel and its appendix 1 - DC Stra Technical guide for drainage of road bridges ;
71 ;
Design and design rules for wood structures and 1975
Steel construction design rules - CM66 rules ; modification - CB71 rules ;
Eurocode 3 DAN Design of steel structures ; Eurocode 5 Design of wood structures
Circular No. 81.63, July 28 1981 Regulation for
design of composite bridges ;
DDE FOLLOW-UP OF CONTRACT : CONTRACTOR : DATE

Department CONSTRUCTION Contract title Contractor name Update date
name DOCUMENTS
Reference Title Index 0 A B C D E BPE

Document Reception date date date date date date date
No. Check op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
Architects op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date
opinion
Laboratory op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date
opinion
project op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date Sig. date
management
supervisors
opinion
No Check op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
opinion
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
opinion
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
opinion
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
opinion
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Opinion codes : ADM opinion with modification request ASO opinion without comment AO opinion with comment without
modification request BPE : Approved for construction
Datasheet No. I-6

"Signature of construction
drawings"
1. Purpose of this datasheet and Supervision is allowed to formulate observations on

generalities documents transmitted by the Contractor.
The purpose of this datasheet is to describe the
preliminary approach necessary to validate a 2. Purposes
construction drawing.
The purpose of the approach before the signature
Note : the signature of construction design notes is described in this datasheet is to make an examination
described in datasheet No. I-5. of the construction drawings and their consistency
with the results of justification calculations, to verify
Article 29.13 in the CCAG - Travaux (General that the structure is correctly justified by respecting
conditions of contract - Works) specifies that "the standards, regulations and good practice in force, and
drawings, design notes, detailed design and other that it satisfies all particular technical specifications
documents produced by the Contractor are submitted for the contract.
to the project management supervisor for approval..."
"However, if specified in the CCAP (Particular Therefore, this detailed design verification mission is
Conditions of Contract), some or all of the designed to guarantee the technical value of the
documents listed above are submitted only to the planned structure by respecting safety and durability
project management supervisor for signature". CCTG requirements, and possibilities of subsequent
1 leaflet 65 A does not make any distinction and its
maintenance but also aesthetics and cost control. It is
"General" article 31 states that all documents supplied unrelated to the mission done by "inspection" offices
by the Contractor are submitted to the project for buildings, for which the objective is to obtain
management supervisor for signature except for some insurance for the construction. Therefore, the project
documents mainly related to second category management supervisor will have considerable
temporary works like those defined in articles 45 to responsibility for the detailed design of a bridge, so
48 in chapter 4. that he must make very substantial checks (possibly
with the assistance of an external office).
CCTPs produced using the CAPT-DCE OA exclude
of signature all documents related to second category
temporary works, knowing that first category 3. Actions to be carried out
temporary works are signed by the Supervisor.
The following tables describe the various actions
The contract contains the list of bridges classified in necessary before signature, making a distinction
the first category ; by default, the Contractor shall between the case in which the project management
produce the list at the same time as the construction supervisor makes the verifications himself, and the
program and shall submit it to the project case in which the external check of the construction
management supervisor for decision (article 41.2 in documents is subcontracted (see datasheet I-3 related
the CCTG leaflet 65 A). to the order for an external check of the detailed
design).
Article 29.14 specifies that the "Contractor cannot
begin construction of a bridge until he has received
approval or signature from the project management
supervisor about the documents necessary for this
construction. The CCAP fixes times that the
Chapter I : Preparatory actions 1 Datasheet No. I-6 : Signature of construction drawings


Action 1 : document management Action 1 : document management
Make a regular review (for example every week make a regular review (for example before holding the
during the site meeting) of the forecast planning for site meeting) of the forecast planning for submission
submission of construction documents produced by of construction documents produced by the
the Contractor and the follow-up table for these Contractor and the follow-up table for these
documents drawn up by the Supervision, and ask the documents drawn up by the Supervision, and
Contractor for the late documents ; anticipate delays by asking the Contractor for future
make sure that the architect has actually received the documents. Similarly, ask for comment notes to be
drawings that he needs (formwork drawings, produced by the inspection office, so as to respect
structural steel drawings, equipment drawings, etc.) ; contractual deadlines fixed in the CCAP ;
make sure that the external inspection laboratory has make sure that the inspection office has actually
actually received the drawings that it needs (for received a copy of the drawings received by the
example welding drawings and construction details Supervision ;
of a steel structure). make sure that the architect has actually received the
drawings that he needs (formwork drawings, structural
steel drawings, equipment drawings, etc.) ;
make sure that the external inspection laboratory has
actually received the drawings that it needs (for
example welding drawings and construction details of a
steel structure).
Action 2 : check the drawing
Appendix 1 to this datasheet contains the main
verifications to be made depending on the nature of the
drawing (general layout drawings, formwork drawings,
reinforcement drawings, cable drawings, structural steel
drawing, temporary structure drawings) for information.
Action 3 : sending a comments note to the Action 3 : sending a comments note to the Contractor
Contractor make a summary, validate and complete comments
make a summary, validate and complete comments made on the document by the different contributors
made on the document by the different contributors (inspection office, architect, inspection laboratory, ..) ;
(architect, inspection laboratory, project if the drawing is validated, the project management
management supervisor, etc.) ; supervisor informs the Contractor that he has no
if the drawing is validated, the project management particular comments on the document. The drawing
supervisor informs the Contractor that he has no can then be printed and signed with the approved for
particular comments on the document. The drawing construction stamp ;
can then be signed ; if the drawing is not validated, the project management
if the drawing is not validated, the project supervisor informs the Contractor about his comments
management supervisor informs the Contractor and asks for the document to be corrected accordingly
about his comments and asks for the document to (send a drawing with the next revision index). This
be corrected accordingly (send a drawing with the procedure is repeated until the drawing is fully
next revision index). This procedure is repeated conforming and can then be signed.
until the drawing is fully conforming and can then be
signed. Note : if the detailed design office does not agree with one
or several comments made by the inspection office, the
project management supervisor shall "arbitrate" by
deciding to support or modify the comments sent, possibly
after listening to both opinions in a special meeting, or
even obtaining an additional outside opinion.
Action 4 : fill in the documents follow-up table Action 3 : fill in the documents follow-up table

4. Documents to be viewed by the project management supervisor

As in the previous section, the list of documents to be viewed is given below, making a distinction between the case in
which the project management supervisor makes the verification himself and the case in which the external check of
construction documents is subcontracted.

datasheets related to the "review of detailed design datasheets related to the "review of detailed design
assumptions", to "signature of the general assumptions assumptions", to "signature of the general assumptions
note", and the "check of design notes" ; note", and the "check of design notes" ;
technical documents in the contract (drawings, technical documents in the contract (drawings,
specifications, etc.) ; specifications, etc.) ;
previous comments note about the examined drawing ; forecast planning for submission of construction
design notes corresponding to the examined drawing ; documents ;documents follow-up table.
construction drawings with reference to the examined
drawing ;
standards, design rules and technical documents (see
appendix) ;
forecast planning for submission of construction
documents ;
document follow-up table.

be placed correctly, the stability of reinforcement

Appendix 1 to sheet No. I-6 during concreting, and that the design of
Summary list of the main reinforcement and construction joints are
verifications for each nature of consistent ;
examined drawing check rebar list schedules. For steels paid for on a
quantitative schedule, check the consistency of
quantities specified in the contract by comparison
Note : the list of verifications mentioned above is not
with preliminary quantities, paying special attention
exhaustive.
to any overrun not justified by design notes or
necessary to respect minimum construction
requirements. For structural elements paid by
Fast document examination
fixed fee, special attention shall be paid to
It is recommended that the verification should begin respecting minimum quantities and good
with a first fast examination of received construction construction practice.
documents. The purpose of this first "overview" is to
assure that the complete set of documents sent Cable drawings
(justification design note sent before or with the check the conformity of systems and the line
corresponding drawing) is consistent, and also to assure proposed in the corresponding design note ;
that the design is suitable in general and sufficient. The check approval of the system and its compatibility
detailed verifications cannot begin until the end of this with the project, approval of prestressed
first step, if the design is considered to be satisfactory. reinforcement ;
General layout drawings check that standard practice and regulatory
construction requirements are respected
check the general layouts ; (dimensions, curvature and attachment of ducts,
check the layout of foundations and supportss, cover, arrangement of vents, cable pushing outside
bearing center lines ; of concrete, etc.).
check level differences/benchmarks ;
check consistency with road profiles ; Structural steel drawings
check underpasses dimensions. check that steel grades are consistent with contract
requirements and the corresponding design notes ;
Formwork drawings check that proposed sections are conforming with
check conformity with contract drawings the corresponding design notes and contract
(dimensions, surfaces, etc.) and with design notes ; specifications (geometry and dimension of parts ;
thickness, width of flanges, thickness and height of
check the layout of the different structural
webs, dimensions and position of stiffeners, etc.) ;
elements with reference to special documents ;
check cambers :
check exhaustiveness of the drawing (check that all
information necessary for good understanding "calculated" cambers designed to eliminate
appears on the drawing) ; deflections under dead loads, based on the
results of the design note ;
check that the different drawings are consistent .
"geometric" cambers necessary to respect the
Reinforcement drawings geometry of the road surface (longitudinal
profile, cant, plan center line) and on site jacking,
check that concrete specifications are conforming if any ;
with contract requirements and the corresponding "manufacturing" cambers designed to counter
design notes ; deformations caused by welding (note that these
check that sections proposed in the corresponding are difficult to evaluate and are relevant to the
design note are conforming ; Contractor's know how or the skills of a
check that minimum sections and covers required specialized laboratory) ;
by the regulations are respected, and more check consistency between the different drawings
generally check that good practice and construction (material distribution drawing and the different
requirements defined in the regulations are segment drawings, arrangement of connectors with
respected ; the slab reinforcement, etc.) ;
check that the different drawings are consistent check assemblies and construction requirements
with each other ; defined in the regulations. For welded joints, the
check the geometric dimensions of steels, that steel verification covers the size of the weld bead and
can be correctly placed in the formwork, that also the welding technique. This point should be
bending standards are respected, that concrete can examined by a competent laboratory.

Permanent equipments drawings

check that the equipment complies with the
contract specifications ;
check that construction requirements defined in
the regulations are respected (arrangement and
anchorages of retaining devices, etc ;) ;
check the quality of drainage devices and the water
evacuation system ;
check subsequent maintenance possibilities (access
possibilities, etc.).
Drawings of bridges during

construction and first category
temporary works
check that the COP (contractor's temporary works
supervisor) who must sign or countersign all
documents necessary for the temporary works
project has signed each document ;
check certificates and test reports produced by an
organization authorized to check special materials,
that must also be signed by the COP ;
check conformity of sections proposed in the
corresponding design note ;
check bearing conditions, and principles for
assembly and cross bracing necessary in the three
directions in space ;
check cambers against the results of design notes ;
check arrangements taken to assure stability and
protection of foundations and supports (presence
of excavations, runoff zones, etc.) ;
check that corridors to be cleared during the
construction work, if any, are respected.

Chapter II: Foundations
Datasheet No. II-1

Final excavation works
(Clause 12 in CCTG part 68)
"Execution of excavations Final excavation to the specified level in the

conditions to prevent loose material in the ground
for shallow foundations foundation and possibly temporary improvement of
the base of the excavation to avoid its degradation
and execution of lagging until placement of the protection.
of these excavations" Protection of the base of the excavation

(clause 12 in the CCTG part 68)
Done immediately after completion of the finishing
works, often by placement of blinding concrete or
1. Purpose foundation concrete.
This document relates to the execution of the Protection of the ground foundation from water
excavations for shallow foundations of bridges and arrivals and dewatering of the excavation
the execution of lagging (for these excavations) if (clause 10 in CCTG part 68)
necessary (described in chapter II "Spread
foundations " in the CCTG (General Technical The Contractor is required to protect excavations
Clauses) part 68). from water arrivals and to perform necessary
dewatering to keep water at a level compatible with
progress and smooth execution of the works.
2. Reminders Definitions Excavation stop levels
Excavations for foundations Stop levels are defined depending on the nature and
According to the definition in CCTG part 68 quantity of materials and a geotechnician compares
(clause 10.1): them with project assumptions.
"Excavations for foundations consist of earthworks with the
purpose of creating an excavation in which the parts of a Importance of reports
structure bearing directly on the ground will be constructed.
It is important to report observed events at all stages
In the case of a set of works including general earthworks and of the execution. It is recommended that these
excavations for foundations, the distribution of earthworks reports should be illustrated with photos whenever
between these two categories is defined in the contract, or possible.
otherwise by the contracting authority, following a proposal by
The nature of the ground, any difficulties
the contractor."
encountered, the levels and dimensions of the
It is important to remember that the remunerated excavations, and the various planned operations
volume of excavations is defined in the contract (preparation, acceptance, finishing and protection of
(clause 6.21.3.1 in CCTG part 2). the excavation) can no longer be observed, measured,
and/or verified after the excavation has been
Excavated material backfilled.
(clause 5.4 in CCTG part 2)
Preparation of the base of the excavation

(clause 12 in CCTG part 68)
Removal or cleaning of all elements, blocks, pockets
or lenses that could cause disorders and fill in voids.
Acceptance of the base of the excavation

(clause 12 in CCTG part 68)
Done after the preparation work on the base of the

excavation and accepted jointly by the Contractor and
the contracting authority with a geotechnician.
Chapter II: Foundations 1/5

Datasheet No. II-1: Execution of excavations for shallow foundations and execution of lagging of these excavations
3.1.- Before the excavation works
Documents to be collected See 3 and 4 in this sheet
Preliminary work Setting out Refer to the general layout

report drawing and the setting out
procedure
Contract Check that the Contractor has
documents informed service operators (in the
D.I.C.T. - Declaration of Intent to
Start operations)
Refer to sheet No. I-1 "Layout of
structures"
Benchmark transfers Surveyor, Previous agreement of the
stakes, general contacting authority
layout drawing Write a report
Refer to sheet No. I-1 "Layout of
structures""
Preliminary site protection against water Visual X Refer to the excavation procedure.
arrivals inspection
Lowering of the water table Refer to the excavation procedure.
3.2.- During the excavation works
EXECUTION OF EXCAVATIONS
Discovery of unexploded bombs - Notify the X Respect the PGCSPS (General

police station Coordination Plan for Safety and
and the bomb Protection of Health) instructions.
disposal squad Write a report.
- Opinion of the Immediately suspend the words.
SPS coordinator
- Marking
around the zone
Discovery of previously unidentified Stakes, general X Immediately have the works

underground structures layout drawing suspended, inform management
and possibly the design office.
Marking around Inform dealer services.
the zone Write a report.
Discovery of archeological remains X Have the works suspended and

inform the hierarchy.
Use of explosives and/or machines that Contract X Refer to the procedure.
could cause vibrations PGCSPS preliminary agreement by the
r l ti n in ntr tin th rit n r
regulations in contracting authority necessary.

force Refer to the contract that may fix
restrictions against use of these
techniques.
Observe earthwork quantities.
Extraction of materials Visual Refer to the earthworks execution
inspection procedure and the geotechnical
report.
Excavation stop levels Consult LRPC X Wait for the contracting
(Regional Public authority's decision.
works Compare the encountered ground
Laboratory) with the geotechnical assumptions.
specialists and If good ground is encountered at a
the design office level different from the planned
Bridge drawings level, then the foundation level of
Service order the structures can be modified of
agreed to by LRPC specialists and
the design office,.
Important changes of the
foundation level or dimensions
must be defined in a service order.
Observe levels and dimensions of
excavations.
Check of the base of the excavation Visual and Remove or clean all elements,
(Clause 12 in CCTG part 68) topographic blocks, pockets or lenses.
inspection Fill in voids.
Write a removed quantities report.
Acceptance of the base of the excavation Visual X Refer to the excavation execution
(Clause 12 in CCTG part 68) inspection procedure.
Tests in place If necessary, carry out tests in
done by the place (plate, dynaplaque test or
Contractor if dynamic penetration test) to make
applicable, sure that the founding soil actually
under control of corresponds to that specified in
the LRPC the contract.
Write a report
Final excavation works Visual Refer to the excavation execution
(Clause 12 in CCTG part 68) inspection procedure and after acceptance of
the base of the excavation; for
loose ground sensitive to water or
ground subject to swelling or rock
subject to weathering, this
finishing must be done
immediately after the execution of
the excavation and the preparation
of the base of the excavation.
Must be done with lightweight
means.
Protection of the base of the excavation Refer to the excavation execution
(Clause 12 in CCTG Part 68) procedure; the protection must be
made as soon as the bottom of
excavation finishing work has
been completed. It is often done

by using blinding concrete or

foundation concrete.
Protection of the excavation sides against Weather X Refer to the excavation execution
water arrivals forecasts procedure.
The protection may be done using
a polyane as soon as the finishing
work is complete.
BRACING AND LAGGING OF THE EXCAVATION
Bracing and lagging Contract Refer to the lagging procedure and

(Chapter I, clause 4 in CCTG part 68) Lagging drawing the PGCSPS.
Opinion of the
Notify the representative of the
SPS coordinator
Contractor and management
Visual
immediately about any measures
inspection
not conforming with initial or
modified lagging drawings, and
record them in the site log. Refer
to the design office.
Check that the site machinery
traffic zone is conforming with the
retaining plans (drawing),
particularly regarding the distance
from the top of the excavation,.
PROTECTION AGAINST WATER ARRIVALS AND DEWATERING OF EXCAVATIONS
Protection against water arrivals and Visual Refer to the excavation execution
dewatering of excavations inspection procedure.
(Clause 10 in CCTG part 68) Weather In all cases, the foundation must
forecasts be concreted without the presence
of water.
Make sure that the Contractor
anticipates any bad weather that
may have an influence on safety
for third parties, particularly
before a period of inactivity
(holidays, week-end.).
When dewatering, make sure that
the dewatering device is provided
with a filter system to prevent
entrainment of fines (CCTG part
68).

4. Documents to be supplied to the contracting authority

Before the execution works
Declarations of Intent to Begin Operations (DICT);

General layout drawing for structures and construction drawings;
Source and destination of materials (excavated materials and excavation fill materials);
Quality Assurance Plan;
Execution procedure (particularly execution of excavations and lagging);
Sheeting design notes;
Excavation sheeting drawing.
After the work
Material delivery forms if any (if borrow material is used);

Internal inspection follow up sheets;
Nonconformity sheets if any.
5. Documents to be viewed on the site

Contract ;
Geotechnical Report;
Execution procedures (particularly execution of excavations and lagging);
Signed construction drawings;
Lagging drawing.
6. For further information, refer to:

Execution of foundation works for civil engineering structures. CCTG part 68;
- chapter I: "Common requirements";
- chapter II: "Direct foundation on the ground";
General earthworks - CCTG part 2. Special leaflet No. 2003-2, March 2003;
Regulations on height of lagging: decree 65.48 January 08 1965 modified by decree 95.608 May 6 1995.
*


Summary list of the main
technical reference documents
Apart from checking that the technical specifications of

CPC (common requirements book) Title V leaflet
the contract are respected and the calculation results
61 attached to circular No. 78.33, June 22 1977
(sizing justification), the verification of the construction
Design and calculation of steel bridges and
drawings must also include a check that construction
constructions made of steel and its appendix 1 -
requirements defined in the regulations are respected.
DC 71 - Construction requirements ;
These requirements are specified either in the standards
or in the different corresponding technical regulations. Steel construction design rules - CM66 rules and its
addendum of 80 - Construction requirements ;
It frequently arises that the main construction Eurocode 3 DAN Design of steel structures -
requirements to be respected are already specified in Construction requirements ;
the construction design notes. The verification that AFPS 90 recommendations, AFPS 92 guide for
rules are respected is then made directly during the seismic protection of bridges - Construction
examination of the note. When the note is validated, requirements ;
the drawing can then be verified simply by making sure Eurocode 8 DAN Design and sizing of
that it is conforming with the design note. structures for earthquake resistance - Construction
requirements ;
When these construction requirements are not given in
Design guide for typical bridges in seismic zone -
the design notes, the drawings can be checked based on
Construction requirements ;
technical documents in the following non-exhaustive
list (there are too many standards and they are Stra Technical guide for drainage of road bridges ;
continuously changing, therefore they are not all listed). Eurocode 5 - Design of wood structures -
Warning, these documents must have been defined in Construction requirements...
the contract otherwise Contractors cannot be obliged
to respect them.
Title V leaflet 62 in the CCTG - Rules for the

design and calculation of foundations for civil
engineering structures - Construction
requirements;
Title I leaflet 62 - CCTG section I - BAEL 91 rules
revised in 99- Construction requirements ;
Title I leaflet 62 - CCTG section I - BPEL 91 rules
revised in 99- Construction requirements ;
Eurocode 2 DAN - Design for concrete structures
- Construction requirements ;
CCTG leaflet 65 A - Construction of civil
engineering works made of reinforced or
prestressed concrete ;

DDE FOLLOW-UP OF CONTRACT: CONTRACTOR: DATE

Department CONSTRUCTION Contract title Contractors name Update date
name DOCUMENTS
Reference Title Index 0 A B C D E BPE

Reception date date date date date date date
Check op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
Documen
Document opinion
t
No.
title Laboratory op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date
opinion
Project op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date Sig. date
management
supervisors
opinion
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
Documen
Document opinion
t
No. Laboratory op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date op. code date
title
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
Documen
Document opinion
t
title
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
Documen
Document opinion
t
title
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Inspection
D.Os opinion.
Documen
Document opinion
t
title
opinion
management
supervisors
opinion
Opinion codes: ADM opinion with modification request ASO opinion without comment AO opinion with comment without modification
request BPE: Approved for construction

Datasheet No. II-2

"Diaphragm walls and
barrettes"
1- Purpose
This document defines the nature of work to be done Anchored diaphragm wall acting as a retaining structure
for the execution and for acceptance of diaphragm (Lyon LRPC photo)
walls and barrettes.
Other types of walls such as prefabricated walls with

self-hardening slurry, reinforced slurry walls, plastic
concrete sealing walls, grout sealing walls, etc., are not
dealt with in this datasheet.
Reminder:
Diaphragm wall: Wall composed of a combination

of vertical reinforced cast in place concrete panels,
from the surface. They may be retaining structures
or load bearing retaining structures (Abutment,
side walls or piers) after excavation of earth,
foundation element or even waterproof diaphragm Deep foundation element or barrettes
walls. (Lyon LRPC photo)
Preamble:
Barrette: reinforced cast in place concrete
foundation element generally parallelepiped in Clauses in CCTG part 68 and the "bored piles" good
shape. The combination of barrettes can produce practice compilation (document Stra/LCPC (Central
deep foundations with a variety of sections (cross, Public Works Laboratory) December 1978) are
T-shaped, H-shaped, etc.). referred to in different headings. However, other
texts such as standards mentioned in chapter 5 "For
further information" can also be usefully viewed.
2- Important points to be examined

2.1.- Before starting the work
Control of equipment
Ground excavation equipment; Visual Refer to the drilling procedure.

inspection and Ask the Contractor to provide
maintenance equipment characteristics (for
book comparison with the characteristics
given in the drilling procedure) and to
justify any observed differences.
Chapter II: Foundations 1/9 Datasheet No. II-2: Diaphragm walls and barrettes
Datasheet No. II-3

"Sheet pile walls"
1- Purpose
This document applies to the inspection of the
execution of permanent sheet pile wallstructures.
The case of anchored sheet pile wall structures is not
dealt with in this datasheet and will be covered in the
"Anchors " datasheet.
Some inspections mentioned may depend both on

the external control to be done by the contracting
authority and internal control set up by the
contractor; and the distribution between these
different inspections is normally fixed in contract
documents.
Preamble: Sheet pile wall

(Lyon LRPC (Regional Public Works Laboratory) photo)
Different sections include references to articles in
CCTG (General Technical Clauses) part 68.
However, other texts such as the standards
mentioned in chapter 5 "For further information"
may also be usefully viewed.

PA = Stop point PC = Critical point
2.1.- Before starting the works
Driving equipment and accessories Visual x Refer to the driving procedure. In

inspection and particular, adaptation of the driving cap
maintenance to the sheet piles used.
book
Ask the contractor to provide the
characteristics of equipment (for
comparison with equipment indicated in
the construction procedure) and
justification of the observed differences,
if necessary.
Control of materials
Sheet piles, waling, struts (source, Delivery x Refer to the QAP, drawings and the
nature, geometry, crimping, anti- forms, caliper driving procedure.
corrosion protection); square,
(clause 37 in CCTG part 68) decameter
Chapter II: Foundations 1/4 Datasheet No. II-3: Sheet pile walls
Guides. Visual Refer to the construction procedure.

inspection and
maintenance
book
Driving test (if applicable) Recommended when there are any

doubts about the possibility of
penetration or driving methods to be
used.
Behavior of the sheet pile wall Visual, Refer to the construction procedure and
(penetration, deformation); penetration- drawings.
driving curve,
quantities,
spirit level
Vibrations transmitted to the Check by an x Compare measurements with the criteria

environment (if any). LRPC defined in the contract.
(Regional
Public works
laboratory)
specialist
2.2.- Before the beginning of driving
Transport, storage and handling Visual check x Must be done so as not to generate any
(clause 40.3 in CCTG part 68 and permanent deformation, cracking and
clause 8 in standard NF EN 12063) deterioration of coatings, if any.
Layout, preparation
Check the layout; Surveyor x Refer to construction drawings
Guide; Visual Refer to the construction procedure.

inspection,
double-meter
Spitit level for guidance is essential to

assure that the sheet piles are installed
correctly.
Verticality in the two planes Spirit level

necessary during initial placement.
2.3.- During execution

2.3.1.- General
Make sure:
that the arrangements described in the contract, the drawings, the QAP and its procedures are actually applied
(any incident during the various execution operations shall be reported) ;
to note the presence of equipment and various equipment movements on the site;
that the Contractor records a driving log sheet in sufficient detail.
2.3.2.- Actual construction operations
Handling and interlocking Visual x Refer to the procedure. This is a difficult

inspection phase that can cause damage to elements
and cause personnel safety problems.
The use of a lubricant or products
designed to improve the water tightness
of the sheet pile wall at the interlocks
must be explicitly planned and
authorized.
Driving inspection
Driving execution method; Visual Refer to the execution procedure
(clause 40.2 in CCTG part 68) inspection (driving program): installation by unit,
by pair, by panel, or partially in a single
step.
Monitoring of the penetration; Penetration x To be studied based on geotechnical data
(clause 41 in CCTG part 68) curves (driving (assumed thicknesses of the different
records) layers) and driving tests if they were
done.
Deviations in the two directions Spirit level Any deviations must be detected as early
(horizontal and vertical); as possible to facilitate setting up
necessary corrective actions.
Decision to stop the driving; Penetration x Refer to the drawings and, for sheet piles
(clauses 40.8 and 41 in CCTG part 68) curves (driving supporting important vertical loads, refer
records). Call to the defined stop criteria (refusal).
in a specialist if
required.
Deformations and verticality Visual x Incidents to be recorded: twisting,
defect; inspection, deformation of the head of the sheet
double-meter, piles, de-clutching, tearing, winding.
spirit level
Butt joints Visual x Behavior of the weld under driving and
inspection, verticality
spirit level.
Check quality
of welds by
LRPC.
Bracing
Phasis of installation; Visual Refer to the construction procedure.
inspection
Geometry. Visual Refer to the drawings.
inspection, Make sure that there is good contact
decameter between the sheet piles and the waling,
and between the waling and the struts
(wedges).
Cutting off
Check the levels of cutting off. Decameter x Refer to the construction drawings.
2.4.- After execution - Acceptance
Check the final geometry of the sheet

pile wall
Check the setting out of the top of Decameter, x Refer to drawings and fixed tolerances.
the sheet pile wall (dimensions and spirit level
verticality in the two horizontal and
vertical directions)
Inspection of anti-corrosion
protection done on site (if any)
Nature of system; Visual Refer to the construction procedure
inspection (product technical datasheet)
Application, thicknesses. By LRPC x Refer to the construction procedure

specialist (product technical datasheet)
3- Documents to be viewed on the site

Contract;
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) (particularly including materials approval or qualification datasheets); Execution
procedures (included in the QAP) ;
Construction drawings;
Geotechnical file;
Material delivery forms;
Site log.
4- Documents to be supplied to the contracting authority

Before execution:
All technical document;
Quality Assurance Plans;
Execution procedures (included in the QAP);
Material delivery forms.
After execution:
Control sheets, required in the internal control;
Sheets for requesting clearance of stop points;
Any nonconformity and corrective and preventive actions datasheets.
5- For further information, please refer to

Execution of foundation work for civil engineering structures. CCTG part 68 (Chapter VI : sheet piles and sheet
pile walls) ;
Standard NF EN 12063 : Execution of special geotechnical work Sheet pile walls;
Technical design and calculation rules for foundations for civil engineering structures. CCTG part 62, title
(clause A.3.2. Steels).
Ready-mixed concrete batching plant Call in an x Refer to the Contractor's QAP (site
(main and standby). LRPC batching plant) or the concrete producer
(Regional (ready-mixed concrete batching plant).
Public works In particular, check that the Contractor
laboratory) has the right to use the NF-BPE mark.
specialist
Control on materials
Storage conditions; Visual Check the storage area (cleanliness,
Clause 26.1 in CCTG (General Technical inspection dewatering, planeness) with reference to
Clauses) part 68 the QAP.
Chapter 7 in the "Bored piles" compilation
Guide walls Check Refer to the construction procedure.
(if metallic elements); dimensions
Clause 47.1 in CCTG part 68 using a
double-meter
Reinforcement cage elements (origin, Visual x Refer to the QAP, the reinforcement
certification of steels, nature and inspection of drawing and the construction procedure.
geometry); reinforcement Check marking of HA steels that shall
and check of comply with the approval sheet.
dimensions
using a
decameter.
Check the
delivery form
Investigation tubes; Visual x Check the nature, inside diameter,
Clause 45.2.2. in CCTG part 68 inspection thickness, number, position, length and
Chapter 7 in the "Bored piles" method of fixing tubes on the
document(centering devices) reinforcement cages, with reference to
the construction drawing and procedure.
Fixing of tubes on the reinforcement
cages by welding can cause tube
perforations. Therefore special care
should be paid with this operation.
Spacers (centering device); Visual Check the type, position, number and
inspection method of attachment of the spacers,
with reference to the reinforcement
drawing and construction procedure.
Suitability test on the concrete Call in an x The suitability test shall be considered
batching plant, and if applicable the LRPC satisfactory if the composition of
standby batching plant. specialist. concretes (check delivery forms and
Check weighing forms) and concrete
conformity of characteristics defined in the contract
the concrete and the contractors QAP are respected
batching plant. (comparison of results with design
Examine results).
results of the The suitability test must be carried out
suitability test early enough to be sure that the results
carried out on will be available 28 days before the work
the batching starts.
plant.
Chapter II: Foundations 2/9 Sheet No. II-2: Diaphram walls and barrettes
2.2.- Before the beginning of the excavation work
Control of the working platform
Level. Topographic Check the level, planeness, cleanliness

check and stability, with reference to the
construction drawing and procedure.
Control of the location of diaphragm
walls or barrettes
Clause 47.1 in CCTG part 68
Layout of axis; Topographic x Refer to the general layout drawing.
check
Construction of guide walls (cast in Check Refer to the construction drawing and
place); dimensions procedure.
with tape, and
verticality
with level
Location of guide walls. Topographic x Refer to the construction drawing and
check procedure.
Control of of the boring equipment
installation
Machine verticality. Visual x When boring is started, pannel elements
inspection cannot be constructed correctly if the
knowing that machine is not vertical.
this
inspection
cannot
guarantee that
the machine is
precisely
vertical
2.3.- During the execution

Make sure that the arrangements described in the contract, the drawings, the QAP and its procedures are actually
applied (any incident during the various execution operations shall be reported);
Note the presence of equipment and various equipment movements on the site;
Make sure that the Contractor fills in an excavation log sheet in sufficient detail.
Excavation control
Support of the ground at the top of Visual
the trench; inspection
Nature of the boring tool used with Visual x Refer to the drilling procedure depending
the penetration level; inspection (tool on the depth and nature of the ground
be adapted to encountered.
the nature of
the ground)
Excavation verticality; Data supplied Compare with tolerances required in the

clause 46.3 in CCTG part 68 by the contract.
Contractor.
Visual
inspection
(plumb level,
inclinometer).
Geological nature of excavated Visual - Compare the actual ground log with the
materials with depth; inspection. geotechnical log (derived from the site
Opinion of an investigation) and with reference to the
LRPC construction procedure;
specialist if - Soil samples to be taken by the
there is any Contractor;
doubt. - Check that their position is indicated in
the excavation log sheet.
Base level and embedment (in the Visual x Compare the actual ground log with the
foundation layer); inspection. geotechnical log (derived from the
Opinion of an excavation results) and with reference to
LRPC the construction procedure.
specialist if If there is any difference, inform the
there is any hierarchy, the design office and the
doubt. LRPC.
Cleaning; Visual x Cleaning is necessary to assure good

clause 26.2.1 in CCTG part 68 inspection and contact between the ground and
weighted foundation elements. It must be done
decameter immediately before concreting.
Notify management if the excavation
depth is different, and particularly if it is
greater than the theoretical depth, so as
to adapt the length of the reinforcement
cages and investigation tubes to the
actual depths.
Check the nature of the ground at the
base of the excavation by comparison
with the geotechnical log.
Use of a chisel Visual x Any unplanned and duly justified use of a

inspection chisel must be agreed upon before using
by the contracting authority.
A chisel induces vibration in the ground
that can cause degradation of setting
concrete in elements located nearby.
Drilling fluid (bentonite); The bentonite quality controls the

stability of the excavation and the quality
of the concrete in foundation elements.
Bentonite characteristics; Assistance by x Refer to the construction procedure; the
Clause 23.3 in CCTG part 68 an LRPC inspection includes a measurement of the
specialist density, the fluidity and sand content
during construction of each foundation
element. These inspections are
compulsory (see CCTG part 68 and
standard NF EN 1538).
Level of the drilling fluid in the Visual Refer to the drilling procedure.
trench. inspection An insufficient level can cause caving in
Clauses 26.8.3, 26.8.4 and 26.8.5 in or even collapse of excavation walls.
CCTG part 68 are applicable
Circulation of drilling fluid; Visual Circulation of the drilling fluid for
inspection recycling/pumping (direct circulation,
inverse circulation according to the
construction procedure).
Recycling of bentonite; Check on re- Elimination of fine elements in
used bentonite suspension.
characteristics (See bentonite characteristics above).
(see above) Warning: make sure that the
predetermined provisions about
cleanliness of the site and its
surroundings (recycling and mud
circulation) are actually applied to prevent
pollution.
Evacuation of recycling x Recycling products must be treated

products. before evacuation in accordance with the
QAP and the requirements in the CCTP
(Particular Technical Clauses)
(requirements in the law on water).
Installation control of the

reinforcement cage(s)
Presence of plug seals at the top and Visual x To prevent penetration of laitance or
bottom ends of the investigation inspection concrete into tubes and to assure water
tubes; tightness to avoid compromising the
inspection operation by sonic
investigation.
Butt joints of reinforced cage Visual x - Check the length laps or couplings
elements; inspection joints of steel
(Couplings are safer. Welding shall be
avoided);
- Check butt connections between
elements of the investigation tubes;
- Pass a "template" through the tubes
before placing reinforcement cages in the
excavation;
- Check the leak tightness of butt joints
(to prevent penetration of laitance in the
tubes and water leaks necessary for
coupling investigation probes).
Deformation of the reinforcement Visual Handling must not cause any
cage(s); inspection deformations.
Positioning of the reinforcement cage Topographic x The reinforcement cage must be held at
in elevation; check the top by guide walls (make sure that
Compare the positioning and lifting handles are
cage length perfectly positioned). The reinforcement
with the cages must reach the bottom of the
excavation excavation without coming into contact
depth. with the ground.
Direction of reinforcement cages; Visual x Check the direction of the reinforcement

inspection cages when they are put into place in the
trench (relative to starter bars). The
construction procedure must include
marking (for example a color code).
Length of starter bars; Visual x Refer to reinforcement drawings.

inspection et
and check
dimensions
with meter
Centering in the excavation. Visual Normally done with centering devices.

inspection
Control of the joints between

elements of diaphragm walls
clause 47.2.6 in CCTG part 68
Nature, dimension and positioning; Visual The quality and positions of joints
inspection control the leak tightness of the wall,
when leak tightness is necessary. There
are several types of joints; waterstop type
joint integrated into the formwork
profile, joint made by the use of joint
tubes or using a water drill for drilling
(hydrofraise technique).
Installation. Visual x Refer to the construction procedure.

inspection
Control of concreting
Check the depth of the excavation Check with To check that there is no caving in or
before concreting; weighted rising sand in the trench.
decameter
Reminder: The time between the end of
cleaning and concreting must be as short
as possible (not more than 3h according
to clause 26.8.6 in CCTG part 68).
Production, transport and concrete Visual x As soon as trucks arrive on site:

placement means; inspection - Check the concrete formulation;
- Check delivery forms and weighing
forms, the batch production time and the
transport time (see certification
documentation for mark NF-BPE 033
January 2005, article 2.4.3.4 "example of
a delivery form");
- Check concrete placement (bin or
pump) with reference to the construction
procedure (the procedure must include
contract specifications).
Concrete; Inspection x The Contractor must also perform on

based on tests site tests (slump and other characteristics
carried out by specified in the CCTP) and must make
the samples for laboratory tests (mechanical
Departmental strength and other characteristics

laboratory or specified in the CCTP).
the LRPC as Comparison of results compared with
the external results required by the contract.
control
Concreting by tremie pipe; Visual x Check the length, number, c/c distance
inspection and of tremie pipes, and the beginning of
weighted ten- concreting against the construction
meter tape procedure (start concreting "with shovel"
is prohibited.
The beginning of concreting may be
started using a polystyrene ball or a paper
bag full of concrete, for example placed
in the tremie pipe
Caution, do not allow a tremi pipe to
become unprimed during concreting.
Tremie pipe elements must be raised and
withdrawn taking into account the level
of the fresh concrete, otherwise polluted
concrete at the bottom of the foundation
will be mixed with good concrete (the
bottom of tremie pipes always shall be
below the level of fresh concrete).
Concrete level in the excavation; Visual Monitor the concrete quantity used with
inspection the level of the concrete reached in the
excavation (concreting curve) to detect
any anomalies.
Cage location; Visual x There must not be any rise or eccentricity

inspection of the reinforcement cages.
Purge at end of concreting; Visual Eliminate all or part of the concrete

inspection polluted by bentonite. If cutting off is
not planned, eliminate all concrete
polluted by bentonite, or at least a
volume corresponding to a height of
about 50 cm.
Removal of the guide wall. Visual Refer to the construction procedure.

inspection
Cutting off control

Clause 47.5 in CCTG part 68
Cutting off level; Topographic x Refer to the drawing and the cutting off
check level and in any case cut down to sound
concrete.
Cutting off. Visual Execution method conforming with the

inspection construction procedure (see section 2.4
below).
Cutting off is usually done between 3 and
8 days after the end of concreting.
The most frequently used cutting off
techniques are chemical, hydraulic
cutting, and the pneumatic hammer, for
example).
Starter bars must not be bent and unbent

repeatedly.
Rock brokers must not be used because
they can cause micro cracking of pile
heads.
Control diaphragm walls or barrettes

in final phase
Chapter 7 in the "Bored piles" document.
Integrity of elements; Inspection of x Method by transparency in investigation
investigation tubes, or reflection/impedance method
to be done by (only for small elements), starting from
specialists the top of diaphragm walls or support
wall units.
The Contractor cannot begin subsequent
execution phases until the results of the
shaft integrity control are known and the
contracting authority has decided that
they are satisfactory.
Contact at bottom of excavation; Check by The coring check shall not be made
coring systematically. It is performed if the
investigation reveals a doubtful contact
or if an incident occurs during
concreting.
Coring may be done either using 50/60,
investigation tubes or 102/114
investigation tubes put into place
especially for this operation. The lower
end of these tubes is stopped about 50
cm from the bottom of the excavation.
These tubes will not be used for the sonic
investigation.
Level of the top of pannel elements at Topographic Refer to construction drawings, compare
the theoretical cutting off dimension; check differences with the tolerances fixed in
the CCTP.
Level of the top of pannels elements Topographic x Refer to construction drawing, compare
after cutting off; check the differences with the tolerances fixed
in the CCTP.
Case of retaining diaphragm walls
Check the surface quality (appearance, Visual x Refer to the CCTP and QAP
verticality, outside profile); inspection specifications.
Check the quality of seals, after Visual

cleaning the excavations. inspection

Contract;
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) (particularly including materials approval or qualification datasheets);
Construction procedures (included in the QAP);
Geotechnical report;
Check on marking of HA steels that must comply with the approval datasheet;
Material delivery forms, particularly delivery forms and weighing forms if concrete is procured from ready-mixed
concrete batching plants;
Site log.

Before execution:
Construction procedures (included in the QAP);
Technical sheets for products used;
Certificate of conformity (NF-BPE mark, CE marking, etc).
After execution:
Inspection sheets, required for the internal inspection;

Execution of foundation work for civil engineering structures. CCTG part 68 (Chapter VII. Diaphragm walls in
the ground);
Compilation of good proactive Bored piles. Technical guide. Stra/LCPC, December 1978, 197 p. (Stra
reference: F7809) (in particular see chapter 7, concerning the control, in particularly recommendations about
reservation tubes, control means and organization of the control;
Technical design and calculation rules for foundations for civil engineering structures. CCTG leaflet 62, title V;
Standard NF P94-160-1: Soils Investigation and testing Investigation of a foundation element. Part 1:
Transparency method;
reflection method (under some conditions, particularly geotechnical and dimensional conditions);
Standard NF EN 1538: Execution of special geotechnical work Diaphragm walls.
Datasheet No. II-4

Preamble:
Clauses in CCTG (General Technical Clauses) part 68

"Bored piles" and the "bored piles" good practice compilation
(document Stra/LCPC (Central Public Works
Laboratory) December 1978) are referred to in
different headings. However, other texts such as
1- Purpose standards mentioned in chapter 5 "For further
information" can also be usefully viewed.
This document relates to execution of cast in place
bored piles made by excavation of ground protected or
not protected by a casing. The casing may or may not
be recovered, depending on the case.
This pile category comprises:
plain bored piles with no support of the borehole

walls such as lining, liner, or casing;
bored piles installed with mud and more generally
with a drilling fluid;
protected bored piles by a casing.
It does not directly relates to the continuous flight

auger piles. Bored piles
(Lyon LRPC photo)

Driving equipment (if any); Visual Refer to driving construction procedure.
inspection and
maintenance
book
Boring equipment; Visual Refer to the drilling procedure.
inspection and Ask the Contractor to provide equipment
maintenance characteristics (for comparison with the
book characteristics given in the drilling
procedure) and to justify any observed
differences.
BPE batching plant (main and Call in an x Refer to the Contractor's QAP (site
standby). LRPC batching plant) or the concrete producer
(Regional (ready-mixed concrete batching plant). In
Public works particular, check that the Contractor has the
laboratory) right to use the NF-BPE mark.
specialist
Control on materials
Storage conditions; Visual Check the storage area (cleanliness,

Clause 26.1 in CCTG part 68 inspection dewatering, planeness) with reference to the
Chapter II: Foundations 1/9 Datasheet No. II-4: Bored piles
Chapter 7 in the "Bored piles" document inspection QAP.
Casings, top ring ; Check Refer to the construction procedure and the
dimensions, drawings concerned.
Decameter,
Reinforcement cage elements Visual x Refer to the QAP, the reinforcement

(origin, certification of steels, inspection of drawing and the construction procedure.
nature and geometry); reinforcement Check marking of HA steels that shall
and check of comply with the approval sheet.
dimensions
using a
decameter.
Check the
delivery form
Investigation tubes and coring Visual x Check the nature, inside diameter,
tube, if any; inspection thickness, number, position, length and
[clause 45.2.2. in CCTG part 68 method of fixing tubes on the
and Chapter 7 in the "Bored piles" reinforcement cages, with reference to the
document (centering devices)] construction drawing and procedure.
Fixing of tubes on the reinforcement cages
by welding can cause tube perforations.
Therefore special care should be paid with
this operation.
Spacers (centering device); Visual Check the type, position, number and
inspection method of attachment of the spacers, with
reference to the reinforcement drawing and
construction procedure.
Suitability test on the concrete - Call in an x The suitability test shall be considered
batching plant, and if applicable LRPC satisfactory if the composition of concretes
the standby batching plant. specialist; (check delivery forms and weighing forms)
- Check and concrete characteristics defined in the
conformity of contract and the contractors QAP are
the concrete respected (comparison of results with
batching plant; design results).
- Examine The suitability test must be carried out early
results of the enough to be sure that the results will be
suitability test available 28 days before the work starts.
carried out on
the batching
plant.
2.2.- Before the beginning of boring
Control of the working platform
Level. Topographic Check the level, planeness, cleanliness and

check stability, with reference to the
construction drawing and procedure.

Control of the location of piles

Layout of the axis Topographic x Refer to the general layout drawing.
(clause 25 in CCTG part 68) check
Control of of the boring equipment
installation
Machine verticality. Visual x When boring is started, foundation
inspection elements cannot be constructed correctly
knowing that if the machine is not vertical.
this inspection
cannot
guarantee that
the machine is
precisely
vertical
2.3.- During the execution

Make sure that the arrangements described in the contract, the drawings, the QAP and its procedures are actually
applied (any incident during the various execution operations shall be reported);
Note the presence of equipment and various equipment movements on the site;
Make sure that the Contractor fills in an excavation log sheet in sufficient detail.
Bored piles with casings
Control of the penetration of the

working casing
Installation of casings: method, Visual Refer to the procedure. Unless
penetration depths. inspection mentioned otherwise, the bottom of the
Tape casing must always be below the drilling
depth (clause 26.6.1 in CCTG part 68).
Boring control
Respect of the phasis of execution; Visual x Refer to the control drawing
inspection (clause 25.1 in CCTG part 68).
Support of the ground at the top Visual Compulsory presence of the working
of the borehole; inspection tube or the ring, in accordance with the
drilling procedure
Nature of the boring tool used Visual Refer to the drilling procedure depending
with the penetration level; inspection (tool on the depth and nature of the ground
be adapted to encountered.
the nature of
the ground)
Verticality of borehole; Contractors Compare with tolerances required in the
(clause 25.3 in CCTG part 68) construction contract.
procedure.
Visual
inspection
(plumb level,
inclinometer).

Geological nature of excavated Visual Compare the actual ground log with the
materials with depth; inspection. geotechnical log derived from the site
Opinion of an investigation;
LRPC specialist Soil samples to be taken by the
if there is any Contractor (Check that their position is
doubt. indicated in the excavation log sheet).
(recommended
for first piles)
Base level and embedment (in the Visual x Compare the actual ground log with the
foundation layer) inspection. geotechnical log derived from the
Opinion of an excavation results.
LRPC specialist If there is any difference, inform the
if there is any hierarchy, the design office and the
doubt LRPC.
(recommended
for first piles)
Use of a chisel Visual x Any unplanned and duly justified use of a

inspection chisel must be agreed before using by the
contracting authority.
A chisel induces vibration in the ground
that can cause degradation of setting and
hardening concrete in elements located
nearby.
Bored piles installed with a drilling fluid
Drilling fluid (bentonite)

Bentonite characteristics (new or Assistance by x Refer to the execution procedure; the
re-used ); an LRPC inspection includes a measurement of the
(clause 23.3 in CCTG part 68)) specialist density, the fluidity and sand content
during construction of each foundation
element. These inspections are
compulsory (see CCTG part 68 and
standard NF EN 1538).
The bentonite quality controls the
stability of the excavation and the quality
of the concrete in foundation elements.
Level of the bentonite in the Visual Refer to the excavation construction
borehole. inspection procedure.
(clauses 26.8.3, 26.8.4 and 26.8.5 in An insufficient level can cause caving in
CCTG part 68 are applicable) or even collapse of excavation walls.
Circulation of drilling fluid ; Visual Circulation of the drilling fluid for
inspection recycling/pumping (direct circulation,
inverse circulation according to the
construction procedure).
Recycling of bentonite; Check on re- Elimination of fine elements in
used bentonite suspension.(See bentonite characteristics
characteristics above).
(see above) Warning: make sure that the
predetermined provisions about
cleanliness of the site and its
surroundings (mud recycling and
circulation) are actually applied to prevent

pollution.
Evacuation of recycling products. x Recycling products must be treated before

evacuation in accordance with the QAP
and the requirements in the CCTP
(Particular Technical Clauses)
(requirements in the law on water).
Cleaning of the bored pile Visual x Cleaning is necessary to assure good
(clause 26.2.1 in CCTG part 68) inspection and contact between the ground and
weighted foundation elements. It must be done
decameter immediately before concreting.
Notify management if the drilling depth
is greater than the theoretical depth, so as
to adapt the length of the reinforcement
cages and investigation tubes to the
actual depth.
Check the nature of the ground at the
base of the excavation by comparison
with the geotechnical log
Installation control of the

reinforcement cage
Presence of plug seals at the top Visual x To prevent penetration of laitance or
and bottom ends of the inspection concrete into tubes and to assure water
investigation tubes; tightness to avoid compromising the
inspection operation by sonic
investigation.
Butt joints of reinforcement Visual x Check the length of laps or couplings
elements; inspection joints of steel.
Butt joints of investigation tubes ; Visual Check butt connections between

inspection elements of the investigation tubes.
Couplings are safer. Welding shall be
avoided.
Pass a "template" through the tubes
before placing reinforcement cages in the
excavation.
Check the leak tightness of butt joints (to
prevent penetration of laitance in the
tubes and water leaks necessary for
coupling investigation probes).
Deformation of the reinforcement Visual Handling must not cause any

cage; inspection deformations.
Positioning of the reinforcement Topographic x To prevent buckling, the reinforcement

cage in elevation; check cage should normally be suspended from
Compare the the top, and shall reach the bottom of the
cage length excavation without coming into contact
with the with the ground.
excavation
depth
Direction of reinforcement cages; Visual x Check the direction of the reinforcement
inspection cages when they are put into place in the
borehole (relative to starter bars). The
construction procedure must include

marking (for example a color code).
Length of starter bars; Visual x Refer to reinforcement drawings.

inspection et
and check
dimensions
with decameter
Centering and deformations in Visual Normally done with spacers.

plan. inspection
Control of concreting
Check the drilling depth before Check with x To check that there is no caving in in the
concreting; weighted bored hole.
decameter Reminder: The time between the end of
cleaning and concreting must be as short
as possible. More precise information
about this time is given according to
clauses 26.5.3, 26.6.3 et 26.8.6 in CCTG
part 68, depending on the type of pile.
Production, transport and Visual x As soon as trucks arrive on site:

concrete placement means; inspection - Check the concrete formulation;
- Check delivery forms and weighing
forms, the batch production time and the
transport time (see certification
documentation for mark NF-BPE 033
January 2005, article 2.4.3.4 "example of
a delivery form");
- Check concrete placement (bin or
pump) with reference to the execution
procedure (the procedure must include
contract specifications).
Concrete; Inspection x The Contractor must also perform on

based on tests site tests (slump and other characteristics
carried out by specified in the CCTP) and must make
the samples for laboratory tests (mechanical
Departmental strength and other characteristics
laboratory or specified in the CCTP).
the LRPC as Compare the results obtained with the
the external results required by the contract.
control
Tremie pipe; Visual x Check the length of the tremie pipe and
inspection and the beginning of concreting against the
weighted execution procedure (start concreting
decameter "with shovel" is prohibited).
The beginning of concreting may be

started using a polystyrene ball or a paper
bag full of concrete, for example placed
in the tremie pipe.
Caution, do not allow the tremie pipe to
become unprimed during concreting
(the bottom of the tremie pipe always
shall be inside the fresh concrete),

otherwise the first polluted concrete will

be mixed with good concrete; tremie pipe
elements must be raised and withdrawn
taking into account the level of the fresh
concrete in the borehole.
Concrete level in the excavation; Visual Monitor the concrete quantity used with
inspection the level of the concrete reached in the
excavation (concreting curve) to detect
any anomalies.
Cage location; Visual x There must not be any rise or eccentricity

inspection of the reinforcement cages.
Purge at end of concreting; Visual Eliminate all or part of the concrete

inspection polluted by bentonite. If cutting off is
not planned, eliminate all concrete
polluted by bentonite, or at least a
volume corresponding to a height equal
to about the diameter of a pile.
Extraction of the working tube or Visual Refer to the execution procedure.

the top ring. inspection
Cutting off control

clause 47.5 in CCTG part 68)
Cutting off level; Topographic x Refer to the drawing and the cutting off
check level and in any case cut down to sound
concrete.
Cutting off. Visual Execution method conforming with the

inspection execution procedure (see section 2.4
After execution - Acceptance).
Cutting off is usually done between 3 and
8 days after the end of concreting.
The most frequently used cutting off
techniques are chemical, hydraulic
cutting, and the pneumatic hammer, for
example).
Starter bars must not be bent and unbent
repeatedly.
Rock brokers must not be used because
they can cause micro cracking of pile
heads.
Control of piles in final phase

(Chapter 7 in the "The bored piles" document)
Integrity of elements; Inspection of x Transparency method using investigation
investigation to tubes, or reflection/impedance method
be done by (only for small elements), starting from
specialists the top of the piles .
The Contractor cannot begin subsequent

execution phases until the results of the

shaft integrity control are known and the
contracting authority has decided that
they are satisfactory.
Contact at top of pile / bottom of Check by The coring check shall not be made
borehole; coring systematically;, It is performed if the
investigation reveals a doubtful contact
or if an incident occurs during
concreting).
Coring may be done either using 50/60

investigation tubes, or using 102/114
investigation tubes for large diameters
1200 mm, put into place especially for
this operation. The lower end of this
tube is stopped about 50 cm from the
bottom of the excavation. This tube will
not be used for the sonic investigation.
Level of pile heads after cutting Topographic x Refer to construction drawings, compare
off; check differences with the tolerances fixed in
the CCTP.
Location of pile head compared Topographic x Refer to construction drawings, compare
with the theorietical cutting off check the differences with the tolerances fixed
dimension. in the CCTP.
(clause 27.2 in CCTG part 68)

Contract;
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) (particularly including materials approval or qualification datasheets);
Geotechnical report;
Check on marking of HA steels that must comply with the approval datasheet;
Material delivery forms, particularly delivery forms and weighing forms if concrete is procured from ready-mixed
concrete batching plants;
Site log.

Before execution:
Technical sheets for products used;
Certificate of conformity (NF-BPE mark, CE marking, etc).
After execution:
Inspection sheets, required for the internal inspection;


Execution of foundation work for civil engineering structures. CCTG part 68 (Chapter IV : pile foundations
constructed in place and bored holes) ;
Compilation of good proactive Bored piles. Technical guide. Stra/LCPC, December 1978, 197 p. (Stra
reference: F7809) (in particular see chapter 7, concerning the control, in particular recommendations about
reservation tubes, control means and organization of the controls;
Technical design and calculation rules for foundations for civil engineering structures. CCTG part 62, title V;
Standard NF EN 1536:: Execution of special geotechnical work - Bored piles;
Transparency method;
reflection method (under some conditions, particularly geotechnical and dimensional conditions.)

Chapter III: Reinforcing steels
Datasheet No. III-1

"Reinforcing steels
Prefabrication, transport,
storage and placing

This datasheet applies to checks on:
Reinforcing steels of an underpass open frame ( PIPO)
the existence of quality documents supplied by (Stra/CTOA photo)
the Contractor;
conformity of supplies and storage on site;
placing of reinforcement cages;
assembly means and techniques.
2. Reminders
The main certification documents for use for checks
are:
list of reinforcement for which the NF mark

"Concrete reinforcing steels", managed by the
AFCAB 1 , can be used;
list of fabricated reinforcements (AIB) for
which the NF mark "Fabricated", managed by
the AFCAB, can be used;
list of mechanical coupling devices for which
the AFCAB mark "Couplers or anchorage
devices for concrete reinforcements" can be
used;
list of placing contractors which are certified
AFCAB "Placing";
rules for application of the NF mark "Concrete
reinforcing steels ";
rules for application of the NF mark
"Fabricated";
rules for certification and inspection of couplers
or anchorage devices for concrete
reinforcement;
rules for certification and inspection of placing
for concrete reinforcement.
Reinforcement cage (Stra/CTOA Photo)
1
Association Franaise de Certification des
Armatures du Bton French Association for
Certification of Concrete Reinforcement
Chapter IV: Reinforcing steels 1/3 Datasheet No. III-1: Prefabrication, transport, storage and placing
3. Actions to be carried out

3.1 Before starting the works
Check existence of reference documentation

Signed QAP; Check X
documents
Signed construction drawings. X
3.2 During the works
Check procurement on site X
Case of fabricated reinforcements Label
Case of straight reinforcements
check the source and nature of the steel; Delivery form QAP
Labeling
Marking (relief or Conformity with the NF
impression code) AFCAB certificate
check packaging; Construction drawings
identification of bundles and marking of Labels

elements;
check that there is no damage Visual
(deformations, etc.).
Case of plain mild steel reinforcing bars Delivery form This type of reinforcement is
not certified. The delivery form
must include the source and
grade of the steel; check
conformity with the order
Check conformity of bending
Make spot checks to check the conformity of Quantity survey X Construction drawings
prefabricated elements (bending radius, shape,
return length, overall length, spacing of frames,
etc.)
Check storage conditions
Handling means, adaptation of cranes and Visual For reminder, to be done by

lifting beams Contractor
Storage area X
check planeness and stability of the area; Visual Stable, correctly leveled and not
polluted surface
isolation from the natural ground (well Visual, metric
distributed packing device to prevent
deformations).
Chapter IV: Reinforcing steels 2/3 Datasheet No. III-1: Prefabrication, transport, storage and
placing
Check assembly conditions on site
check assembly means (mobile workshop, X Construction drawings and

bench, placement template); QAP
check binding (annealed steel wire, number Visual X

of links adapted to cage handling forces,
etc.);
check welds (frequency of spot welds, Visual, metric X QAP
overlap length, no change to steel AFCAB certification
diamaters); Qualification of welders (must
be obtained before the work
starts)
check couplers (clamping or crimping X QAP

torque). AFCAB "Coupling devices"
certification
Comments: Coupling is a
special technique. Consequently,
it deserves a check on correct
execution according to the
manufacturer's
recommendations, which
justifies the PA before
concreting
Check placing in formwork (before concreting) X
check conformity by spot checks Metric Construction drawings

(dimensional check, attachment points,
geometry, lack of deformation);
check cover packing pieces, connection to Visual
other starter bars;
check that reinforcement is clean. Visual
4. Documents to be supplied to the project manager

for fabricated reinforcement, the NF-AFCAB certificate with the factory qualification scope;
for couplers, the AFCAB "Coupling devices" certificate;
for the placement Contractor, the AFCAB "Placing" certificate.
5. For further information, refer to:

Fascicle 65A of CCTG (Book of General Technical Clauses): Construction of reinforced concrete or post-
tensioned prestressed concrete Civil Engineering structures (August 2000) - articles 61 to 63 and 65 ;
Standard NF A35-027 " Concrete reinforcing steel products - Reinforcement";
documentation fascicle FD A35-029 "Concrete reinforcing steels Welded assemblies Qualification of a
welding procedure; Qualification of welders";
Standard NF EN ISO 4066 "Building and civil engineering drawings Reinforcement books".
Chapter IV: Reinforcing steels 3/3 Datasheet No. III-1: Prefabrication, transport, storage and placing
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels
Datasheet No. IV-1

The sub-class A symbol is implicit in the standard
designation.
"Bare strands" Note: this denomination may change shortly with the
probable application of standard XP A35-045-3 and
the draft standard EN 10138-3, for harmonization of
European regulations.
In standard XP A35-045-3, the symbolic name of
This datasheet defines operations to be done for prestressing strands includes the following in order:
transport, storage, handling, appearance and
traceability of bare strands. a) the letter S;
b) the nominal wire diameter, in millimeters;

2. Reminders and definitions
c) the strength class, in megapascals;
Strands used on civil engineering sites must have
received an approval or other authorization for use d) the reinforcement category (A or B);
issued by the Interministerial Prestressing
e) when applicable, I for strands composed with
Commission (CIP) or an ASQPE (Association for
indented wires or C for compacted strands.
Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment for
building and civil engineering works) certification. Components of the symbolic name are separated by a
Approval for prestressing reinforcing steel must be dash.
replaced by a certification procedure in the short
term. Initially, this reinforcing steel must be provided Example: S-12,9-1860-A-I denotes a prestressing
with ASQPE marking for this purpose. Eventually, strand with nominal diameter 12.9 mm, strength class
the ASQPE marking should be replaced by the CE 1860 MPa and category A, composed of wires with
marking. indentation.
These strands are smooth with no particular In draft standard EN 10138-3, the symbolic name of
protection or with a light temporary lubrication prestressing strands includes the following in order:
applied in the factory and are part of components
used for prestressing by post-tensioning. a) the number of the European standard;
Each strand is defined by coding of its main b) the designation of the steel used:
characteristics. Thus, the name of a strand includes
the following parameters: the letter Y for prestressing steel;
the strength class, in megapascals;
the abbreviation for strand (T);
the letter S for strand;
the nominal diameter of the strand in mm (12.5,
the number of wires per strand (2, 3 or 7);
12.9, 15.2 or 15.7) ;
the letter G for compacted strand;
the strength class in MPa (1770, 1820 or 1860);
the relaxation class (TBR); c) the nominal diameter of the strand, in mm;
the sub-class relative to particular resistance to
fatigue and deviated tension (A (normal) or B d) when applicable, I for wires with indentation;
(special));
the strand producer's identification code (for e) the indentation type.
example TU);
the code of the strand manufacturing site (for Example: EN 10138-3 Y-1860-S7-15,7.
example SC)
Bare strands are packaged in reels and are strapped by
metallic straps in the factory, the assembly thus
Therefore, in general, the name used for a strand formed being called coil. The inside diameter of the
resembles the following model: coil must not be less than 50 times the nominal strand
diameter. Strand coils may also be covered with
T 15.7-1860-TBR-B-TU (SC).
protective strips for special environment (marine
environment).
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1 Datasheet No. IV-1: Bare strands

3.1.- identification inspection for bare strands STOP POINT
Nature of the work Means Comments

Check that each bare strand coil is perfectly Metal or Each coil delivery must be accompanied by a
identified by at least: plastic label test file (geometric and mechanical
the producer's name 1 filled-in characteristics)
the manufacturing site 2 indelibly
Certificates and labels of delivered batches must
the denomination 3 be consistent, particularly for numbering.
the coil number 4
Check conformity with the previously validated
company quality plan .
2 Example of label to be tagged on

a batch of strands until its
installation
(photo LROP)
3 3.2.- Appearance inspection

Check:
cleanliness and condition of the strand; Visual No trace of rust or oxidation, no damage nor
scratches.
protection of the strand; Visual Light factory applied soluble oil;

Presence of protection strips depending on the
environment (e.g. maritime environment).
3.3.- Inspection of storage and handling of delivered bare strands
Check storage methods:

on wood planks to prevent any contact with the Visual Coils should not be stored on a bridge deck
ground; (need for successive handlings, incompatibility
of protection oil with the primer on
waterproofing screeds, etc.)
(photo LROP) (photo LROP)
under a ventilated tarpaulin, with woods spacers to Visual Allow air to circulate around the steel and avoid
avoid direct contact between tarpaulin and coil; water condensation within the strand, to protect
a coil and prevent any corrosion problems
(photo LROP)
Protective strips may cause corrosion problems

by condensation if the storage duration is too
long under bad weather conditions
sheltered from any pollution or aggression Visual

(projection of welding, brazing, mechanical or
thermal shocks, etc.).
Check temporary protection Temporary protection provided by lubrication
with (emulsionable) soluble oil applied in the
factory, must be repeated in case of prolonged
storage or in an aggressive environment. The
following soluble oils can be used to satisfy the
current regulations:
SHELL Dromus B, CALTEX soluble RGBF
and MOBILOIL Solvag 1533.
Check handling of coils Visual Appropriate lifting means.

4. For further information refer to:

CCTG title II leaflet 4 (supply of steels High strength reinforcement for pre-tensioned or post-tensioned prestressed
concrete structures);
CCTG leaflet 65A and its addendum (construction of reinforced concrete civil engineering structures or prestressed
concrete) (August 2000) ;
the Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission 1 (LCPC (Central Public Works Laboratory), 58
boulevard Lefbvre, 75732 Paris cedex 15);
the list of approved prestressing reinforcement or reinforcement with authorization for use (available from the CIP
Secretariat);
technical approvals of prestressing systems concerned available from Specialist Post-Tensioning Companies.
1The CIP will be eventually replaced by the ASQPE (Association for Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment used in
buildings and civil engineering works).

Datasheet No. IV-2

Zinc or zinc-aluminum alloy coated strands may be
used bare or with protected sheaths, in accordance
with standard NF A35-035.
"Protected strands"
Each protected strand is defined by a code giving its
main characteristics in exactly the same way as for
plain strands. The code contains the same identifiers
1. Purpose of this datasheet as for the name of a protected strand or a plain
strand:
This datasheet defines the nature of work to be done
for transport, storage, handling, appearance and the term protected strand (TGC, TZ or TZA) ;
traceability of factory protected strands. the nominal diameter of the strand in mm (12.5,
12.9, 15.2 or 15.7) ;
the strength class in MPa (1770, 1860);
2. Reminders and definitions the relaxation class (TBR);
Protected strands used in civil engineering sites must the sub-class relative to particular aptitudes to
have received an approval or an authorization for use fatigue and deviated tension (A normal or B special);
issued by the Interministerial Prestressing the strand producer's identification code (for
Commission (CIP) or an ASQPE (Association for example TU);
Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment for the strand manufacturing factory code (for example
building and civil engineering works) certification. SC)
Approval of prestressing reinforcing steel must be
replaced by a certification procedure in the short Therefore, the name of a protected strand resembles
term. Consequently, this reinforcing steel must the following model in most cases:
initially receive ASQPE marking. Eventually, the
ASQPE marking should be replaced by the CE TGG 15.7-1770-TBR-B-TU(SC)-White
marking.
The symbol for sub-class A is implicit in the standard
Protected strands are strands provided with a factory designation, in the same way as black is typical for an
applied protection (grease, wax, zinc or zinc- HDPE sheath.
aluminum alloy
coating, extruded Sheathed protected strand The name of reinforcement specified by the ASQPE
high density certification regulation is derived from the traditional
polyethylene designation defined in the approval system.
(HDPE) sheath,
phosphatation, The designation of the reinforcement (ASQPE
epoxy or possible certification rule) is a waiver to the requirements of
Bare strand
combinations French standards XP A35-045, NF A35-035 and XP
thereof) for use on internal or external prestressing of A35-037.
concrete.
Note: this name may change with the probable
The three most frequently used types of protected application of draft standard XP 10138-3 for
strands are the following in decreasing order of use: harmonization of European regulations.
Sheathed greased strands TGG; Protected sheathed strands are packaged either in
Sheathed waxed strands TGC; coils on wood drums, the assembly thus made being
called a coil, or in bundles of straight lengths
Coated strands (zinc or zinc-aluminum alloy)
depending on site needs. The inside diameter of the
denoted TZ (zinc) or TZA (zinc-aluminum alloy).
coil shall not be less than 60 times the diameter of the
protected strand.
Sheathed greased or waxed strands are plain strands
coated with a film of grease or wax, the assembly Coated strands delivered bare are packaged in coils
being protected by an individual HDPE sheath. surrounded by metal straps, the inside diameter of the
These strands may be bonded (bond between the coil being not less than 50 times the nominal diameter
sheath and the strand) or sliding (relative movement of the strand.
between the sheath and the strand).
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1 Datasheet No. IV-2: Protected strands

A coil or a bundle of straight lengths is provided

with an identification number, different from the coil
number assigned to the plain strand used.
LROP photo
3.1.- Check on identification of protected strands STOP POINT

Check that each coil or bundle of straight length of Metal or Each delivery (coils or bundles) must be
protected strand is perfectly identified by at least: plastic label accompanied by a test file (geometric and
the producer's name 1 indelibly mechanical characteristics)
the manufacturing site 2 filled in
the denomination 3 Certificates and labels of delivered batches
must be consistent, particularly for numbering.
the coil number 4
1 Check conformity with the previously

validated company quality plan.
2
3
2
Example labeling to accompany a

protected strand coil until it is used
3.2.- Appearance inspection

Sheathed strands
Check:
That there is no interruption or tear on the Visual No trace of grease or wax must be visible on
protection sheath; the protection sheath
the outside appearance of the sheath Very obvious helical marking may be a sign of
an insufficient quantity of flexible product for
sliding sheathed strands
Zinc or zinc-aluminum coated strands delivered
without sheath
Check:
the cleanliness; Visual No trace of rust or oxidation.
the surface condition No damage or deterioration to the coating (the
zinc or zinc-aluminum protection layer is softer
than steel)

3.3.- Inspection of storage and manipulation of protected strands

Check storage methods: Visual
on a storage area with concrete surface or isolated
from the ground by tarpaulins;
on planks to prevent any contact with the ground
and particularly for strands delivered in straight
lengths;
sheltered from any pollution or aggression (weld,
splashes, shocks, etc.). ;
in a ventilated environment For sheathed strands protected by grease or by
wax, sheltered from heat and the sun
Monitor the manipulation: Visual The HDPE sheath, galvanization and all
Appropriate lifting means. other protections remain weak and can
easily be damaged It is recommended that textile
slings should be used for handling

CCTG title II leaflet 4 (supply of steels High strength reinforcement for pre-tensioned or post-tensioned
prestressed concrete constructions);
CCTG leaflet 65A and its addendum (construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete civil
engineering structures) (August 2000);
the Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP) 1 (LCPC (Central Public Works Laboratory),
58 boulevard Lefbvre, 75732 Paris cedex 15);
the list of approved prestressing reinforcement or reinforcement with authorization for use (available from the
CIP Secretariat);
technical instructions for prestressing processes concerned available from Specialized Distribution Contractors
(EDS).

Datasheet No. IV-3

Note: this name may change with the probable
application of draft standard EN 10138-4 for
harmonization of European regulations.
"Prestressing bars"
Prestressing bars are packaged in bundles of straight
lengths by batch derived from the same casting.

for transport, storage, handling, appearance and
traceability of prestressing bars. 1
2. Reminders and definitions

Prestressing bars used on civil engineering sites must
have received an approval or authorization for use 2
issued by the Interministerial Prestressing
Commission (CIP) or an ASQPE (Association for
Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment for
building and civil engineering works) certification. 5
Approval of prestressing reinforcing steel must be
replaced by a certification procedure in the short 3
term. Consequently, this reinforcing steel must
initially be provided with ASQPE marking. 4
Eventually, the ASQPE marking should be replaced
by the CE marking.
Bars may be threaded or ribbed over their entire

length, or they may be smooth over their length and
threaded at the ends. They are usually delivered with
no protection, but for some uses they may be
provided with special protection (marine protection,
grease, wax, epoxy resin, HDPE sheath, zinc plating, Example label of a prestressing bar
galvanizing, stainless steel, etc.).. (LROP photo)
Each bar is defined by a code giving its main

characteristics. Thus, the name of a bar includes the
following parameters:
the term bar (B);

the bar nominal diameter in mm (26, 32, 36, 40 or
50) ;
the strength class in MPa (1030, 1230);
the reference of the surface condition (smooth L,
ribbed N or threaded NL);
the bar producer's identification code (for example
AN);
the bar manufacturing factory code (for example H)
Therefore, the name of a bar resembles the following
model in most cases:
B 32-1030-NL-AN(H)
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1 Datasheet No. IV-3: Prestressing bars

3.1.- Check on identification of delivered bars STOP POINT

Check that each batch is perfectly identified by Metal or Each delivery of bars must be accompanied by
at least: plastic label a test file (geometric and mechanical
the producer's and/or the distributor's name 1 filled-in characteristics)
the manufacturing factory abbreviation 2 indelibly Certificates and labels of delivered batches
must be consistent, particularly for numbering.
the denomination of bars according to the
Check conformity with the previously validated
dealer's technical instructions 3
company quality plan
the batch or casting number 4
the length and quantity of bars 5
3.2.- Check methods of transport and manipulation of bars

Make sure that transport is done: Visual
protected from the weather, shocks and damage; No contamination by substances that could
cause or encourage corrosion.
in an appropriate vehicle Flat bed length > length of bars, to prevent
bending forces in the steel.
No sign of impact between bars.
Check that unloading and manipulation of rods Visual
are done:
sheltered from the weather;
by qualified persons;
using appropriate means. Using a mobile or traveling crane with textile
slings distributed uniformly over the bar
length.
Bars longer than 6 m shall be slung at no fewer
than two points at a separation distance of at
least 3 m.
3.3.- Appearance check STOP POINT

Check:
that bars are clean; Visual No trace of rust or oxidation.
that bars are protected; Visual Prestressing bars are very sensitive to humidity
and rust quickly. Therefore, it is strongly
(LROP recommended that they should be slightly
photo) oiled, greased or waxed regularly if exposed to
bad weather conditions or high humidity
(authorized protection products described in
datasheet No. IV-1).
straightness. Visual,
straight edge

3.4.- Check storage of bars on site

in a dry room sheltered from dust, shocks, Outside temperatures less than 5C make rods
corrosive gases and any pollution or aggression; particularly sensitive to impact.
The steel from which bars are made is
incompatible with any type of heat treatment or
thermal shock (welds, brazing, weld splashes,
etc.).
on a storage area with concrete surface or isolated
from the ground by a tarpaulin;
in strapped bundles placed on battens; Battens shall be located at least two meters from
the ends and not less than 5 m from each other.
protection of threaded ends.

CCTG (General Technical Clauses) title II leaflet 4 (Supply of steels High strength reinforcement for pre-
tensioned or post-tensioned prestressed concrete structures);
the Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP) 1 (LCPC (Central Public Works Laboratory),
58 boulevard Lefbvre, 75732 Paris cedex 15);
the list of approved prestressing reinforcement or reinforcement with authorization for use (available from the
CIP Secretariat);
technical instructions for prestressing processes concerned, available from Specialized Distribution Contractors
(EDS).
1The CIP will eventually be replaced by the ASQPE (Association for Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment used in

Datasheet No. IV-4

elements not exceeding 13 m long, and slightly oiled
during production on the internal and external parts.
"Prestressing ducts" When installed, the radius of curvature of the duct

shall be at least 100 times the inside diameter.
Standards NF EN 523 and NF EN 524-1 to 6 are

1. Purpose of this datasheet applicable to these uncoated cylindrical steel ducts,
with a maximum nominal inside diameter of 130 mm
This datasheet defines the nature of work to be done and to couplings. Requirements for diameters larger
for transport, storage, handling, appearance and than 130 mm shall be determined based on standard
traceability of prestressing ducts. NF EN 523 after acceptance of the parts concerned.
These standards are applicable to ducts and

2. Reminders and definitions connectors made of stapled or welded steel strip.
Different types of ducts and natures of materials may Example of

be encountered as a function of the process and round ribbed
choice of prestressing (internal (I) or external (E) to duct made of
the concrete), bonding (A) or non-bonding (NA). steel strip
connected by
The ducts shall be mechanically strong, shall have a couplings
continuity of shape and shall be leak tight over their
entire length. They shall satisfy bond requirements of
the project and shall not cause any chemical
aggression. (LROP photo)
The nature, thickness, diameter and radii of curvature Flat duct with oblong section made of
are chosen to: steel strip,
with grooved profile due to stiffening corrugations,
prevent risks of ovaling during transport and
bonding to the concrete and used as internal
handling;
prestressing. It can be bent by hand in the same way
enable values used in the project for friction to be as round ducts but it is much more sensitive to
respected; crushing problems before threading of cables. This is
assure that the ducts are correctly filled by the why strands should be installed before concreting.
grouting product.
However if threading before concreting is impossible,
3. Brief description of different types of then measures must be taken to protect the duct
ducts against crushing.
Metal ducts Rigid welded rolled steel tube,

A distinction is made between: bendable on a machine and usable for units up to unit
55 T15.
Round corrogated ducts made of cold
rolled steel strip, The thickness is usually 2 mm and the radius of
curvature of the duct shall be at least 3 m.
rigid duct that can be bent by hand, bonding to the Exceptionally, the radius of curvature may be reduced
concrete and used as internal prestressing for units up to 20 times the inside diameter under some
to unit 55 T15. conditions in accordance with the regulations in
force.
The width and thickness of the strip depend on the
duct diameter. The thickness varies from 0.4 to For external prestressing, these steel tubes are usually
0.6 mm. used as ducts for a concrete crossing, in anchorage
area or a deviation area.
Overall outside dimensions are about 5 mm larger
than inside dimensions due to the presence of Windable duct,
stiffening corrugations. It is delivered in straight
used for pre-bent cables and cables wound on reels.
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1 Datasheet No. IV-4: Prestressing ducts

Its thickness varies from 0.3 to 0.4 mm and it can be The range of inside diameters varies from 40 to about
used for units up to unit 12 T15. When the duct is 130 mm, and the standard thickness varies from 2.5
installed, its radius of curvature shall be equal to at to 3 mm.
least 3 m.
Element lengths may be adjusted to suit requirements
Connectors, so as to reduce the number of connectors, and
manufacturing is done in the factory or on site.
or connection couplings are special devices designed
to assemble duct segments. They are usually cut ends Like steel strip ducts, this duct can be supplied ribbed
of ducts with the same type of profile but of a larger and flat.
diameter.
Ribbed and flat duct made of
Special applications: HDPE
For some applications, metal ducts may be treated to (LROP - Photo)
enable longer storage, to increase the radii of
curvature during installation or to improve the
coefficient of friction.
Therefore, lead coated, galvanized, phosphated and

soaped phosphated models are available. Rigid smooth HDPE cylindrical duct,
used for external prestressing.
Plastic ducts
Plastic tubes are allowed if not mentioned otherwise These HDPE tubes connected together by mirror
for the project. They are useful in corrosive welding or using electro-weldable couplings are
atmosphere and when higher leak tightness is delivered in
required. straight
elements
A distinction is made between: with a
maximum
Corrogated duct made of high density length of
polyethylene (HDPE), about 13 m. (LROP photo)
with an inside diameter of 21.5 mm bonding to the The thickness depends on the tube diameter, and can
concrete and used for single strands. vary from 6.6 mm (unit 12 T15) to 10.3 mm (unit
37 T15).
Note also that special measures may be necessary if

the duct filling product is injected hot, due to
expansion and thermal shrinkage problems.
These tubes have the NF mark with the AFNOR

(LROP photo) identification NF 114, group 4, industrial applications
or group 2 drinking water, polyethylene type PE 80 or
The corrugated duct made of high PE 100.
density polyethylene (HDPE),
(LROP
bonding to the concrete, this duct is made of helical photo)
or non-helical ribs, and may be allowed depending on
the requirements in the contract, obtained by winding
and continuous welding of a flat ribbed strip of
HDPE.
It is air tight and water tight, corrosion resistant,

chemically stable in concrete, and electrically
insulating. It reduces the coefficient of friction
between the strand and the duct.

The tube supplier shall have a quality organization

Low pressure PN = 0.63 MPa PE 80 only
conforming with standard NF EN ISO 9000 (2000 series
version).
Pressure series PN = 1.00 MPa PE 80 or PE100
Tubes shall be chosen from the following pressure
series, depending on the type of use and in agreement
with the Supervisor:
4.1.- Check duct identification STOP POINT

Cylindrical uncoated steel duct with ribs and
maximum nominal inside diameter 130 mm and
couplings made of stapled or welded steel strip
Check that each duct bundle is perfectly Metal
identified by at least: or plastic
the producer's mark or the brand name; label, filled
in indelibly
reference to standard NF EN 523;
the classification; 1: for normal ducts
2: for heavy ducts
the nominal inside diameter;
the strip thickness.
Check that the delivery form is completely The delivery form and data in technical
filled in to contain at least: documents shall agree (internal documents
the producer's name; and duct manufacturing inspections)
marking;
the reference of the specification standard;
the nominal inside diameter, the strip thickness
and the classification and type;
the accredited certification organization (if
necessary).
Connection couplings and stiffeners
Check the reference to the ducts with which
they must be used.
Rigid smooth HDPE cylindrical duct used in
external prestressing
Check:
the presence of the NF logo; Visual These ducts shall have received the NF
mark according to AFNOR regulation
NF 114.
that their technical characteristics are mentioned. Traceability If the ducts belong to group 4 (industrial
documents applications) they shall be supplied
accompanied by traceability documents
describing the origin, quantity and quality of
recuperation polyethylene used for
manufacturing.
The supply shall be refused if these documents
are not present.

4.2.- Check appearance of ducts STOP POINT

Cylindrical uncoated steel duct, with ribs
Check:
that there are no tears, damage, ovaling on the Visual
duct;
that the dimensions (particularly the diameter) Tape
and characteristics are conforming with the QAP
and cabling drawing;
lack of any trace of oxidation; In particular, on the inside of the duct (slight
traces of oxidation may be tolerated on the
outside).
compatibility of the duct with connectors or Tape, Couplings: check the length and
couplings. screwability diameter.
4.3.- Check on storage and manipulation of ducts

Cylindrical corrugated uncoated steel duct
on planks to prevent any contact with the Ovaling of ducts at locations of
ground, under ventilated tarpaulin or in support points.
ventilated room
sheltered from damage or corrosion, protected
from water and any substance that could attack
the prestressing steel.
Monitor handling Visual The duct remains fragile and must be
handled with care so as to avoid any
damage (tear, crushing, etc.) or pollution (soil,
etc .).
HDPE ducts (corrugated cylindrical ducts)
Check storage methods: Visual Special storage adapted to
surrounding conditions is
recommended to avoid damaging the ducts
and protect the HDPE from excessive
exposure to ultraviolet rays.
The storage inspection shall be made
periodically as a function of weather and
environmental conditions.


technical instructions for prestressing processes concerned available from Specialized Distribution Contractors
(EDS).
list of internal, external prestressing processes (strands and bars), , approved or authorized, available from the
Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP)) 1 ;
the Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission ((LCPC (Central Public Works Laboratory),
58 boulevard Lefbvre, 75732 Paris Cedex 15);
engineering structures) (August 2000 ;
standard NF EN 523 Steel strip ducts for prestressing cables. Terminology, specifications, quality control;
standards NF EN 524-1 to 6 Steel strip ducts for prestressing cables. Test methods (1: determination of the
shape and dimensions, 2: behavior in bending, 3: bending in 2 directions, 4: resistance to lateral loads, 5:
resistance to tension, 6: leak tightness);
circular No. 99-53 August 20 1999 providing information complementary to regulations on the use of external
prestressing Appendix: HDPE ducts and their use. BO 99-16, September 10 1999;
the "External prestressing" guide. Technical guide. Stra (Technical Centre for Highways & Motorways), February
1990, 120 p. (Stra reference F9024);

A n c h o r a g e c a p : steel or plastic cap placed at the

Datasheet No. IV-5 end of prestressing reinforcement to make the
anchorage leak-tight, either temporarily for grouting
"Anchorages" in which case it will be removed after the grout has
set, or permanently, the cap being left in place after
grouting to reinforce the protection.
1. Purpose of this datasheet W e d g e s : steel wedges composed of two or three

jaws used to block strands in the anchor head drilled
This datasheet defines the nature of work to be done with conical holes.
for transport, storage, handling, appearance and
traceability of prestressing anchorages. C o u p l e r s : used in structures built in several phases,
to make two cable segments continuous.
2. Reminders and definitions A distinction is made between mobile couplers

(connection of adjacent sections of prestressing
The anchorage is a component of a prestressing reinforcement tensioned at the same time), fixed
system. The prestressing system must be approved or couplers (connection between the first section of
must have received a distribution or usage prestressing reinforcement installed and tensioned
authorization issued by the Interministerial initially and a second section installed and tensioned
Prestressing Commission or an ASQPE (Association later).
for Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment for
building and civil engineering works) certification. N u t s : convex or flat, used in tensioning processes
This procedure will be replaced by an ATE using prestressing bars, to maintain tension,
(European Technical Agreement) procedure in the necessarily bearing on the corresponding washer
short term, combined with the CE marking. (convex or flat) and the anchor plate with smooth
hole.
Several anchorage categories are available depending
on their function: E D S : Specialist prestressing company.
Active anchorages, designated by A, that are T h r e a d e d c o u p l i n g : steel cylinder in which a

mechanical devices composed of different central hole is drilled to enable passage of the spring
components such as the anchor head, the bearing with adjacent turns or composed of two striated half-
plate, wedges, the trumpets, couplings, etc. , as shells for bond on the strand and in the coupling. It is
defined in technical instructions for prestressing supported on the anchor head through which
systems. They anchor the cable at the end at which cylindrical holes are drilled.
tension is applied.
B e a r i n g p l a t e : part transferring the prestressing
Passive anchorages are mechanical devices or are force into the concrete, usually made of flame-cut or
formed by the bond of prestressing reinforcement to forged steel.
the concrete. Fixed external anchorages are denoted
A' or F (usually for bridges), and N is used for T r u m p e t : part located behind the anchor plate,
anchorages embedded in the concrete. that performs the function of connecting ducts to the
anchorage and spreading strands between the duct
Couplers. These are devices used to connect adjacent and the anchor head. The trumpet is made of steel,
sections of prestressing reinforcement. cast iron or plastic.
DEFINITIONS T r u m p l a t e : cast iron part acting as both plate and

trumpet.
A n c h o r a g e : mechanical device usually comprising
several components, designed to resist a prestressing Anchorages are defined in the technical instructions
force of the tensioned reinforcement and to transmit for approved prestressing processes. These technical
it to the structure. instructions are available from specialist prestressing
companies (EDS).
A n c h o r b l o c / a n c h o r h e a d : part holding
one or several prestressing reinforcing bars by keys,
couplings or nuts, and transferring the prestressing
force to the bearing plate or directly to the anchor
cone.
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1 Datasheet No. IV-5 : Anchorages

Principle diagram for a prestressing anchorage
Flat anchorage
3.1.- Check identification and traceability of anchorages STOP POINT

Check that parts making up the anchorage Visual
comply with:
the technical instructions for approved or
authorized prestressing process;
construction drawings, cable lay-out drawings;
the prestressing design note;
the EDS (specialist prestressing company)
pressure / elongation directive;
the EDSs QAP (Quality Assurance Plan);
the stressing order;
the delivery form.
Check traceability and identification
trumpets, trumplates, bearing plates; Visual Identification mark, usually on the outside of
Technical the conical part.
instructions
for the
system
anchor heads; Cold marking of the batch number and the

manufacturing mark.
wedges. Labels Labels on the packaging (buckets, plastic bags,
cardboard boxes).
In general, the traceability by batch No.
or other means (manufacturing date,
factory mark, etc.) of parts making up the
anchorage must be assured and documented
for each structure (delivery form, tensioning
sheets or other documents).
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 2 Datasheet No. IV-5: Anchorages

3.2.- Check visual, dimensional, functional appearance

Check:
cleanliness and condition of the parts, No trace of rust or oxidation particularly in
tapered holes of anchor heads, on contact faces
of anchor head/trumplate, on keys, nuts,
washers, in the inner part of trumplate;
- No sign of impact;
- No microcracks or cracks on cast parts.
Oxidized nut +
Oxidized key washer
overall dimensions of component parts; Tape By spot checks

caliper gauge
Diagrams in
QAP
technical
instructions
or drawings
the functional appearance; Delivered Examples: screwability of the anchor cone
parts with the anchor body, the nut on the
prestressing bar.
planeity of faces in contact. Straight Bearing plates/trumplate in the anchor head

edge, feeler bearing zone
gauges
3.3.- Check on storage of anchorages

Anchor heads, nuts, washers, trumpets, Periodic Usually delivered in bins or crates covered to
trumplates, bearing plates visual checks be sealed, inside ventilated tarpaulin or on film
coated pallets or in heat sealable caps.
in a room (site stores, container, bungalow, etc.)
for a long storage period;
directly on the site for immediate use. Packaging shall be placed on planks, protected
from the weather by a ventilated tarpaulin.
After use, packings shall be re-closed and
protected.
If several batches are delivered, the
parts shall be physically separated.
Keys They are packaged, slightly oiled in plastic
buckets or plastic bags or in a cardboard
packaging box with an inside plastic film.


in a room for long term storage; They shall always be kept in their
original packaging (traceability); after
use, the packaging shall be closed and
protected.
in the EDS vehicle (general case);

directly on the site for immediate use. For cardboard packaging, special precautions
shall be provided for rainy weather.
The storage inspection shall be made
periodically as a function of weather and
environmental conditions.

technical instructions for prestressing systems concerned available from specialist prestressing companies (EDS).
list of prestressing systems (strands and bars), inside, outside, approved or authorized, available from the
Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP) 1 Issued every 6 months;
regulations for the use of prestressing - Circular 89-26 April 17 1989. Special leaflet 89-6;
regulations for the approval and inspection of prestressing systems and anchor devices. April 14 1989 order. Special
leaflet No. 89-6;
approval and inspection of prestressing systems and anchor devices - Appendices I to V in the regulations C.I.P
approval, January 04 1990;
the circular describing the use of intermediate prestressing units with incomplete anchorages. Circular No. 2002-57
September 04 2002. O.B. No. 2002-17.

Datasheet No. IV-6

This sheet should be used with sheet No. IV-4
'Prestressing ducts" that defines work to be done in
terms of transport, storage, handling, appearance and
"Installation of traceability of prestressing ducts before placement.
prestressing ducts"
General
1. Purpose of this datasheet Make sure on site that predetermined measures
described in the QAP are sufficient to achieve the
This datasheet defines the nature of work to be done required quality and are actually applied.
when placing prestressing ducts before concreting
(internal prestressing) or after concreting (external The main contractor, and sometimes the specialist
prestressing). prestressing company (EDS) usually places ducts and
trumplates.
2.1.- Inspection BEFORE INSTALLATION of ducts STOP POINT
Corrugated steel duct with ribs (rigid duct

bendable by hand)
Check:
the type, diameter, thickness, and origin; Metal or plastic Datasheet No. IV-4
identification, traceability; label filled-in
indelibly
that overall dimensions, particularly the Tape
inside nominal diameter, comply with the
EDS's QAP and the cable lay-out drawing;
compatibility with the trumpet type Trumpet: attachment to the
(output diameter); formwork, connection to the
duct [a coupling between the
anchor cone and the duct is
usually essential (little clearance
and insertion all the way into
the anchor cone by screwing
the coupling)], dimension and
size of the recess, presence,
nature and position of binding
band
connectors or couplings; Screwability Couplings: check the
length and diameter.
that grouting accessories (pipes, vents, Construction Accessories for grouting: see
purges) correspond to the approval of the drawing Art. 92.2.3 in CCTG (General
prestressing process used, check the inside Technical Clauses, leaflet 65A)
diameters;
vent for strip duct (half shell). Check the
presence of the closing cap in the half shell
Rigid smooth cylindrical HDPE duct used
in external prestressing
Check:
the presence of the NF logo; Visual Reminder of datasheet
No.. IV-4 These tubes
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1 Datasheet No. IV-6: Installation of prestressing ducts
must have received the NF

mark according to AFNOR
regulation NF 114.
Other types of materials and tubes may be
used (steel, plastic material, etc.), see
articles 72.1.1 and 72.1.1.2 (steel tubes) of
the addendum to the CCTG leaflet 65A.
2.2.- Inspection WHEN INSTALLING the ducts STOP POINT
Corrugated uncoated steel duct (rigid duct

bendable by hand)
Check:
absence of corrosion (brand new aspect);
absence of deterioration or pollution (mud,
earth, etc.);
support: binding wire or attachment Depending on the Arc spot welding is
devices must be sufficiently stiff without requirements in prohibited.
causing any deformation (no ripples) and reinforcement or
there must be a sufficient number of them; cabling drawings in
accordance with
the texts,
regulations.
Firm attachment of the duct, as close as Construction Attachment of ducts by
possible to the back of the trumpet to prevent drawing mild steel wire binding
separation of the duct and the trumpet. alone is not sufficient for fixing
them.
continuity of the duct shape by screwed Mark on the two Couplings: must be correctly
coupling; ducts to be coupled centered (half length of
coupling for each connected
duct)
the position in plan and in elevation; Cable lay-out Article 94 in CCTG leaflet
drawing 65A: tolerances on duct
Tape positions after concreting.
radius of curvature more than 100 i; For radius of curvature
< 100 i Particular
procedure or special duct
the position, number and placement of Construction Vents: high point position.
vents and purges. Check the support of drawings Drilling after concreting.
vent tubes using devices preventing any Vents outside curvatures to
displacement or deformation; prevent closing off by
tensioned strands.
lateral cover and c/c distance of anchors; Article 93.2 in CCTG leaflet
65A
Make sure that the duct is coaxial with the

anchor body / trumpet assembly
passive reinforcement; Reinforcement

drawing
existence of a sealing device at the Presence of Special precautions to achieve

duct/coupling and at anchor parts, adhesive tape of continuity of leak tightness,
trumpets, accessories; heat shrinking particularly at accessories
trumpets, accessories; couplings. (pipes, vents, purges, etc.).

Visual
the check on the leak tightness of ducts is See datasheet No.. IV-4
usually made after the reinforcement has
been inserted (risk of disorders);
free passage for prestressing steel inside Inflatable tube or Depending on the structure
ducts. HDPE duct with type (for example cantilever
smaller than the structure, incremental
strip duct inserted launching bridge, etc.)
before concrete
Rigid smooth HDPE cylindrical duct used

in external prestressing
Check assembly done by thermofusion Square End cuts to be
mirror welding connected shall be at
right angles.
electro-weldable connectors
Prevent the duct from being crushed under Precautions to be taken

the effect of the permanent pressure in curves in deviation zones.
of the cable bundle assembly. Special precautions in curved
parts: local use of higher
performance tubes in the high
pressure series or inside lining
of the HDPE duct using a
grooved flexible metal or other
type of duct. See article 73.2.2
(positioning of deviators) in
the addendum to CCTG leaflet
65A.
Connections for vents and grouting Drilling is

recommended before
placing reinforcement.
Otherwise, special measures
shall be taken:
e.g.: hard tool fitted with a limit
stop.
Drilling by fusion is prohibited
For ducts with hot injected filling product, Expansion joints:

expansion and thermal shrinkage problems expansion joints shall
should be taken care of. be provided whenever the
length exceeds 100 m.
Expansion vessels: see article
73.1.4 in the addendum to
CCTG leaflet 65A.
Check that there is no excessive local The spacing is limited to 5 m,

deformation due to temporary supports used this value must be reduced to
to support the ducts. If these supports are not 2.5 m when the cables are
continuous, each must have a contact length composed of protected
with the duct equal to at least the diameter of sheathed strands housed in
the duct and there must be no sharp edges. ducts grouted before
tensioning.
2.3.- Inspection AFTER INSTALLATION (after concreting) STOP POINT
Corrugated cylindrical uncoated steel duct

(rigid duct bendable by hand)
Foam ball
Check free passage of prestressing steel
inside ducts.
Mark the ducts; Paint spray at end Cable number
of cable.
Check that precautions have been taken Caps on deck to prevent

(temporary sealing, air blowing, etc.) to prevent water ingress.
and evacuate any ingressed water (water
accumulation) into the ducts (condensation,
infiltration);
Check the vent lines. Held by rigid support to
prevent breaks on the deck
(passage of machinery, etc.).
3. Documents supplied to the Supervisor

the EDS (specialist prestressing compagny) Quality Assurance Plan;
cable lay-out drawing;
reinforcement drawing;
technical instructions for the prestressing system;
procedure for placement of ducts;
inspection sheet for placement of ducts;
non conformity sheet if any.

technical instructions for prestressing systems applied available from specialist prestressing company (EDS).
list of prestressing systems (strands and bars), internal, external, approved or temporily permitted , available from
the Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP) 1 ;
engineering structures) (August 2000), Articles 92.2, 93.2, leaflet 65A, Art. 65.2, 73.1 in the addendum to leaflet
65A;
standard NF EN 523 Steel corrugated ducts for prestressing cables. Terminology, specifications, quality control;
standards NF EN 524-1 to 6 Steel corrugated ducts for prestressing cables. Tests method (1: determination of
the shape and dimensions, 2: behaviour in bending, 3: bending in 2 directions, 4: resistance to lateral loads, 5:
resistance to tension, 6: leak tightness);
circular No. 99-53 20th August 1999 providing supplementary information to the regulations for use of external
prestressing - Appendix: HDPE and their installation. BO 99-16, 10th September 1999;
the External prestressing guide. Technical guide. Stra, February 1990, 120 p. (Stra reference F9024);
1The CIP will eventually be replaced by the ASQPE (Association for Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment used in
Datasheet No. IV-7

"Threading and tensioning
of prestressing tensile
elements"

Tensioning a prestressing unit
(Photo: G. Forquet)
when threading and tensioning prestressing tensile
elements.
This datasheet should be used with the following

datasheets:
IV-1 "Bare strands";

IV-2 "Protected strands";
IV-3 "Prestressing bars";
IV-5 "Anchorages".

2.1. General
Make sure on site that predetermined measures
described in the QAP are actually applied and are
sufficient to achieve the required quality.
Threading may be done by the main contractor (EG)

under the responsibility of the prestressing supervisor
(CMP) of the specialist prestressing company (EDS)
for the prestressing system.
Tensioning shall be done by the EDS CMP

(prestressing supervisor).
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1 Datasheet No.IV-7: Threading and tensioning of prestressing tensile elements
2.2. Threading of prestressing tensile elements
2.2.1. Inspections before threading

Strands and bars
check composition / designation / numbering; Cable lay-out
drawing
check marking of prestressing steel on the Paint the
structure; number at the
side of each
anchorage
check that prestressing complies with the order; Delivery form,
EDS QAP
check acceptance of the prestressing steel: See datasheets No. IV-1 to 3
identification, traceability; Metal or plastic

label
geometrical and mechanical characteristics; Test report file Strands: force / elongation
- Manufacturer curve
certificate of Bars: ultimate strength and
conformity elongation, modulus of
elasticity. In some special cases,
the modulus of elasticity used
in the Pressure/Elongation
directive is the actual modulus
of the bar.
protection and condition of the prestreesing Visual X Any damaged
steel, prestressing steel shall be
rejected and replaced.
For bars, it is recommended
that an individual visual
inspection shall be carried out
after wiping or brushing if
necessary. Rusted or deformed
bars or marked bars (for
example by a pipe wrench) are
eliminated and destroyed.
Strands
check placement of strand coils in uncoilers; Visual Whenever possible, coils are
direction of uncoiling to be respected. arranged behind pushers along
the center line of strands to be
threaded.
2.2.2. Inspections during threading

Strands
check insertion; Visual
bare strands
threading by individual pushing of strands Static uncoiler

in the ducts (most cases);
Pneumatic,
electrical or
hydraulic
pushing
machine
pulling for the last strands that are difficult

to thread;
pulling of the complete cable when Use a strand
difficulties are predicted (length, strongly for pulling the
curved lay-out, etc.) assembly
protected sheathed strands
pulling the strand, the protected sheathed Standard

strand is unwound by rotation of the reel threadingdamages the
installed on a shaft HDPE duct.
Threading is usually done manually or by

pushing with an threading machine fitted
with rubber rollers.
check the use of finger caps (metal or plastic) at Visual Reverse movements during
the end of strands, tightly clamped or coupled, pushing can extract the pin
to hold in place during duct passage; from the strand, that can thus
stay in the duct.
check that a strand protection device has been Visual This device is usually a plastic
put into place between the uncoiler and the sheathed segment.
insertion machine (pusher) and between the
insertion machine and the anchor so as to
prevent pollution (mud, sand, etc.) and injury;
check that the overlength of strands behind the Technical For some systems, if strand
anchor is sufficient for the jack tool jaws; instructions for retraction measurements are to
the prestressing be made, an additional
system overlength is necessary on at
least 1 strand for each unit.
check the traceability of each strand forming Cable insertion Minimum information on this
part of each cable inserted in the ducts. or composition datasheet: Bridge, part of
sheet produced bridge, nature and source of
and signed by strand, cable number and
the EDS CMP. number of strands per each
coil.
Bars
check that minimum overlengths of bars on the EDS Protruding length from passive
passive and active anchor ends are within instruction or active plates.
tolerances given by EDS; sheet or
internal
procedure
- System
technical
instructions
ditto for elements delivered pre-assembled (bar

in duct) and pre- filled (usually flexible product:
wax);
check centering of the bar within the duct. Visual, ruler. Uniformly distributed
centering devices may be used
(materials compatible with
grouting products) to
guarantee correct centering.
Free passage for grouting
products.
Caution with
unintentional deviations
2.2.3. Inspections after threading
Strands
check cutting of strands: Disk cutter Torch cutting is
prohibited (unless
special precautions are defined
in the QAP; particularly
protection of anchorages and
grout vents).
no strand wire separation; If strand wire separation, reject

the strand concerned.
cutting Depending on prestressing

systems.
- same vertical plane,
- staggered, etc.
Strands and bars
check protection of overlengths of strands and Usually pieces of ducts or

bars against rain, dirt, sand, dust and plastic fixed with plastic tape
mechanical damage until tensioning; (strands) or cloth/strip with
grease or wax (bars).
control the time between threading and Spraying with Provide temporary protection
tensioning. oil soluble in for a period exceeding 4 weeks.
water
2.3. Tensioning
2.3.1. Inspections prior to tensioning
Strands and bars

check that the prestressing Supervisor (CMP) - CMP badge X Badge: CMPs name and
of the specialist prestressing company (EDS) is - QAP (site prestressing system.
present; organisation
and personnel
resources)
NOTE: for temporary and permanent - CMP training The CMP may be an agent
prestressing bars, if the CMP of the installing course employed by either the EDS
EDS is not the same as the CMP of the - Aptitude for the prestressing system, or
distribution EDS, he must be approved by the certificate the contractor responsible for
EDS distributing the prestressing system. issued for a bar the civil engineering works,
type and for a whose skills are recognised by
site the EDS of the prestressing
system used.
check that the specified required strength of the Concrete test X

concrete is reached; report
check that there is no void behind the Visual, hammer X
anchorage;
check that the ambient temperature is not less Thermometer X If the temperature is
than 10C; below +5C, bars must
be especially well protected
against shocks.
check that the following documents exist and
are consistent and compatible:
the EDSs QAP
the technical instructions for the prestressing
process;
tensioning procedure;
cable lay-out drawing; Visual The design office defines cable
numbers and the tensioning
phase, the tensioning order, the
type and nature of cables (cable
tensioned at one or both ends,
unit, etc.), and the specified
concrete strength for
tensioning, on the cable lay-out
drawing.
workshop drawing;
elongation design note; Design assumptions
about the theoretic
elongation and element
considered in the calculation.
The conventional elongation
calculation for reinforcement
for which the radius of
curvature drops significantly
below 3 m is not applicable
(the case for sheathed greased
strands used as active stirrups).
Pressure/Elongation directives; Po ; Ao ; 0,95 Ao ; 1,10 Ao.
Pa ; Aa ; 0.95 Aa ; 1.05 or
1.10 Aa.
tensioning sheet; Document already filled with
theoretical values to obtain
(pressure and elongation).
jack calibration sheet;
verification sheets for site pump/jack
manometers.
check conformity and types of equipment used:
jacks, pumps, manometers
To observe:
- absence of oil leaks (couplings, hoses,
pistons, etc.);
- correct operation of jacks at no load for the For short units, a pressure
following phases: tension, blocking, blocking limiter device set to 1.05 Po
reverse, tensionvoltage return. must be available.
Jacks
type; EDS QAP Main characteristics of jacks
Technical that can be used for tensioning
instructions for the different units.
the prestressing
systen
calibration of jacks. Calibration Validity: 6 months
report / Calibration of jacks can be
certificate used to determine internal
friction in jacks. Two methods
are possible:
- jacks in opposition;
- force / pressure
correspondence.
For short strand and bar
units (2 to 5 m), the jack
shall be calibrated using the
force / pressure
correspondence method.
hydraulic pumps EDS QAP The type of pumps used must
be adapted to prevent high
pressure losses due to the
cross-sections of some jacks.
manometers
site manometer - Sealed metal / The label and the report

(placed either on the hydraulic pump, or plastic label, document the correspondence
on the prestressing jack) fixed to the between the real value and the
manometer or read value.
metal plate Validity: 3 months.
(some EDS) For intensive use, manometers
- corresponding are checked before first
report tensioning on the site and at
(document least every 100 tensioning
complementary operations using a standard
to the label; manometer.
most EDS)
For long hoses or a large number of If the manometer is connected
hydraulic fittings, it is preferable for the to the pump, check the
manometer to be on the jack rather than on correspondence between the
the pump (losses). pressure at the jack and the
pressure at the pump in the
pump manometer hose
jack assembly.
standby manometer (recommended)

(ditto site manometer)
standard manometer - Validity: 1 year.
to periodically check site manometers and Corresponding The standard manometer
particularly during frequent equipment report shall not be used for
movements (possible collisions) and long - Precision tensioning.
duration sites equal to at least
0.5% of the
maximum scale
Bars
check the type, identification, dimensions and

marking:
of the anchor plate (length, width, thickness, Technical
hole ); instructions
for the
prestressing
system
of nuts and couplings: marking of the type
and batch number;
of the washer: outside and hole .
check the traceability of delivered anchor parts; Delivery form
and/or
acceptance
inspection
sheet and/or
prestresiing
steel and
anchorage
installation
sheet or other
equivalent
document
check that bars are properly screwed-in, - By unscrewing Both bars must be
especially for the case of embedded passive the bar by screwed in to half of the
anchorages and intermediate couplings; about 1/4 turn coupling.
and screwing
the bar again
using a pipe
wrench
- Coupling
procedure
check the cleanliness of the nut thread and the Visual If necessary, disassemble the
bar in each anchorage; nut and clean the thread of the
bar for better screwability.
check that the plate is properly centered relative - Marker

to the duct; - Chalk
check that the bar is orthogonal to the active - Bracket with The orthogonality defect shall
and passive plates; cap not exceed 2, namely a
- Depth gauge maximum slope of 3.50%.
or other devices
or other devices
check the preliminary blocking of the active - Adjustable

nut; spanner
- Pipe wrench
check that minimum overlengths on the passive EDS internal Minimum distance beyond the
and active anchorage sides are within tolerances procedure or anchor plates as a function of
specified by the EDS; instructions the bar diameter and the
sheet anchor type (passive and
- Technical active).
instructions
measure the protruding length of the bar in - Depth gauge The value must not be less
mm from the upper face of the active nut. / measuring than the value specified by the
(optional measurement) tape EDS.
- EDS internal
procedure
- Technical
instructions
Strands
check the type, dimensions and marking Technical
(identification) of: instructions for
the prestressing
process
(diagrams, etc.)
the anchor head (, thickness, etc.);

the keys (length, outside ).
check the traceability of the anchor parts used; Delivery form In general, traceability
and/or must be available for
acceptance each structure.
inspection
sheet and/or
prestressing
steel and
anchorage
installation
sheet
check that a centering device is put into Visual For some types of processes.
position correctly (usually made of plastic) in
the anchorage to align the strands within the
anchor head;
check that the strands are properly arranged, Visual Take special care with
aligned with the corresponding holes in the long cables, to prevent
anchor heads (no crossing); kinks that can cause breakage
of strand wires.
check correct placement (centering) of anchor Visual
heads (self-centering or centering with respect
to the bearing plate by confinement, external
guiding ring, etc.) ;
placement of wedges. Visual wedges pushed by metal tubes.
In some cases (for passive
anchorages) possibility of
fixing a non-return ring

(restraining plate).
2.3.2. Inspections during tensioning
Strands and bars

check that safety measures are in place during
DO NOT ALLOW
tensioning.
anyone behind nor
close to the jack, nor behind
passive anchors during
tensioning.
Secure the zones concerned.
Strands
installation of prestressing jacks on the strands - Tensioning
order
- Transport
carriage, pulley,
etc.
check alignment of the strand/hole of the
anchor head/jack
at the first pressure stage (usually 100 bar):
check that the jack is free from handling No tension in Possible unintentional
devices; the pulley deviation that could
block, packing cause breakage of strand wires.
removed, etc.
for cables with ACTIVE & PASSIVE ends, Visual Cable tensioned at one end
make sure that wedges on the PASSIVE side only.
are correctly inserted: For this type of
no offset between strands or slight offset Penetration ACTIVE/PASSIVE cable, it is
acceptable; using the metal recommended that the work
tube if should be done at 50 bar
necessary instead of 100 bar.
no sliding of strands.
take a reading in mm (index on strand or on Straight edge, This phase corresponds to
prestressing jack piston with respect to a tape compensation of the "slack"
fixed point), this measurement corresponds and placement of the cable,
to the "zero" point for the calculation of anchors, jacks.
elongations. Elongation between 0 and
100 bars is determined by the
arithmetic mean of partial
elongations obtained on each
anchor between 100 200, 200
300 and 300 400 bars.
Pressure increments at each end of - Visual Cable tensioned at both ends.
ACTIVE/ACTIVE cables must be made - Connection
simultaneously. by radio or site
telephones
at each pressure level:
monitor and check pressure and elongation
measurements successively:
measurements successively:
at not less than 3 pressure levels less than Pressure /
0.90 P0 (predetermined levels, usually Elongation
defined every 100 bar) ; Directives
(DP/A)
at a so-called alert pressure level Pa close Tensioning
to 0.95 P0; book or sheet
at P0 (final theoretical pressure) or - Pressures: site When the hydraulic pump is
slightly less than P0 if 1.10 A0 is reached. manometer stopped, a pressure drop of
- Elongations about 10 to 30 bar may be
measured with observed at each stage
straight edge or (depending on the pump used,
tape, either by the length of hoses or the
displacement of number of connectors and
a metallic index depending on the oil
fixed on at least temperature).
one strand, or
The pressure
by
measurement is the
measurement
value of the static pressure.
of the piston
The pressure measurement is
extension
made with the pump stopped.
Compensation of jack opening If possible:
Operation necessary when: - re-apply tension at a
programmed level;
the jack stroke is small; - do not reapply tension
near end of tensioning
steps.
the elongation to be obtained is greater than
the jack stroke.
keying
Operation that consists of hydraulically Hydraulic Depending on prestressing
blocking (pushing) wedges on the strand, at blocking jack systems.
each tension stage
check the blocking pressure. Technical For some systems, auto-
instructions, blocking.
EDS procedure
wedge pull-in measurements (periodic - The EDSs

inspections) operating
method or
Operation consisting of measuring pull-in of
procedure
the strand when the force is transferred from
- Theoretical
the jack to the anchorage by emptying the
value: technical
tensioning chamber
instructions for
the prestressing
system
measurement of transmission coefficients
internal inspection (unless the contract CMP Article 95.4.2 in CCTG -

transfers this internal inspection to external General Technical Clauses -
inspection); leaflet 65A
suitability and proving trials (if specified in Organisation Art. 95.3B, Art. 95.4.2 in
the contract); responsible for CCTG leaflet 65A, Art. 4.10 in
these tests the BPEL 91 rules, circular No.
94.33, April 19 1994.
circumstances in which measurements are Art. 95.4.2 in CCTG leaflet

essential; 65A
clarifications on tests and the means of Typical Appendix C to the text,

interpreting them. transmission contractual appendix, of
coefficient CCTG leaflet 65A.
record sheet
interest of the measurement of transmission

coefficients
external inspection, internal inspection, third
party inspection
cases for which measurements of the Circular No. 94.33,
transmission coefficient are essential April 19 1994
operating methods and test means
analysis of results
clarifications for the contractor tender

document
Bars
check that the jack and the pump are working Jacks are annular, compact and
correctly at no load; relatively lightweighted.
check that the tightening wrench (bushing) is Tensioning

placed on the nut before the jack is put into command
place;
when the jack is placed on the bar, check Straight edge
centering with respect to the anchor plate;
verify that all adapter parts at the back of the The bar is anchored at the back
jack are in contact and correctly centered; of the jack using a centering
washer and a clamping nut.
The manual clamping device of
the anchor nut is available in
the jack nose.

To tension the bar, it may be
extended by a tension rod
(extension) to the back of the
jack and anchored by a
centering washer and a
clamping nut.
check that the tension rod is screwed correctly; - Marking with This tension rod is screwed at
paint the end of the bar to be
- EDS internal tensioned using a coupling.
procedure
Special limitation if the
tension rod is reused.
check that enough space is available to move

the jack away after tensioning;
F at the first level (usually 100 bar): The clamping key must turn
freely in its housing as soon as
the force is applied.
take a reading at 0,1 mm (dial gauge in contact - Dial gauge / Check that the seating of the
with the bearing plate at the end of the jack depth gauge or magnetic stand is stable and is
piston or in direct contact with the end of the others positioned on a fixed point, use
bar or the tension rod), this measurement depending on of the dial gauge depends on
corresponds to the "zero" point for calculating site conditions the space available in the work
the elongation of the bar. - Magnetic location and is more sensitive
stand to even the smallest outside
shock.
This phase corresponds to
placement of the bar, threads,
the plate, nut and jack.
The elongation obtained
between 0 and 100 bar is
determined by the arithmetic
mean of partial elongations
obtained between 100 200,
200 300 and 300 400 bar.
F at each pressure stage:
check pressure and elongation measurements

successively:
at not less than 3 pressure levels less than Pressure /
0.90 P0 (predetermined levels, usually Elongation
defined every 100 bar); directives
(DP/A)
at a so-called alert pressure level Pa close Tensioning

to 0.95 P0; book or sheet
at P0 (final theoretical pressure) or - Pressures: site When the hydraulic

slightly less than P0 if 1.10 A0 is reached. manometer pump is stopped, a
- Elongations pressure drop of about 10 to
measured with 30 bar may be observed at each
dial gauge on a level (depending on the pump
bearing plate at used, the length of hoses or the
the end of the number of connectors and

jack piston or depending on the oil
on the end of temperature).
the bar
The pressure measurement is
the value of the static pressure.
The pressure is measured with
the pump stopped.
F at the final level (pressure Po):
check that the pressure is stable; Manometer
check screwing of the nut; Tightening After the nut has been
wrench screwed-in, the force
may be transferred from the
jack to the anchorage.
check that the combined nut tensioning / Repetitive nut tensioning

tightening operation is actually repeated several / tightening operations
times until the required residual force is can limit settling losses.
obtained.
- For threaded bars,
retensioning twice after the
initial tensioning can
significantly reduce pull-in of
anchorages.
- For short units (2 to 5 m), the
operation must be repeated at
least twice after initial
tensioning.
Ribbed bars cannot be
used for very short
reinforcement (< 2 m).
A suitability test may assure
that the means used are
sufficient to obtain the
required prestressing force.
F special limitations if bars are re-used It is strongly
recommended not to use
1230 MPa grade bars.
special cases of temporary jigs and hangers. Use in tension only.

The original tension is
limited to 0.6 Frg if used once
and 0.5 Frg if re-used.
check prestressing steel before each re-use: Visual
no bending, no shock marks, no welding Visual marking In each case, it is

points, no wear points, no oxidation nor with paint recommended that the
damage points. during each use maximum number of uses
to display the should be agreed upon with
number of uses EDS.
(or other
solutions)
for anchor accessories, check:
that there are no excessive deformations;
integrity of the thread.
2.3.3. Inspections after tensioning
Strands
check the position of wedges in the anchor
heads:
homogeneous pull-in;
no offset of strands;
visual observations: any cracking Visual With some types of wedges,
small cracks of no
consequence may appear
adjacent to the elementary
wires of the strand.
check that there is no sliding between - Alignment of

strands/wedges wedge prints on
the strands
- Paint on the
strands before
tensioning
- Tensioning
sheet
(elongation
greater than
theoretical)
cutting-off strands - Tensioning X Cut strands

sheet
- Anomaly
sheet
- Non-
conformity
sheet
Bars
check the residual effective force in the bar by - EDS QAP X This phase consists of applying
"weighing", at the frequency defined in the - EDSs internal a sufficiently high tension force
EDS's QAP procedure or to the tensioned bar so that the
This "weighing" phase may be done either at instructions anchor (nut) no longer bears
the end of tensioning, or after a predetermined sheet on the bearing plate, and it
period (shrinkage, creep, relaxation, etc.). - Design note shall be possible to loosen the
- Depth gauge nut.
(jack piston)
- Dial gauge The force corresponding to
(end of the bar) separation of the anchor
(end of the bar) corresponds to the required

residual force.
For this phase, pressure and

elongation readings are
identical to normal tensioning
of the bar.
3. Behaviour in case of anomaly

See appendix attached to this datasheet.
4. Documents supplied to the Supervisor

the EDSs QAP
inspection plan;
cable lay-out drawing;
reinforcement drawing;
technical instructions for the prestressing system;
insertion and tensioning procedure;
insertion sheet;
concrete strength report;
tensioning sheet/ book
anomaly sheet if any.

technical instructions for prestressing processes concerned, available from specialist prestressing companies
Distribution Contractors (EDS).
list of approved or temporily permitted, internal and external prestressing systems (strands and bars), available
from the Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP) 1 ;
the Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP) or the ASQPE (LCPC (Central Public
Works Laboratory), 58 boulevard Lefbvre, 75732 Paris Cedex 15);
regulation for the approval and inspection of prestressing processes and anchor devices. April 14 1989 order.
Special leaflet No. 89-6;
regulation for the use of prestressing - Circular 89-26 17th April 1989. Special leaflet No. 89-6;
Appendices I to V to the regulations for approval and inspection of prestressing processes and anchor devices -
C.I.P approval, 4th January 1990;
the circular describing the use of intermediate prestressing units with incomplete anchors. Circular No. 2002-57
4th September 2002. O.B. No. 2002-17;
supplements to the regulations for application of prestressing (transmission coefficient). Circular No. 94-33, 19th
April 1994. O.B. No. 94-12;
supplements to the regulations and the use of prestressing bars. Circular No. 94.34, 9th April 1994. O.B. No. 94-
12;
Articles 3.3.11 and 4.10 in BPEL 91 rules revised in 99 "Technical design and calculation rules for prestressed
concrete structures and construction using the limit states method". Special leaflet No. 99-9, April 1999.
Appendix to datasheet No. IV-7

"Threading and tensioning of
prestressing reinforcement"
Behaviour to be adopted if an anomaly

occurs
Under no circumstances can:

1. General - Po be exceeded;
- 1.10 Ao be exceeded.
Measures to be adopted in the case of an anomaly
must be as defined in the QAP (art. 93.3.4 and art. If 1.10 Ao is reached and Po is not reached, the
95.3.B in CCTG leaflet 65A). expected force is not reached.
For all anomalies that occur during

2. Before threading tensioning:
stop tensioning the cable concerned;
Separation of a duct connection repair after
demolishing the zone concerned. block the wedges in the anchor head;
do not perform any cutting-off operation;
3. During threading open a nonconformity sheet;
inform the design office;
If unit strands cannot be threaded thread at the go onto the next cable; if the problem encountered
other end of the duct. is confirmed, suspend tensioning while waiting for
If only some of the prestressing unit strands can be proposal of corrective actions (equipment check,
threaded modulus of steel, friction, coefficient of friction,
Simultaneous pulling out of all strands etc.).
concerned;
If there is an elongation anomaly with a cable, it
Remove previously threaded strands and
might be useful to consider measuring the
pulling out of the entire bundle of strands.
transmission coefficient on another cable with a
similar lay-out.
4. Tensioning to Pa (alert pressure)
if the measured elongation is less than 0.95 Aa, 6. Accidental break of one or several
tensioning is continued until Po (theoretical final
wires of a strand
pressure);
if the measured elongation is more than 1.05 Aa stop tensioning the cable concerned;
(Aa = theoretical elongation at Pa), tensioning is the location of the break must be found and
continued in steps of 10 bar and stopped when analyzed (defect in the strand, wedges, jack or
either Po or 1.10 Ao (Ao = theoretical elongation anchor tools, unintentional deviations, jack, etc.);
at Po) is reached, whichever is first.
the number of broken wires must be estimated;
the new final pressure must be limited to:
5. Tensioning to Po (final pressure)
Po x (N n)/N - n: number of broken wires
If the measured elongation is less than 0.95 Ao, - N: total number of wires
cable tensioning is stopped; forming the cable
if the measured elongation reaches the theoretical - Po: initial pressure to be
maximum value, in other words 1.10 Ao, obtained at the end of
tensioning of the cable concerned is stopped. tensioning
open an anomaly sheet;

corrective actions taken to correct the anomaly;
Tensioning is declared to be conforming if the decision by the design office.
pressure Po is reached and if the measured elongation
is between 0.95 and 1.10 Ao.
7. One or several strands broken 8. Transmission coefficients

stop tensioning the cable concerned; The final opinion about the comparison between the
the location of the break must be found and value of the transmission coefficient measured on site
analyzed (defect in the strand, wedges, jack or taking account of friction losses in anchors and jacks
anchor tools, unintentional deviations, blocking, and the theoretical value of the transmission
crossover behind the anchorage, long cables, etc.) ; coefficient calculated by the design office should be
the new final pressure must be limited to: made by the external inspection done by the
supervisor.
Po x (N n)/N - n: number of broken
strands If anomalies are detected, in other words if there is a
- N: total number of strands significant difference between the measured value and
forming the cable the theoretical value, proceed as follows:
- Po: initial pressure to be
obtained at the end of for parts of structures that have not yet been
tensioning concreted, improve the construction by taking
compensatory measures (position, attachment of
open an anomaly sheet; ducts, internal condition of anchor cones and
corrective actions taken to correct the anomaly; ducts, etc.). New measures will have to be taken to
decision by the design office; verify that an improvement has been made.
validate whether to keep the cable concerned in its for parts of structures that have been concreted,
existing condition or to replace it. make a new structural calculation based on the
determined coefficients of friction.
Datasheet No. IV-8

This recommendation concerns firstly the formulator
(product) and secondly the applicator (equipment
and placement)
"Protection products and
A distinction is made between two types of cement
cachetage" grout:
non-thixotropic grout, that is fluid after production;
thixotropic grout
1. Purpose of this datasheet traditional grout with thixotropic agent added at the
end of manufacturing; grout in the form of a gel at
This sheet defines the nature of work to be done rest, that becomes fluid when it is stirred.
when protection products and cachetage are used. It
should be used with sheet No. IV-6 "Placement of The viscosity (cohesion) of this type of cement grout
prestressing ducts". is measured using a vane tester according to EDF
document CE 88-148.
It contains three parts:
A distinction is made between two types of grouting
protection products; methods:
placement of protection products;
the "traditional" method, by pumping at one end
cachetage. (low point);
It does not deal with: the air vacuum" grouting method, vacuum
generated from the end opposite to the grouting
protection of sheathed and protected strands, nor end.
coated strands (described in datasheet No. IV-2) ; Protection by a oil based product
injection of prestressing ducts by grease or wax
product (this item will be dealt with in another A distinction is made between two products:
version of this datasheet)
grease based on mineral oil; plastic lubricant
obtained by dispersion, in the form of a stabilized
2. Reminders three-dimensional lattice, a thickener insoluble in a
lubricating fluid.
Prestressing reinforcement shall be permanently
protected against corrosion to assure long-term In general, the liquid component is a mineral oil and
prestressing starting from temporary protection until the thickening agent is metallic soap (lithium, calcium,
final protection. aluminum, etc.).
The purpose of grouting ducts and anchors is to fill The use of grease with potassium, sodium and
voids in ducts, to protect reinforcement against potassium and sodium soaps is prohibited, because
corrosive agents and to passivate the steel used. these products can react with concrete.
Protection by a grout composed of The use of grease is only acceptable for internal
cement, additive and water prestressing in the concrete Even so, it is preferable
to use waxes showing no bleeding phenomenon.
The grout must have been issued with a favorable
technical recommendation (ATF) or a favorable micro-crystalline wax is a crystallized malleable solid
temporary recommendation (APF) delivered at the composed of saturated hydrocarbons called
moment by the Interministerial Prestressing paraffinic hydrocarbons.
Commission (CIP)1 Eventually, products should
receive CE marking. Products used shall comply with the specifications in
articles 52.2.1 and 52.2.2 in the addendum to leaflet
65 A in the CCTG (General Technical Clauses).
Protection by a viscoelastic gel of

epoxy polymer.
1 The CIP will be eventually replaced by the ASQPE (Association
for Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment used in buildings
and civil engineering works) These two entities cohabit at the
present time.
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 1/8 Datasheet No.IV-8: Protection products and cachetage

3.1.- Before application of permanent protection products (temporary protection).
Nature of the check Means PA PC Comments
check that the duration between the end of Spraying Renewal will be necessary after
placement of the reinforcement and final 4 weeks (Article 91 in CCTG
grouting is less than 4 weeks; leaflet 65A)
If temporary protection is renewed, check:
the nature of the protection and renewal

If the ambient
conditions;
environment is
aggressive, renew at more
frequent intervals.
the nature of anchorage protections; Art. 95.3 in CCTG leaflet

65A.
In the current state of the
regulations, soluble oils used for
temporary protection are
SHELL Dromus B, CALTEX
soluble RGBF, MOBILOIL
Solvag 1535, ELF surelf A
(while waiting for publication of
a suitability list).
precautions at extreme temperatures;
that all reinforcement is protected.

3.2.- Inspections before grouting
CEMENT GROUT These grouts shall have a

technical approval (ATF) or a
temporary permission (APF)
according to circular No. 99-
54, August 20 1999.
check that the ATF or the APF exists; List of products
Publication by the LCPC
(formulators) and
(Central Public Works
applicators with
Laboratory).
the ATP or the
This list specifies the
ATF
applicator associated with each
formulator.
- Formulator
Available from EDS
and applicator
(specialized distribution
identification
contractor).
sheet
Check that there is a QAP specific to the site or

a grouting procedure and make sure that the
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 2/8 Datasheet No.IV-8: Protection products and cachetage
following elements are filled in:

resources in terms of qualified personnel
directed by a CMP (prestressing supervisor);
nature, quality, origin of components;
proportions by weight with tolerances; X The nominal composition is

submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
order in which products are introduced into

the mixer and mixing duration of the
components;
type of production, mixing and grouting
equipment;
general requirements for:
the equipment; Instructions for
use
- Technical
instructions for
prestressing
processes
- User's manual
production;
injection;
particular requirements when the concrete Weather Grouting is prohibited

temperature is less than 5C or when the when the concrete
ambient temperature exceeds a maximum of temperature drops
25C in the shade during the day; below 0C. During grouting in
the winter, it should be
checked that the temperature
cannot drop quickly before the
cement grout has set, even if
the ambient temperature at the
time of grouting is above 5C.
Mixers and maintenance

tanks must be protected
from rainwater and sun rays
(dehydratation phenomenon).
measures to be taken if the grout progress is

stopped;
inspections at the different grouting steps.
check that there is a grouting program (cable Cabling drawing

numbering system, grouting phase, etc.);
check that ducts have been blown through; Compressed air This very important
phase checks that there
is a free passage for the grout
to be injected.
Ducts shall not be flushed
Chapter IV: Prestressing steels 3/8 Datasheet No. IV-8: Protection products and cachetage
with water.
check the position and correct operation of the - Construction Locations of vents and purges
vents; drawings shall be mentioned.
- Compressed air
check leak tightness if specified by the contract, - Leak tightness PA
to determine any defects; test: vacuum test
- Air pressure Hold the pressure at about 5
test bar during one minute.
A pressure of 3 bar can be
used in special cases,
particularly for thin slabs.
Water pressure tests are
prohibited.
When risk of
communication between
a group of ducts exists , allow
for simultaneous grouting of
the group after agreement by
the Supervisor.
check storage of components: cement, Cement: storage in a dry
additives, drinking water; location, on pallets isolated
from the ground, under
tarpaulin or in a warehouse.
Additives: hydrosoluble
packs to be kept dry in
the original packaging box.
Drinking water: in case of
doubt, ask for an analysis
certificate (chloride, sulfate,
detergent).
check the identification, traceability and - Production date

expiration dates of the cement and the on cement bags
additives; - Production and
expiration date
on the cardboard
packaging for
hydrosoluble
additive doses
check that a suitability test has been carried out Done not sooner than
(equipment and grout); 24 hours before final
grouting, and is used to adjust
the water content under site
conditions as a function of
weather conditions and mainly
the ambient temperature and
the temperature of the
materials (water and cement).
It is done on a volume
corresponding to the mixer
capacity.
check types of production equipment used; Production
equipment:
identical to the
equipment
declared in the
technical
recommendation
check that standby equipment is present;
check the condition of grouting equipment
Verification or
(batching plant and grouting pump);
calibration report
for:
- water meter or
calibrated
production
batching plant
tank;
If the grouting point is far
- pump
from the pump, provide a
manometer
manometer at the cable entry.
Pumps shall be fitted with a
pressure switch, calibrated to
15 bar.
check that equipment necessary in case of Compressed air,
anomalies during grouting is present; Water under
pressure for
flushing if
necessary
check grout characteristics: EDS datasheet, X To check changes to the grout

suitability check characteristics with time
(fluidity, sweating).
fluidity, according to P18-358/NF EN 445 - Marsh cone,
Value of the fluidity during
and practical working time (DPU); 10 mm nozzle,
production between 13 and 25
sieve, 1 l
seconds.
receptacle
- Chronometer
- Vane tester
(thixotropic DPU: fluidity change with the
grouts only) time as a function of the cable
type (volume, length,
temperature, etc.).
outside and grout temperature; Thermometer
exudation at 3 and 24 h, 100 ml graduated

The exudation water quantity
according to P18-369/NF EN 445; test pieces,
at the grout surface kept at rest
closed after
for three hours must not
filling and during
exceed 2% of the volume of
the inspection
the grout, this water must be
completely reabsorbed after
24 h.
inclined tube, inclination 30. Transparent PVC
In the case of a
tube, inside favorable temporary
81 mm 2 mm recommendation, check that
and 5 m long the test in the inclined tube is
with caps, stop specified or that the EDS can
valve in the justify this test (same cement
lower part and batch).
purge valve in
the upper part
3.3.- Inspection during grouting
CEMENT GROUT
when starting:
check the fluidity with reference to the - EDS grouting
suitability test, adjustment of the formulation inspection sheet
(water) if necessary as a function of the - Marsh cone,
outside temperature 10 mm sieve Fluidity between 13 and 25
nozzle, 1 l seconds, fluidity less than 25
receptacle seconds for 30 minutes after
- Chronometer manufacturing.
during grouting:
check the outside temperature, the concrete Thermometer
and the grout temperatures;
fluidity during production (waiting tank); The difference between the
pouring time during
fluidity at the duct outlet, possibly at vents as
production and at the outlet
a function of the cable length;
shall be less than 4 seconds.
exudation; Less than or equal to 2%.
check the volume of the grout used per duct;
check the injection time per duct; Chronometer Ducts shall be grouted
continuously without
interruption for grout to be
produced.
check the vent outlet; Visual Evacuation of residual water in

the duct to obtain a "smooth"
consistency at the grout outlet,
for example usually 1 bucket
5 to 10 l to be evacuated.
check the grout pressure; Do not exceed 15 bar.
check the final pressure at 5 bar and hold for Chronometer

1 min.
3.4.- Inspection after grouting
fill in vents before and after cutting off; Visual
temporary caps if used; Visual at removal
non-destructive tests; Gammagraphy
4. For further information, please refer to

Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete Civil Engineering structures CCTG (General
Technical Clauses) leaflet 65A; Special leaflet No. 2000-3, March 2000;
Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete Civil Engineering structures Addition to CCTG
leaflet 65A. Special leaflet No. 2000-4, August 2000;
Technical recommendation for grouts for prestressing ducts. Circular No. 99-54, 20 August 1999. Special leaflet
99.11 of the Ministry of Development Official Bulletin
List of prestressing grout for which a technical recommendation has been issued (available from the CIP);
Grout for injection of prestressing grout. Information note in the "bridges" series No. 21 Stra/CTOA - Public
Works Technical Center -, July 1996, 8 p. ;
Identification sheet for formulator + applicator technical recommendations;
NF EN 445: Grout for prestressing cables Test methods;
NF EN 446: Grout for prestressing cables Grout injection procedures;
NF EN 447: Grout for prestressing cables Requirements for typical grouts;
P18-358: Additives for concretes, mortars and grouts Typical injection grout for prestressing Measurement of
the water reduction fluidity;
P18-359: Additives for concretes, mortars and grouts Typical injection grouts for prestressing Measurement of
sweating (stability).
Chapter V: Temporary works
Datasheet No. V-1

leak tightness to prevent losses of laitance that cause
local modifications to concrete properties
"Stability of formwork" To satisfy these needs, the formwork for bridge parts is
usually composed of three main elements:
a skin, the surface that will define the final

1. Purpose of this datasheet appearance of the concrete depending on its
nature(wood, steel plate, plastic, etc.);
This datasheet relates to stability and non-deformability
of temporary works designed for vertical formwork for a frame, designed to make the skin non-deformable;
the construction of concrete parts of bridges and their
accessories. a support, designed to hold the formwork system in
the shape and location defined in the design.
The stability of horizontal formwork elements is related
essentially to the resistance of shoring and falsework The different types of formwork used in bridges are as
that support them, therefore refer to datasheet No. V-3 follows:
"Shoring and Falsework".
1. conventional formwork: the skin is composed of
The case of sacrificial formwork is not considered, planed or unplanned planks, or plastic panels. The
either when it is impossible to remove the formwork frame is usually made of wood. Only the support
(from cavities that become inaccessible) or because that previously used to be made of wood is now
they form a non-visible part of the structure (for composed of metal props and joists.
example shuttering slabs or prefabricated fine surface
2. sectional formwork, broken down by nature of the
panels).
bridge elements:
form panels, plane formwork designed to create

2. Reminders
forms for walls approximately 2.50 m high; they are
The majority of formwork is held in place, shored or used in pairs and are connected to each other by
supported by temporary works that can be classified as recoverable or non-recoverable devices designed to
first or second category. The Contractor shall produce maintain their spacing. A working platform is
a design for these temporary works, and shall present usually included near the top and screw jacks or
documents necessary for their definition. Refer to adjustable struts are used to stabilize the form panel
datasheet No. V-3 "Shoring and Falsework", for more and fix it to the ground.
specific information about these most frequently horizontal forms, plane horizontal formwork for
encountered temporary works. making slabs. They are provided with jacks for
adjustment of their height and for stripping. A
These documents, that control the stability of width adjustment must enable precise application
formwork, shall be signed by the Temporary Works on the constructed vertical walls.
Supervisor (COP) If these temporary works are formwork tunnels, combining the above two types.
classified in the first category, the file shall also be They are provided with adjustments for making
verified by the Supervisor's design office or by his precise placement, easy stripping and removal. They
external inspection (see sheet No. V-3). are sometime composed of keyed elements that
improve flexibility during manipulations.
Formwork consists of temporary devices that formwork for beams, columns, ribs. This formwork
determine the shape and appearance of the surfaces, is derived from previous systems and are adapted to
although it does not form part of the structure. the special shapes of these structural elements.
Therefore, the qualities of this mold are imposed by the
Due to the lack of precision of construction means, it is
functions defined in article 53.1.1 in CCTG (General
impossible to make structures to their exact
Technical Clauses) leaflet 65A1, namely:
dimensions. Therefore, regulations have defined
stability and non-deformability; maximum and minimum limiting dimensions to be
respected. Intervals between these limits form the
the capability of being removed, possibly for reuse; geometric tolerances defined in article 101 in CCTG
leaflet 65A.
The stiffness and stability of the formwork under

applied mechanical actions must be such that the
finished dimensions of the structure and the above
mentioned geometric tolerances are respected.
Chapter V: Temporary works 1/5 Datasheet No.V-1: Stability of formwork
Displacement or even tipping of forms can occur due or unforeseeable actions due to the application of an
to predictable actions: accidental force:
thrust of fresh concrete* ; collision of a load during displacement of a crane or

a maneuvering vehicle;
wind action;
formwork opens under the concrete pressure
settlement, level differences or collapse of supports; (defective tightening rods or clamping jaws);
* Special attention should be paid to the current trend work by personnel on insufficiently supported
towards more fluid concretes (particularly "self- slender formwork;
placing" concretes, for which the physical
characteristics and the possibility of faster concreting etc.
can cause sufficiently higher thrusts than occur with
traditional concretes.

3.1.- Before starting the works
Nature of the work Comments
Check existence of reference

documentation
"Temporary works" QAP for formwork held Articles 55.2 and 55.3 in CCTG leaflet 65 A
in place by 1st category falsework or shoring.
For so-called standard formwork (sectional (Article 53.1.1 in CCTG leaflet 65 A)
formwork, see below)
justification by the Contractor of the strength

and stiffness of formwork framing;
otherwise, an assurance that it has been
verified
documents signed by the COP There are two natures of these documents:
1) the temporary works design, consisting of:

- their construction drawings;
- their manuals and installation and assembly instructions.
2) The delivery monitoring document for all materials and
equipment for use in temporary works, in application of article
44.1 in CCTG leaflet 65A.
usage and maintenance documents specifying Manufacturer's instructions provided to the Supervisor on the site,
conditions for use of sectional formwork including:
- a detailed description of all components;
- their assembly method and compatibility;
- their rules for use and for sizing.

Check conditions for temporary and Geometric characteristics (particularly the planeness) and leak
permanent storage of formwork elements tightness properties must not be adversely affected by irreversible
deformations.
3.2.- Placement of formwork

Make sure that requirements determined in advance and described in quality documents are actually applied.
Warning: The check on correct execution of operations related to actual placement includes a sequence of checks to
be carried out as the work to construct the formwork progresses. The inspector can thus correct unsatisfied
requirements in good time and issue the authorization to continue without undue haste. This can also simplify check
points so that the stop point before concreting can be cleared (See 3.3 below).
Nature of the work PA PC Comments
Access x
check good and safe access to the formwork and its Conformity with excavation drawings
stabilization systems
Reminder: The Contractor is responsible for
check stability of all vertical formwork x
the stability of form panels in all work phases
with a peak wind velocity of 85 km/h. At
higher speeds, he shall evacuate the immediate
vicinity of the form panel. Remember that the
peak wind speed of 72 km/h will make it
impossible to use tower cranes (standard NF
E52-081), which limits manipulation of form
panels on sites with tower cranes.
Stabilization by support trusses and back anchors

Check:
the number and spacing of support trusses;
placement of bracing recommended by the manufacturer;
blocking of trusses with anchorage by grouting into a part Conformity with drawings
of the structure already completed ("pad");
check that there are enough anchors in the concrete
and the inclination of the anchors, for each truss;
check that there is no concrete bursting;
check that the required concrete strength is reached.
blocking of trusses with anchorage by removable ballasts Conformity with drawings

(concrete blocks or beams).
See manufacturer's instructions to determine
Stabilization by counterweight the mass of the counterweight as a function of
usage conditions recommended by the
Contractor or imposed by the bridge
Check overall stability of horizontal formwork x See sheet No. V-3 "Shoring and Falsework"

Check the integrity of formwork x In agreement with the manufacturer's

specifications
Check:
that all components of industrial formwork have the

same origin (same manufacturer) and are compatible;
panel and frame clamping systems;
effective tensioning of tensioning devices, particularly at

bushings;
the tightness of connecting rods at corners;
in general, that all screw or rack systems are firmly

clamped;
locking of form panel adjustment props;
the compatibility of support trusses;
spacer devices between form panels; Their dimension shall always be slightly greater
than the theoretical value so as to achieve
perfect leak tightness when the formwork is
clamped and therefore to limit laitance losses
conformity of detailed drawings of holes in form panels; against the architectural design if there is one
that wedges under horizontal forms are put into place

correctly and firmly adjusted;
that all required bolts are in position, if splice plates are
used;
that the quality of architectonic accessories (corner rods,
built-in molding, etc.) is compatible with usage conditions
(crushing or deformation problems).
Safety devices
check methods of attachment and adjustment of x Conformity with drawings

walkways and handrails.
3.3.- Before concreting
STOP POINT
If the inspector made verifications as the formwork construction work progressed (see 3.2), the stop point consists of
paying special attention to operations that might have changed since his last inspection, and the Contractor taking
account of his comments.
Otherwise, the inspector shall perform all inspections mentioned in 3.2.
CLEARING THE STOP POINT - the participants sign the site monitoring sheet;
(with or without reserves or motivated refusal) - they produce an anomaly sheet if necessary.
Clearance of the stop point before concreting includes checks on the position of reinforcement described in the
corresponding datasheet, and also guarantees:
construction accuracy: measurement of the inside dimensions and the plan position and the height of the formwork;
verticality or the specified inclination;
horizontality or the slope of the soffit, including the planned camber;
correct placement of devices planned to achieve stability and non-deformability of the formwork.
4. Documents necessary for the Supervisor

CCTG leaflet 65A and its addendum Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete civil engineering
structures;
Contract CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses);
documentation leaflet P18-503: Concrete surfaces and skins Identification elements;
Formwork QAP and corresponding temporary works;
layout and formwork drawings for the contract;
layout and formwork drawings done by the Contractor;
construction procedure related to the construction of formwork.
monitoring and inspection sheets done by the Contractor.
5. Bibliography
The Supervisor can refer to the following documents:
Rules for conceptual and detailed design of wood structures. CB71 rules (and 1975 modification);
Eurocode 5 - Design of wood structures; Eurocode 5 ;
Rules for conceptual and detailed design of aluminum alloy structures. AL 76 rules;
Design and calculation of steel bridges and constructions. CCTG leaflet 61, CPC title V.

Datasheet No. V-2 Table 1

The different concrete surface
"Concrete surfaces" classes
CIB DTU 23 CCTG Leaflet

No.24 leaflet in doc.
65 A* P18-503
1. Purpose of this datasheet and general
elementa
This datasheet relates to the verification of all coarse 0
ry
operations related to fixing and stripping formwork for not
reinforced or prestressed concrete elements included
ordina
constructed on site. It also contains some important ordinary 1
ry
information about concreting and concrete vibration.
Refer to the datasheets on concreting for further fine
information. standard 2
simple
fine
An as-stripped surface of a concrete element is a fine extra fine 3
surface that will be seen after it has been completed
and / or that will be required to resist aggression from specia
worked
a defined environment. In most cases, these aesthetic l
fine
4
and durability aspects must be taken into account at the
design stage and throughout the construction period. * August 2000 version
Aesthetically, surfaces are classified as a function of There are particular specifications that must be
their color and texture characteristics, but without specified in the CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses)
neglecting shape characteristics. At the moment, there for each surface type, particularly describing the color
are several classifications based solely on aesthetic and the texture.
criteria, but they are not strictly equivalent (see table 1).

2.1.- Work preparation period
Warning: This section relates to operations to be carried out before the work phase itself, and therefore the
"MEMOAR" context. However, it was considered useful to summarize the essential steps for which the Supervisor is
responsible, knowing that during the works phase, in principle the inspector only needs to check that the quality
reference documents actually exist so that he can refer to them if necessary during the operations described in 2.2 to
2.5 in this datasheet.
Acceptance of reference documents

(quality documents)
CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses); Must contain information about:

- the different types of surfaces with
their associated specifications (color,
texture, shape), with reference to article
53 in CCTG (General Technical
Clauses) leaflet 65A and
documentation leaflet P18-503;
- methods of evaluating surface quality
(specifying who should do it, at what
concrete age, and how the evaluations
will be made and mentioning test and
lighting conditions that will be used to
check the specified quality levels);
Chapter V: Temporary works 1/6 Datasheet No.V-2 Concrete surfaces

- a decision making table related to

acceptance of the different types and
batches of surfaces.
Contractors QAP. X The analysis of the QAP must:

- enable the Supervisor to be sure that
the Contractor has the means necessary
to obtain the requested results;
- generally lead to a definition of
control concretes (shape, texture,
color) in cooperation with the
Contractor.
Check the feasibility of surface types tests X If the specifications are respected, the
starting from control concretes made by the control concrete is accepted and the
Contractor measured characteristics may be made
contractual (taking account of the
concrete age at the time of the
measurements). These characteristics
are made contractual and will be used
as a basis for progress on site.
Note that the control concrete itself

should not be used as a control during
the site duration, due to its change with
age.
If the specifications are not respected,

then a new control concrete should be
specified after modifying whatever
elements are considered to be
responsible.
Acceptance of vibration plans for the Drawings defining penetration points

different parts of the structure, after making of internal vibrators (poker), allowable
control concretes. depths and the vibration duration
taking account of the lifting time.
2.2.- Work before concreting
Check skills of the Contractor's personnel X The so-called skilled persons are the
persons who made the control
Check if the persons working on concreting
concrete deemed to be satisfactory.
are the same and have the same
responsibilities as the persons who worked
on making the control concretes

Verification of formwork: Visual X
overall geometry;
preparation of the formwork skin

(cleanliness and stripping agent);
leak tightness and stability of the forming
tool;
cleanliness of forming skins.
check treatment of joints that will make

adjacent forms leaktight
Check placement of the reinforcement Visual Note: The reinforcement cage was
cage in the formwork: previously examined (see datasheet
No. III-1).
cage position (packing); Packing shall be conforming with

cover thickness requirements, and shall
not "move" during concreting.
check that packing will enable pouring of the Pour path adapted for the passage of
concrete; the skip duct or the pumping pipe.
cleanliness of reinforcement;
In the special case of decks, make sure
that reinforcement rust cannot pollute
the forming surface.
Check availability of transport means Visual When concrete is pumped, unpriming

(sufficient number of ready mix trucks to of the pump will cause a long
avoid even short term procurement concreting stoppage and will require a
interruptions and adapted to pouring means) concrete construction joint with
harmful effects on the homogeneity of
the concrete in the part of the bridge.
Visual
Check pouring equipment According to the QAP.
operating condition;
number of items of equipment;
etc.
Visual
Check placement means According to the QAP.
availability of personnel who will use the

equipment;
sufficient personnel to use this equipment;
procurement of curing products if required;

perfect operating condition of concrete

compaction (vibration) equipment and
curing product placement equipment if used.
Check equipment provided for concrete Visual These requirements shall be suggested
protection when concreting in cold or hot by the Contractor in his QAP
weather (description of means and application
time).
perfect working condition;
installation of equipment.
2.3.- Work during concreting
Check that the concrete is uniform when If required by external inspection,

placed (making sure that concrete perform the tests required by its
acceptance tests done by the Contractor are laboratory.
done correctly)
Make sure that the following documents

designed to assure traceability of the
delivered concrete have actually been
supplied:
one copy of each delivery form and the

Delivery forms shall include
corresponding weighing forms
acceptance of the load by the
Contractor.
Check good distribution of concrete in the Increase the number of these checks
formwork during concreting of large bridge parts
(particularly long lengths).
Check the pouring process
(particularly at the beginning of concreting)
Check uniformity of compaction by For standard (not self-consolidating)

vibration and behavior of the concrete (no concretes, it is recommended that
segregation during vibration) there should be a vibration drawing
(see last paragraph in 2.1).
Check that maximum allowable concrete Maximum allowable heights shall be

heights in formwork are respected defined at the beginning of pouring
after examining possibilities dependent
on the reinforcement cage.
Check that pumping ducts or pipes pour

concrete under predefined conditions
throughout the pouring period

Check that the layer thicknesses are If specified in the CCTP. Make sure
properly respected that the defined average thickness is
respected with a tolerance of 10 cm,
provided that this complete layer is
correctly vibrated.
Check effective application of specified With reference to the QAP

measures when concreting in cold or hot Make sure that equipment is used
weather correctly.
2.4.- Formwork stripping
Make sure that the formwork is stripped X

within times and conditions fixed in
advance (usually in the QAP)
if a degree of curing has not been defined,

The Contractor can (or must
make sure that the Contractor respects the
depending on the CCTP) also provide
time fixed in advance as a function of
the analysis of mechanical information
ambient conditions
results.
The Supervisor's representative must

never take responsibility for stripping.
if a degree of curing has been defined cure

In general, these cure measurements
measurement
are made by the Contractor, the
Supervisor obviously reserving the
right to carry out his own verifications
(as part of his external inspection).
If a curing product is used, check that the

In accordance with the QAP.
curing product is applied correctly using the
Also make sure that the specified
planned process.
curing duration is achieved.
Check surface shape quality levels, with

X This verification can be done
reference to CCTG leaflet 65A, or CCTP
immediately after stripping, because
reference documents when they exist or some
the age of the "mature" concrete no
elements in the documentation leaflet P18-503
longer has any influence on these
made contractual in the CCTP. In this case, the
shape characteristics.
required quality levels shall be specified.

Check quality levels of surface textures X This verification can be done a few
with reference to the technical guide for days after stripping (this period may
appearance defects in concrete surfaces (LCPC vary depending on the season, from 2
(Central Public Works Laboratory) publication- days in the summer to about ten days
Paris 1991) in the winter).
If the CCTP mentions that some
defects will not be tolerated, the
severity of these defects shall be
evaluated considering the dangers that
they represent to durability (call in
specialists).
Check surface color quality levels with X These verifications must not be:
reference to: - made before the concrete surface has
dried (this may take up to 1 month,
CCTP reference documents that must fix the but shall never be less than 2 weeks);
color homogeneity and sometimes the color - done on wet surfaces (for example
itself with associated tolerances; after a shower) nor under direct
documentation leaflet P18-503 that contains exposure to sunlight (color differences
a color chart (for gray concretes only). minimized).
Note that the CCTG (leaflet 65A) does
not mention any usable specifications:
They should be mentioned in the
CCTP.
Call in specialists in case of doubt.
In general, it is recommended that

conditions for examination of surfaces
should be clearly defined (illumination,
concrete age and observation
distance).
2.5.- Precautions to be taken in case of repairs

If a surface is nonconforming with the contract specifications, the Contractor shall suggest repairs to the Supervisor for
approval (Stop point). The Supervisor shall evaluate the value of these proposals, considering the durability of the
proposed repair. This repair must not affect other parameters related to the appearance of surfaces. It is recommended
to call in a specialist to evaluate proposed solutions.

CCTG leaflet 65A A: Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete civil engineering structures
chapter 5 (August 2000);
documentation leaflet P18-503: Concrete surfaces and concrete elements Identification elements;
The technical guide for appearance defects on concrete surfaces. LCPC, 1991.

Datasheet No. V-3

measures taken with regard to any element that, if
it failed, would create a safety risk (creation of a
second safety level).
"Shoring and falsework"
The shoring and falsework design shall include all
elements necessary for their definition (see article 43 in
CCTG leaflet 65A):
construction drawings;
This datasheet relates to the placement of temporary manuals and instructions;
works called shoring and falsework for the
construction of concrete or steel parts of bridges and justifications (calculations or rules for use).
their accessories.
The justification for these temporary works must
These works are defined in chapter 4 in CCTG include degrees of safety corresponding to the degrees
(General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65A1. They do not of safety of final structures, particularly because the
include special equipment, service scaffolding or design loads are actually applied.
devices to provide protection against risks of falling
elements or equipment, as described in article 41.1 in
the CCTG leaflet mentioned above. For these justifications, appendix B to the CCTG
leaflet 65A has fixed the main rules to be followed,
since temporary works will make use of civil
2. Regulatory reminders engineering techniques.
Shoring and falsework are temporary works, and as

such can be classified as first or second category The commentary in article 43.1 in CCTG leaflet 65A
depending on their complexity, their risk level towards draws attention to important points that could
third parties and their quality. Falsework is always first endanger the stability of these structures:
category. This datasheet is produced for these first
category works, but may also be applicable to second foreseeable settlements of foundations on the
category works provided that the necessary ground, for which the Contractor is strongly
simplifications are made. encouraged to add to the data provided by the
Supervisor, if any;
The Contractor produces the plans for shoring and
falsework. The Temporary Works Supervisor (COP), measures to be taken with regard to risks of
external to the project, is appointed by the Contractor. instability;
He is recognized as being competent and accepted by
the Supervisor. He performs the internal design check determination of cambers as a function of expected
that he materializes by signing all relevant documents. deformations.
The Temporary Works Supervisor also acts as liaison, Specifications for equipment used (special equipment
as defined in article 42.1 in CCTG leaflet 65A. or equipment from a third party manufacturer),
including particularly design notes, test reports,
The Contractor's Quality Assurance Plan must define certificate of conformity, are included in documents
instructions for the following, for first category making up the project.
falsework and shoring (see article 42.2 in CCTG leaflet
65A):
All these documents shall be signed or countersigned
their construction and use (assembly, adjustment, by the temporary works supervisor before the
loading, displacement, disassembly and conditions temporary works are started.
for reuse);
the use of any equipment applying an action on The Particular Safety and Health Protection Plan
them or the structure to be constructed in the (PPSPS) produced by each Contractor responsible for
temporary phase (site machinery, material storage, installation of formwork and shoring, shall contain the
etc.); following for the purposes of the risk study:
the methodology for placement of temporary works,

their rotation and the allowable height of fresh
1 August 2000 edition concrete;
Chapter V: Temporary works 1/9 Datasheet No.V-3: Shoring and falsework
handling means; the steel grade and the mechanical properties of

means of stabilizing formwork and shoring the tube;
sensitive to overturning; a sketch showing the functional dimensions for
means of prevention against risks exported or placement;
imported by Contractors working simultaneously. the weight of the prop (manual handling capacity);
a working loads table, in the form of nomograms
3. Equipment or tables;
the nature and extent of the anti-corrosion
protection.
3.1.- Shoring
3.1.1.2.- Usage conditions
Various shoring equipment is used on site, and the
conditions under which the shoring is used should be A technical recommendation from the Ministry of
known. Employment and Solidarity (M.E.S.), issued in the
official journal. on May 14 2000, fixes the partial safety
3.1.1.- Adjustable telescopic steel props factor for steel props at F x M = 1.5 x 1.1 = 1.65,
(standard NF EN 1065) which gives a working load = Ry,k / 1.65
These single acting props are composed of two tubes,
one sliding in the other, the length of which can be 3.1.2.- Double acting telescopic props
adjusted to a precise dimension and blocked by an (standard NF P93-320)
appropriate system (usually by pins). Each end of the Some shoring requires props that can indifferently
prop is fitted with a sole plate, that can be fitted with resist axial compression and tension forces, particularly
various accessories, the most frequent of which are for stabilization of large vertical forms.
forks or horizontal form heads. The props can only
transmit axial compression loads; they may have a 3.1.2.1.- Marking
bottom or top jack, coupling or slot.
As for single acting props: see 3.1.1.1.
Tripods are frequently associated with these props.
These accessories cannot resist vertical forces, and 3.1.2.2.- Usage conditions
must be used only to support and position the prop
during its installation. They must never be used as The technical recommendation of the MES, already
stabilizers for shoring under horizontal forces. mentioned, is also applicable to these devices: see
3.1.1.2.
Manufacturers offer a "Prop tower" accessory to
overcome the risk of overturning with this type of 3.1.3.- Props for high vertical loads
shoring, that includes 2 by 2 or 4 by 4 props, to form a (called "Civil engineering props")
stable assembly. These "Prop towers" must be braced These steel or light alloy props have a cross-section
in the vertical plane and in the horizontal plane, and the composed of members composed of sections joined
connection between the frame and the props must be together by a lattice. They are composed of
firmly fixed. superposable elements that can be more than 10 meters
high and transmit loads of several hundred kN.
3.1.1.1.- Marking
Their top and bottom are provided with a large
Props shall include marking containing the following diameter screw jack installed on a ball joint to
information: compensate for the eccentricity of supported loads.
They cannot be put into place manually due to their
EN 1065;
size and their weight.
the name and trademark of the manufacturer;
the year of manufacturing with two digits;
the classification (to determine the characteristic
nominal strength Ry,k for the different developed 3.1.3.1.- Marking
lengths of a prop with reference to standard NF
EN 1065); These props are not covered by a standard, and an NF
certification is not possible for them.
the inspection level.
The technical sheet adds to characteristics
indicated in the marking, giving:
the NF stamp and possibly NF "Adjustable metal

props resisting compression" certified products;
3.1.3.2.- Usage conditions 2) Falsework
These props are delivered with an allowable working Falsework is composed of temporary structures that
loads table, usually presented in the form of a support a set of construction loads that they transmit
nomogram as a function of the developed length. to the ground through a limited number of supports.
3.1.4.- Shoring towers We will only consider the most frequent types in this
(standard NF P93-550) description:
This type of shoring is frequently used on bridge sites, so-called fixed falsework supported on
especially to support platforms at high elevation and intermediate support points usually composed of
heavy loads. The fact that they make it easy to achieve shoring towers;
road or railway gauges is an additional benefit. It is in so-called dropped-end falsework with lateral
fact a prefabricated internally stable shoring system in supports, that releases all the entire space between
which the manu-portable elements become self-locking supports;
when assembled. The general displacement is then so-called triangle falsework composed essentially of
made using a crane, or by dragging (usually on rollers). steel tubes, the loads of which are applied directly
The bearing capacity of a post may be increased by to bearing points.
adding columns on one or several faces.
Falsework may be made of wood, and is more and
A terminal sliding element can be used to adjust the more frequently standard equipment, composed of
height within a few centimeters. A jack or other system triangulated articulated steel elements. In this case, the
(depending on the manufacturer) enables fine horizontal thrust is resisted by tensioners.
adjustment. Telescoping is sometimes possible
(removal of the form falsework without disassembly).
Nature of the work Means PC PA Comments
Check that reference documentation exists X

(quality documents)
"Temporary works" QAP, Critical X
Article 42.2 in CCTG leaflet 65 A
including: examination
instructions about the construction and
use of temporary structures;
list of equipment applying an action on
temporary structures or on the final
structure in the temporary phase;
elements which could create an important
safety risk if they fail.
Temporary works project: Specifications for the equipment
Critical X
Justification by the Contractor of the strength examination used and justifications corresponding
and stiffness of the temporary works under the to this equipment (design notes, test
effect of loads from the part of the structure to reports, certificate of conformity).
be built, work overloads and predictable Make sure that all documents have been
accidental overloads. signed by the temporary works supervisor
There are two natures of these documents:

the temporary works project, that
includes:
construction drawings;
design notes;
manuals and instructions for use and

assembly.
the delivery monitoring document for
all materials and equipment that will be
used in temporary works, in
application of article 44.1 in CCTG
leaflet A.
Opinion of X Documents for the 1st category temporary
the external works project must be signed based on an
inspection argumented opinion by the external
office inspection.
Manufacturer's Technical documentation Analysis X The manufacturer's manual, provided to

(Users and maintenance instructions, and the Supervisor on the site, includes:
conditions of use of cross-linked systems) information
a detailed description of all
components;
their assembly method and
compatibility;
rules for use and sizing.
Measures taken in the QAP to guarantee a
second safety level must be validated by
the external inspection office.
Construction assembly and disassembly Critical X Check that the description of means,
procedures examination supplies, operating methods, inspections
and all aspects related to conditions
specific to the site have been properly
considered. If necessary, to be clarified by
the Contractor.
Check conformity of equipment Visual X

and usage conditions
Marking of adjustable telescopic steel
The following information must be
props
indicated:
EN 1065;
the name and trademark of the
manufacturer;
the year of manufacturing with two
digits;
the classification, so that the
characteristic nominal strength Ry,k
can be known by reference to standard
NF EN 1065, for different developed
prop lengths;
the inspection level.
Obsolescence of equipment if applicable Correspondence with obsolescence of
equipment used in the calculations (see art.
4 in Appendix B in the above-mentioned
leaflet).

Check topometric data Compilat X To be done as soon as the temporary

ion works design is produced.
Reminder: The location of marks to be
produced for monitoring the settlement of
shoring and deformations of falsework
shall be done by the Contractor.
Check on the quality and homogeneity of Tests X To be compared with foundation

the ground on which the temporary works loads specified in design notes to be
will be supported. produced by the Contractor. If there is any
doubt about the real soil quality, perform
load bearing tests before starting the
construction of the temporary works
(dynamic penetrometer or plate test) to
clear the stop point.
4.2.- Placing temporary works

The first step is to make sure that requirements defined in advance and described in the quality and other documents
above are actually applied, and also to make sure that standard practice is respected in terms of construction
requirements.
Warning: the check on correct execution of operations related to placement itself comprises a series of inspections to
be carried out as the construction work for the temporary works progresses. The inspector can thus correct any
incorrect measures in good time and can give the authorization to continue without undue haste. This can also help to
simplify inspection points necessary to clear the stop point before putting into service (see 4.3 below).
Check conformity of equipment used and Visual X Agreement with drawing specifications
assembly tolerances assumed in the and design notes produced by the
calculations Contractor or conformity with the
technical document issued by the
manufacturer.
All components of industrial shoring shall

have the same origin (same manufacturer)
and shall be compatible.
Check part appearance:

Specified parts shall not be replaced by
other parts that function differently.
check that there are no distorted then

straightened metal parts, or highly
corroded parts;
make sure that wood parts with any traces
of significant lesions (cracks, burns, etc.)
have been put aside.

Check packing:
no softwood packing or wedges or thin No thick packing and even worse no

plywood packing; stacks of packing
no packing unsuitable for its function. Bricks or hollow concrete blocks, for
example
Check fasteners:
no metal parts in direct contact without

clamping;
periodic check that all bolts assembling
wood parts are perfectly tight.
Check jacking:
jack extension too long;
no guidance of the jack screw;
excessive projection of prop or tower fixing

jack screws.
Check assemblies:
no centering defect;
low part bearing capacity;
parts placed on edge and with insufficient

spacers;
prop pins "not done professionally"; Replaced by a reinforced concrete bar for
example
no superposition of props;
prop verticality defect;
"bayonet load path problem, badly centered

or badly distributed;
no flimsy unbraced supports;
insufficient tube connection collars. Particularly in reinforcement for shoring

towers
Measurem X
Check geometric construction conditions
ent
instrument
s
respect the gauge; Particularly when shoring supports

scaffolding above a lane in service. This
gauge is applicable in height and in width,
including any clearances and should be
evaluated at the worst point and in the
worst phase of the operations. The
minimum gauge point must be clearly
indicated on the temporary works
drawings.
compatibility with the quality of surfaces; Fine or high quality surfaces shall
not be used as a support point for
falsework and shoring.
possible falsework removal practices on

rivers or traffic lanes (rail, road or navigable
water course).
Check access X Conformity with the drawings
Check that access to falsework, shoring and

support points is possible in complete safety
Check the overall stability of the vertical Inspection X Conformity with the drawings,
temporary works assumptions and design notes and
assembly instructions or special
procedures
No parts, or low strength parts
designed to maintain stability can cause a
catastrophe
Check:
the number and spacing of support posts;

Conformity with drawings
placement of walings in three-dimensions;

As recommended by the manufacturer or
taken into account by the design note
make sure that the preparation and nature

Risks of settlement, collapse or
of the foundation soil is sufficient to resist
erosion if supported on insufficiently
loads at the bottom;
strong soil
make sure that the number of soil support

Risks of erosion of sand packing by
points and their load bearing conditions are
runoff water (to be protected by
sufficient;
mortar finish)
check continuity between the support point

and the support soil.
Check overall stability of horizontal works Inspection X

(falsework)
Check:
in general, that every screw or bracket

system is firmly clamped;
that wedges are put into place correctly and
firmly adjusted;
that all planned bolts are actually in place, if
splice plates are used.
Check safety devices Inspection X
Check methods of placement and Conformity with drawings

adjustment of walkways and baseboards and
handrails for these walkways

STOP POINT
If the inspector made verifications as the formwork construction work progressed (see 4.2), the stop point consists
of:
checking that the Contractor has taken account of the inspectors comments made in previous inspections;
paying special attention to operations that might have affected parts since his last inspection.
Otherwise, the inspector shall perform all inspections mentioned in 4.2.
ESSENTIAL STOP POINT. - the participants sign the site monitoring sheet;
(with or without reserves or motivated refusal)
- they produce an anomaly sheet if necessary.
Clearance of the stop point before concreting includes checks on:
conformity with design documents and the manufacturer's recommendations;

construction accuracy: measurement of the dimensions and the plan position and the height of the temporary
works;
geometry of the soffit, including the planned camber;
correct placement of devices planned to achieve stability and non-deformability of the temporary works;
conformity of safety devices associated with them.
4.4.- During concreting
Pay special attention to:
abnormal deformations of falsework; It will then be useful to make

measurements, either from benchmarks
initiating sliding of large span flexible Visual under installed according to the contract or by
beams; the structure recording height variations between a
fixed mark under the falsework and
another mark fixed on the ground.
Inform the Supervisor immediately if

values fixed in the regulations or values
fixed in the CCTP are exceeded.
observed prop settlements;
conditions for placement of concrete. Conformity with concreting and design

procedures for temporary works.
In particular, make sure that there will be

no unexpected forces such as local
overloads due to the delivery of concrete
or any other eccentricity due to unplanned
loads, or horizontal forces due to
concreting by pump if the props are not
braced.

4-5.- Before falsework removal
STOP POINT
There will usually be a stop point before falsework removal.
CLEARING THE STOP POINT - the participants sign the site monitoring sheet;
( with or without reserves or motivated refusal)
- they produce an anomaly sheet if necessary.
Clearance of the stop point before falswework removal includes:

the minimum strength of the part of the structure for which the falsework is removed must be obtained;
agreement on the procedure proposed by the Contractor for removal of falsework and shoring.
4.6.- Disassembly of shoring and falsework

Shoring and falsework are disassembled after the same waiting times as those fixed for formwork stripping.
Disassembly is done under the control of the temporary works supervisor in the order predefined in the disassembly
instructions.
The inspector shall not accept premature removal. These operations must take place smoothly, avoiding any fast
method that could cause accidental shocks on the structure of the bridge to be built.

Apart from the regulatory texts, standards and working documents mentioned above, the reader could refer to the
following documents:
Design rules for steel constructions. CM 66 rules;

Rules for the calculation and design for wood structures; CB 71 rules, June1984;
Rules defining snow and wind effects on structures. NV 99 rules;
Eurocode 3 DAN - Design of steel structures; Eurocode 3 ;
Eurocode 5 - Design of wood structures
Rules for conceptual and detailed design of aluminum alloy structures. AL 76 rules;
Design and calculation of steel bridges and constructions Leaflet 61, Common requirements specification title V;
Standard NF P93-322: Site equipment Prefabricated joists for shoring and formwork.

Chapter VI: Prefabrication
Datasheet No. VI-1

"Prefabrication in the
factory"

This datasheet relates to inspection of the
construction of elements or parts of bridges
prefabricated in the factory, such as:
Prefabricated beams (Photo G. Forquet Stra)
non load bearing reinforced concrete elements:
cornice, prefabricated skin panels.
load bearing reinforced concrete elements:

beams, slabs, frames, arches, wall elements,
shuttering floor slabs, etc.
load bearing prestressed concrete elements:

beams, bridge parts, etc.
2. Reminders
The prefabrication company is usually a supplier or
a subcontractor of the main Contractor who is
doing the work.
Prefabricated fascia elements
Special arrangements shall be taken for site (photo Stra/CTOA[YM1])
monitoring due to:
the distance from the site;
the industrial aspect of production (series

production);
more severe performance and quality assurance

requirements for the bridge context than are
normally the case for buildings and utilities;
concomitance of various techniques requiring a

qualified personnel (reinforcement, prestressing
concreting and possibly heat curing);
the risk of insufficient involvement of the main Transport of prefabricated elements by railway
Contractor, in the quality of elements (photo Stra/CTOA)
prefabricated on the production site.

Warning: This section relates to operations to be done before the work phase itself and therefore the "MEMOAR"
framework. However, it has been considered useful to mention the essential steps to be done by the Supervisor,
knowing that in principle during the works phase, the inspector only needs to check that quality reference documents
exist so that he can refer to them during operations described in 3.2 and 3.3 in this datasheet if necessary.
Chapter VI: Prefabrication in the factory 1/5 Datasheet No.VI-1: Prefabrication in the factory
Check that the installations and the QAP at Audit type X Refer to a specialist in the LPC
the plant satisfy the requirements of the inspection of (Public works laboratory) network
bridge QAP the
prefabrication
site
Pay special attention to the following during the site
visit:
studies on formulation of proposed concretes X Performances of concrete

and suitability tests; formulas
materials used in production of concretes; Delivery X

forms
production and placement equipment; X
reinforcement (bending)
formwork (condition of molds)
constituent proportioning equipment Calibration

certificates
tensioning jacks and manometers Calibration

certificates
internal and external vibration means

production cycle (heat curing)
handling and storage conditions for finished

products;
internal inspection organization; X Who does what?
Who fills in the monitoring sheets?
Monitoring sheets must include
the following elements:
conformity of reinforcement
(geometry, position, respect of
coating thicknesses, packing
system);
early concrete strength;
inspection of elements after

stripping (finished surface defects);
definition of pre-acceptance
methods for elements in factory.
methods of treatment of non-conformities. X Prohibition to work on defects
without prior agreement
(signed repair procedure)
Have the Supervisor sign the QAP or sign it X

yourself if you have a signature delegation
Define the external inspection Frequency and type of work (by

(call in a specialist in the LPC network) default but depending on the
The inspection shall be adapted as a function of importance of the site), it would be
the references of the prefabrication plant, desirable to do one external

particular techniques for the bridge, the inspection operation per week of
prefabrication cycle and the number of parts to fabrication).
be prefabricated. The inspection is usually done It includes:
by the competent LRPC (Regional Public works check on the internal
laboratory) in the region. inspection;
inspection action (domain,
concrete, steel, prestressing,
heat curing);
check on finished elements;
treatment of nonconformities.
Check that signed construction drawings X

are available in the plant
3.2.- During production

Make sure that the predetermined measures described in the QAP are actually applied and can provide the required
quality.
Refer to the corresponding datasheets for typical inspections on concrete and steel.
Before concreting
condition of formwork; X Appearance, leak tightness,

stiffness, etc.
bending and placement of reinforcement; X Respect of the reinforcing

drawing: diameter, cover, packing,
projecting bars, inserts, lifting and
handling devices
tensioning of prestressing reinforcement. Jacks X Measurements of elongations and

Manometers prestressing forces
During concreting: special monitoring of

concrete production and the heat curing
cycle
check conformity of the formula input in the X Respect the nominal formula
logic controller;
check fabrication parameters and traceability Record X - Respect proportioning of
(recording constituent weights) and the proportions, constituents (cement, aggregates,
characteristics of fresh concrete; recording admixtures, additives, etc.) and the
wattmeter, effective water/cement ratio, etc.
slump cone,
- Respect the mixing time;
etc.
Respect consistency;
- Respect the air content.
check vibration means (internal or external); X Number and position of vibrators

check the heat curing cycle; X Examine temperature curves:
temperature rise curve, maximum
temperature and duration of the
plateau (influence on mechanical
strengths of concretes and
durability of elements with risk of
sulfate attack)
(Call in a specialist in the LPC
network)
check conformity of the concrete strength. Test pieces on X

heat-cured
concrete and
non-heat-cured
concrete
After concreting: monitoring of

prestressing by pre-tensioning
check concrete strength before releasing the Information X

reinforcement; test pieces or
maturometry
check prestressing forces. Manometer X Elongation and wire retraction

Weighing measurements
machines if any
3.3.- After production

The objective is to assure that the measures defined in advance and described in the QAP for acceptance of elements
are actually applied.
Preliminary acceptance of elements on the X

storage area
Check storage conditions; X Packing
check marking of elements; Visual Particularly including the date of

production
dimensional and appearance checks; X Deformations, cracks
measurement of camber; X For beams
check integrity of elements before transport; X No repair before prior agreement

(makeup or more important repair)
validation of the internal inspection file and X Submit production monitoring and
take account of external inspection tests. acceptance sheets for finished
elements
Final acceptance of elements on site

check storage conditions; X - Packing and bracing;
- Number of stacked elements;
- Protection of finished surfaces.
check integrity of elements after transport. X No repair before prior agreement
(makeup or more important repair)
4. Documents to be supplied to the Supervisor

"Prefabrication in factory" Quality Assurance Plan and internal inspection file;
Concrete production forms;
Production monitoring sheet;
Non-conformity sheet, possibly with treatment (corrective actions);
Finished elements monitoring sheets.

CCTG (General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65 A1 (chapter 8) and its addenda (chapters 3, 4, 5 and 6);
Standard NF EN 13369 (P19-800): Common rules for concrete prefabricated products;
Standard XP P18-305 (replaced by NF EN 206-1 in April 2004: Concrete Specification, performances,

production and conformity);
List of batching plants accepted for the NF - BPE mark (downloadable from the http://www.marque-nf.com site);
List of admixtures for concrete accepted for the NF mark Admixtures for concrete, mortars and grout;
List of hydraulic binders accepted for the NF mark Hydraulic binders (downloadable from the
http://www.marque-nf.com site);
CIMBETON technical datasheets (http://www.infociments.fr/ site).
Chapter VII: Concreting
Datasheet No. VII-1

"Concrete mix
design and suitability survey"

The Contractor is responsible for the concrete mix design, therefore the purpose of this datasheet is limited to the
validation of the concrete mix design. It comprises two steps, namely acceptance of the formula after verification of
the design file, and validation of production suitability.
Apart from standard characteristics (28-day strength, nature and content of binder, consistency, etc.), bridge
concretes need to have a number of complementary properties depending on their function, as defined in contract
documents (CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses), particular QAP, etc.). These documents describe the behavior in
the fresh state (maintenance of rheology, lack of segregation and bleeding) and in the hardened state (early strength,
durability, aesthetic quality of surfaces, alkali reaction, etc.).
This datasheet does not deal with all special concretes such as self-consolidating concretes (SCC), fibrous concretes,
lightweight concretes and heavy concretes.

2.1.- Design file
Check of the concrete design file for acceptance This phase requires special
of the concrete formula skills and is often done by a
specialist in the LPC (Public
Works laboratory) network
For long term sites, it is a

good idea to adapt the basic
formula as a function of
weather variations
It is often useful to have a

cement-additive compatibility
study to evaluate the
justification for the proposed
formula
Chapter VII : Concreting 1/4 Datasheet VII-1 : Concrete mix design and suitability survey
If there are no references for the concrete, refer to In this case, provide for
the CCTP and check : design tests
(see art. 75.2B in CCTG -
General Technical
clauses - leaflet 65 A)
mechanical strengths ;
workability (rheology) and its variation in time
(practical working time or DPU) ;
the maximum size of aggregates (limitation due
to the density of reinforcement and cover) ;
the cement type and class ;
that the minimum cement content is respected
(CCTG leaflet 65 A) ;
that the W/C ratio is respected CCTG leaflet 65
A;
the yield of the formula (formula given for 1 m3
placed).
if there are references for the concrete, check :
that there are enough references and that the
results are suitable ;
that no parameters have changed (constituent
characteristics, etc.) ;
that the previous works were similar to the case
to be treated.
Additional inspections
The following additional characteristics should be
checked for particular or exceptional work :
limitation of the heat of hydration of concrete
(risks of cracking due to heat and internal sulfate
reaction) ;
qualification of the formula to prevent the alkali This inspection shall be
reaction ; done systematically in all
cases
limitation of endogenic and drying shrinkage ;
resistance to frost or to frost and thaw ;
creep ;
durability according to durability indicators
applicable
2.2.- Fabrication suitability tests (art 76 in CCTG (General Technical Clauses)

leaflet 65 A)
Make sure that the predetermined measures described mainly in the design file and the suitability program
(produced by the Contractor) are actually applied to achieve the required quality. The Contractor must be present at
the time of these tests.
Check on the suitability program
Check that :
The Contractor must justify
the target workability and the DPU (practical
that the rheology of the
working time) are clearly specified ;
concrete chosen and the
DPU are actually adapted to
the placement method
adopted
For transport by a ready mix

the number and volume of mixes are sufficient ;
truck, the volume of
fabricated concrete must be
at least half the transported
volume
Provide for making the

complementary characteristics shall be verified,
corresponding test pieces
if there are any (frost, durability, etc.) ;
the entire placement equipment shall be used

(pump, skip with duct, concreting chute, etc.) ;
when there is a control element, it shall be
designed so as to represent the most difficult
placement problems.
Check suitability tests X See the placement datasheet
for suitability of placement
Check :
Concrete workability ;
monitoring of the rheology of fresh concrete in

If necessary, check the
time (DPU) ;
entrapped air content
smooth operation of test pieces production
(*) in practice 7 and 28 days,
operations : measure compression strengths (*),
28-day results must be known
test pieces for durability tests (**) and possibly
and conforming before
control element.
fabrication of the concrete
(**) durability tests can last
for several months. Therefore
it is important to perform
these tests at an appropriate
time near the beginning of
the construction work
2.3.- Validation of the concrete file

This file includes concrete design and results obtained during suitability tests.
Validate the interpretation according to CCTG X Refer to the current texts

leaflet 65 A (chapter 7), of the consistency and (see bibliography)
mechanical strengths obtained, and possibly
durability indicators or complementary
characteristics
PA : Stop point PC : Critical point
CLEARING THE STOP POINT
Check all concrete characteristics are conforming with the CCTP and CCTG. Check compatibility of the
rheological behavior of the concrete and placement methods (call upon a concrete specialist from the LPC
network).
design and suitability program file ;

concrete file (results of design tests and suitability tests).
3. For further information refer to :
CCTG leaflet 65A : Construction of reinforced concrete or post-tensioned prestressed concrete Civil
Engineering structures (August 2000) - chapter 7 "Concretes and mortars" ;
standard XP P18-305 (replaced by NF EN 206-1 in 2004) (see national foreword to NF EN 206-1 : Concrete -
Part 1 : specification, performances, production and conformity) ;Les Techniques de l'Ingnieur (technical
documentation) ;
microstructural characteristics and properties related to the durability of concrete. Test methods No. 58. LCPC,
February 2002, 87 p. ;
concretes bases and data for concrete mix design (Published by ed. Eyrolles) ;
concrete durability (Published by Presses de lcole nationale des ponts et chausses) ;
internet sites : www.cimbeton.asso.fr, www.marque-nf.com.
Datasheet No. VII-2

Production in a batching plant and transport by ready-
mix truck are done by the concrete supplier, while the
Civil Engineering Contractor is responsible for
"Production of concrete in acceptance of the concrete on site.
plant
Transport and acceptance
on site"
generalities
This datasheet applies to production of concrete in
ready- mix concrete plant (BPE) or in an on-site
batching plant, and transport and acceptance before
placement.
Remember that concrete production is a difficult

phase. The objective is to mix constituents (cement, Note : the special case of prefabrication is not
aggregates, water, additives) with very different discussed in this datasheet, although the main
characteristics so as to obtain a uniform mix with a requirements are the same (see datasheet No. VI-1).
rheology in accordance with specifications.
Important points to be examined

(call upon a specialist in the LPC network)

Check that the particular QAP exists (concrete X

mix design, production and transport of concrete)
Check that the QAP is actually signed (after analysis All batching plants must be
according to datasheet No. I-1). registered to the NF-BPE mark.
If there is no NF ready mix
batching plant close to the site,
the particular procedure must be
applied (requirements in the
NF 033 mark regulations).
In addition to the main batching plant, a backup One arrangement consists of

plant and possibly a standby batching plant shall be producing all concrete necessary
recommended unless special arrangements. before starting placement.
If formulas do not have any relevant references, Article 75.2 in CCTG (General
design tests shall be carried out on them, followed Technical Clauses) leaflet 65 A.
by suitability tests in the batching plant, for all ready Caution, even if the formulas
mix batching plants identified in the QAP. have references, they must be
studied in the suitability test.
Chapter VII : Concreting 1/5 Datasheet No. VII-2 : Production of concrete in plant
Guide for construction on bridges MEMOAR Collection of technical datasheets}
Inspection of the batching plant (prior to X This inspection (that is not related to
concreting) approval of the batching plant) may
be done during the concrete
production suitability test
check that all constituents are actually
Do not forget that the standby
procured in sufficient quantities on all
batching plant must be notified
batching plants that might deliver to the site ;
about concreting dates
check that formulas are input in logic
This check is done using the product
controllers and more generally that storage,
datasheets
production and quality control provisions are
conforming with the QAP ;
check the number and condition of ready mix
trucks ;
check that registers have been filled in for
previous days ;
if required, make a brief inspection of the test
laboratory ;
check special measures taken for concreting in
hot or cold weather.
Check characteristics and storage

conditions of materials
material characteristics shall comply with the
QAP ;
in particular, storage equipment shall prevent
any risk of pollution or mixing of materials.
aggregates Visual This check is done on the "primary"
and "secondary" storages
For each aggregate class, check
identification and lack of pollution or
mixing.
binders
Cements are stored in independent
Check that there is an identification plate silos (one cement quality per silo)
and a safety system ("foolproofing" or
other safety system) on each riser.
additives
Check storage conditions (room) ; visual and
These operations are done using
thermometer if
additive product datasheets and
particular
batching plant procedures
storage
requirements
Check that the NF label is present on each drum

Note that viscosity agents (used for
or tank, with the limiting usage date and presence
ready mix concrete) are not covered
of a container locking device, and an additive
by a NF mark right of usage
mixing device if necessary.
Chapter VII: Concreting 2/5 Datasheet No. VII-2: Production of concrete in plant
mixing water The water used may originate from

In all cases, check that the water used is conforming the drinking water network or a
with water specified in the QAP. well or a recycling system ; also
check on concrete delivery forms
if the water type is clearly
identified.
Check the production equipment
proportioning equipment
Check the date on which all weighscales were Visual Weighscales shall be checked once
verified (on stamp or calibration certificate) ; every year by an authorized
organization
Check that volume proportioners have actually been Additive volume proportioners
inspected (inspection documents). shall be checked once every month
the mixer
Check that all blades are present, the condition of Visual Any concrete present in the mixer
the lining and absence of a residual concrete ring in after emptying may require a
the mixer after the mixer has been emptied ; simple adjustment of the blade or
replacement of the blades and/or
lining.
Also make sure that the mixer is leak tight.
Production assistance equipments Check that these instruments are

monitored and calibrated regularly
Check operation of sensors to determine the water Visual in inspection documents, or if
content in sand ; there is any doubt, do a test by
drying a sample
Check operation of the recording wattmeter Visual
(working condition).
2.2.- During production and transport

(call upon a specialist from the LPC (Public Works Laboratory) network)
The objective is to make sure that predetermined requirements described in the QAP and PE (construction:working
procedures) are actually applied, and are sufficient to achieve the required quality.
Monitoring of production in the batching plant X Production monitoring is done

particularly at the beginning of
concreting
check conformity of the formula input into the

logic controller ;
check production parameters (hygrometry of The mixing time must be
aggregates, mixing time). sufficient to reach the wattmeter
stabilization level
Check transport means X
check the condition and operation of mixing Transport is done by a ready-mix

drums (blades, tank rotation speed slow for truck (drum) to maintain
transport, fast before unloading -) and the uniformity of the concrete
condition of water meters) ;
check the concrete transport time (from Wash drums and complete
beginning of production to end of unloading), emptying before loading
that must remain close to the time specified in Addition of water prohibited
the suitability test. after loading concrete
2.3.- Acceptance inspections
Concrete acceptance on site X Unless special arrangement,

additives may not be added into
The Civil Engineering Contractor is responsible for the drum ; however, if this is
acceptance of concrete on site. necessary, refer to the
preliminary survey provided in
check that the nature and frequency of the QAP
inspections as described in the "concrete
placement" procedure are applied
Check delivery and weighing vouchers X
identify the formula ; Formula number

conforming with the
construction procedure
check the nature of all components ;
check E/C ratios ; W (effective) /C
check values of water corrections in the The regulation for the

batching plant ; NF 033 mark gives a
maximum range of 20
liters of water per cubic
meter, respecting the
W/C. This correction is
used to compensate for
uncertainties of the
water content in
aggregates
check that proportion tolerances are respected
(NF EN 206-1) ;
check the production start time and the Concrete age at 20C
transport time, to determine the concrete age. < 2 hours (if no special
measures are taken)
Check the Cmin (minimum cement content) on
the average content
Check that fresh concrete characteristics are

X
conforming ;
make sure that the inspection equipment is Standard equipment includes the
present and in good condition, operator slump cone and the spreading
qualifications, and that operating methods and table
inspection frequencies are respected ;
fresh concrete consistency ; slump Measured values conforming
spreading with the specifications. These
tests are carried out at the
frequency defined in the QAP
entrapped air content (if special requirement). concrete air Measured values conforming
meter with the specifications at the
beginning of concreting
"Concrete mix design, Production and transport of concrete" Quality Assurance Plan ;
"Placement of concrete" Construction Procedure for each part of the structure ;
concrete delivery vouchers (weighing vouchers necessarily included) ;
concreting monitoring datasheet ;
nonconformity sheets if any.
CCTG leaflet 65A : Construction of reinforced concrete or post-tensioned prestressed concrete Civil Engineering
structures (August 2000) art. 73 ;
standard XP P18-305 (replaced by NF EN 206-1 in 2004) (see national foreword to NF EN 206-1 : Concrete - Part
1 : specification, performances, production and conformity) ;
list of batching plants accepted for the NF-BPE mark (downloadable from the www.marque-nf.com site) ;
regulations for the NF 033 "Ready Mixed Concrete" mark ;
list of additives for concrete accepted for the NF mark (www.marque-nf.com) ;
list of hydraulic binders accepted for the NF mark (www.marque-nf.com) ;
CIMBETON technical datasheets (http ://www.infociments.fr/ site) ;
control of water in concretes. Technical guide. LCPC (Central Public Works Laboratory), May 2001, 91 p.
Datasheet No. VII-3

"Placement of concrete"

generalities
This datasheet concerns placement of concretes. It
defines verifications to be made on the means used
(pump, chute, skip with duct, etc.), methods used
(concreting above the ground, horizontal, in piles,
etc.) and inspections to be made (slump Concreting a pile (photo G. Forquet - Stra)
measurement, concrete sampling, etc.).
The placement means and methods shall be capable

of preventing segregation and pollution of the
concrete, displacement of reinforcement, deformation
of prestressing ducts, abnormal deformation of
formwork, and finally assuring conformity of element
surfaces and the mechanical strength and durability of
the placed concrete.
This datasheet is complementary to the datasheet

describing the verification of formwork (No. V-1),
placement of reinforcement (No. III-1) and
datasheets on the concreting phase (No. VII-2, VII-4,
VII-5 and VII-6). Skip (photo Forquet - Stra)
It does not deal with BAP(auto placing concrete) and
BAN (auto leveling concrete) type self-consolidating
concretes.

Check that the particular QAP exists (before placing X

the concrete) and is signed
Special points about placement of concrete to be treated
(see datasheet No. I-1) :
conveyance means (placement) : pump, simple skip, The placement method shall be
skip with duct, chute and their characteristics ; suitable for the concrete
consistency
standby means (batching plant, pump, etc.) ;
placement methods (placement moving forwards, in Prefer placement moving
layers, etc.) and the concreting direction ; forwards to placement in layers.
This method can give a
continuously fresh concrete
front, a more uniform surface
appearance with no separation of
the formwork or pollution of the
reinforcement.
Chapter VII : Concreting 1/5 Datasheet No. VII-3 : Placement of concrete

handling means (type, number, position and radius of

action of cranes) ;
personnel means (acceptance and inspection of
concrete, placement, vibration, finishing) and
equipment means ;
inspections (means, nature and frequency) ;
transport and placement times ; These times shall be adapted as a

function of the temperature.
Appropriate drum deliveries
rates / placement rates
planned times : start and end of concreting ;
quantities to be placed.
Checks for authorization of concreting X
Check that personnel and equipment means specified in

the QAP are actually available
If there is any risk of heavy rain, check measures for It is preferable to begin
concrete protection (tarpaulin on the concreting front) concreting in the bottom part
and removal of water in the formwork and work upwards, to avoid
trapping water
If there is any risk of frost or high temperature, check
special requirements in the QAP (concreting in cold/hot
weather)
when concreting with a skip with duct The skip capacity must be high
enough to maintain the
concreting rate
check that the duct is long enough Concrete drop height < 1.50 m
when concreting deep foundations by immersion The immersion tube is composed

tube of a tube and a filling hopper. It
guides the concrete and prevents
washing out, segregation,
discontinuities and pollution of
the concrete.
check that the diameter of the immersion tube is Tape Inside diameter > 6 D
sufficient for a good concrete flow. Outside diameter such that the
distance between the tube and
the reinforcement > 4 D
(D largest diameter of aggregate)
check that the tube is supported on the bottom of Risk of washing out and
the borehole before priming and concreting pollution

when concreting with pump
check the maximum pumping distance The pumping distance is limited

to prevent overpressures and the
formation of plugs.
In normal cases, the horizontal
pumping distance must not
exceed 300 m. A special design is
necessary for longer distances.
Note : an increase in level of 1 m
is equivalent to 5 m and a 90
elbow is equivalent to 10 m
horizontally.
check the minimum duct diameter The duct size must be large
enough to prevent excess
pressure and formation of plugs.
The duct diameter must be at
least 4 D (D = aggregate
diameter).
Typical minimum diameter =
80 mm.

Check that predetermined requirements described in the QAPs and Construction Procedures are actually applied
and are sufficient to achieve the required quality.
Check effective acceptance of the concrete by the Acceptance of the concrete

Contractor (see datasheet No. VII-2) includes :
- an examination of the delivery
voucher and visual inspection of
the concrete in each ready-mix
truck ;
- measurement of the slump
(possibly entrapped air for
concretes subject to frost and
deicing salts) according to the
frequency defined in the QAP ;
- sampling of information and
inspection test pieces.
Check of a few weighing vouchers on the 1st load calculator

and in spot checks
In particular, check :
the formula number and the composition Conformity with the QAP
the production time ; Respect the maximum transport
time (duration < 1h 30 at 20C
in the absence of any particular
provision)
strict respect of the minimum cement content on the
load ;

strict respect of the maximum W/C ratio on the load Water correction in the batching
; plant included
the density of the load with respect to the theoretical Variation < +/- 20 kg/m3
density.
Check that concreting is being done correctly X
mixer rotation rate and waiting time End of concrete placement

limited to 2h after production (at
20C) if there are no particular
provisions
no :
concrete runoff on the formwork ;
pollution of reinforcement ;
deformation of passive reinforcement (cover) and

prestressing ducts.
concrete pouring height < 1.50 m
layer thickness < 50 cm See datasheet No. VII-4

"Concrete vibration"
uniform and sufficient vibration
- When concreting with pump
Never allow addition of water, even when pumping is Any added water increases
difficult segregability of the concrete and
the risk of blockage
- When concreting deep foundations with immersion

tube
At the beginning of concreting, check that the piston plug Priming : complete filling of the tube
at the top of the tube actually stops the concrete column and satisfactory flush at the bottom of
and enables good priming the pile
Check that there is no unpriming during concreting and

while the immersion tube is being raised
2.3.- After concreting
check the concrete surface and check that there are Visual
no defects (blister, color change, bleeding,
honeycombing, etc.) ;
check that the concrete strength is conforming ;
check and validate the results of the internal

inspection.


"Concrete mix design, Production and transport of concrete" Quality Assurance Plan ;
"Placement of concrete" Construction Procedure for each part of the structure ;
concrete delivery vouchers (weighing vouchers necessarily included) ;
concreting monitoring datasheet ;
nonconformity sheets if any.
4. For further information, refer to :
CCTG (General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65 : Construction of reinforced concrete or post-tensioned

prestressed concrete Civil Engineering structures (August 2000) - articles 74 and 75) ;
standard P18-504 "Placement of structural concretes" ;
Engineering techniques C 2 230 Hydraulic concrete - Placement J.M. Goeffray ;
"Placement of concrete on site" CIMBETON technical datasheets ;
the technical guide on appearance defects on concrete surfaces. LCPC (Central Public Works Laboratory), 1991.

Datasheet No. VII-4

suitability test on a control element to check the
effectiveness of vibration.
"Concrete vibration" This datasheet is complementary to datasheets for the

concreting phase (No. VII-2, VII-3, VII-5 and VII-6).
Note : self-consolidating concretes (SCC) and deep

1. Purpose of this datasheet and foundation concretes are concretes which do not
generalities require any vibration, because of their good fluidity and
placement conditions.
This datasheet relates to internal and surface vibration
of the concrete. The purpose of vibration is to assure
good filling of molds, reinforcement cover and to
increase concrete compactness by the elimination of
excess air.
The appearance of concrete surfaces and performances

in terms of strength and durability are influenced by the
vibration quality.
Internal vibration done by a poker vibrator, is used on

site for all typical parts of the structure.
Surface vibration with a vibrating screed board should

be limited to use when it is the only means of
placement of concrete for thin slabs (less than 15 cm
for a strongly reinforced concrete or prestressed
concrete, or 20 cm for slightly reinforced concrete).
The vibrating screed board is also recommended for
surface finishing of thicker slabs such as bridge decks.
For further information about surface finishes, see (photo G. Forquet Stra)
Appendix 1 "Examination of the support" in datasheet
No. X-1 "Placement of sealing screeds".
External vibration, by vibrators fixed on formwork and

used mainly for prefabrication, requires a study to
analyze the distribution and type of vibrators and a

Check that the "Placement of concrete" QAP exists X

and that the concreting procedure has been signed
The concreting procedure must specify :

- the concreting direction ;
- the thickness of concrete layers ;
- the type (power, frequency), and the number and For internal vibration :
position of vibrators. - the minimum number of
vibrators must be adapted to
the pouring rate ;
Standby means (energy source, vibrators) must be
provided to prevent concreting from being stopped
1/4 Datasheet No. VII-4 : Concrete vibration
- the vibrator diameter must

be adapted to distances
between vibration points
and the available space
around them.
For external vibration :
- the vibrator/formwork
connection must be very
rigid ;
- stiffeners must be
perpendicular to the vibrator
axis ;
- the vibration frequency
must be adapted to the
nature of the formwork, the
volume and consistency of
the concrete (high frequency
vibration is usually preferable
: from 4500 to 9000 rpm).
Inspection of vibration equipment Visual X The inspection of vibration

equipment forms part of the
- number and power of vibrators ; actions to be carried out to
clear the concreting
- good condition of vibrators authorization stop point.
Check good distribution of vibration points Visual For internal vibration :

- the spacing between 2
vibration points must be about
1.5 times the action radius of
the vibrator R ;
- for a poker vibrator in good

condition, the action radius is
approximately 5 times the
diameter of the vibrator.
(for a 70 mm vibrator, the
spacing shall be about 50 cm).
Check that the thickness of concrete layers is

Visual For internal vibration :
respected
- the thickness must not
usually exceed 40 to 50 cm.
A visual mark on the vibrator
hose facilitates the supervision.

Check a good bond between concrete layers

Visual The internal vibrator must
penetrate into the previously
poured layer by at least 10 cm
to assure good bond between
the 2 layers, but it must not go
further into the lower layer (risk
of post-vibration of the
concrete during the setting
phase).
A visual mark on the hose of
the internal vibrator facilitates
the supervision.
Layer n
50 cm
Layer n-1
10 cm
1,5 R Layer n-2
Plan view Elevation

The minimum distance between successive vibration points The rod must penetrate at least 10 cm into the subjacent
must be such that all concrete zones are vibrated, taking layer n-1 to bond the layers, but it must not overvibrate
account of the R action radius of the vibrator. the concrete in layer n-2.
Check the vibration duration Visual Vibration must be stopped as

soon as :
- concrete stops compacting ;
- there are no more rising air
bubbles ;
- laitance appears on the surface
;
- the vibrator noise becomes
stable.
Note : Vibration must be
longer for the upper part of
the element to be
concreted because it is not
compacted by the weight of
a upper layer.
Check that the internal vibrator is manipulated visual The rod must be immersed
according to standard practice quickly and vertically, but it
must be withdrawn slowly to
allow the concrete to close.

The rod or the screed board

must not be used to push
concrete.
Check that the internal vibrator does not come visual

into contact with the reinforcement or the
formwork (risk of segregation, marks)
Check that the vibrating screed board is visual The guides are fixed on the
supported on guides upper reinforcing layer and
spaced by the width of the
screed board.
2.4.- Inspection after stripping

Check the surface
visual Honeycomb or voids may be
Check that there are no surface defects due to poor caused by lack of vibration.
vibration (honeycomb, excessive voids, dark spots, etc.)
Dark spots may be caused by
over vibration or post-
vibration.
Other parameters can affect the
appearance of surfaces :
concrete formula, formwork
skin, curing duration, stripping
product, etc.

"Placement of concrete" Quality Assurance Plan ;
concreting procedure ;
concrete monitoring sheet ;
4. For further information, refer to :

CCTG (General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65A : Construction of reinforced concrete or post-tensioned
prestressed concrete civil engineering structures (August 2000) ; 53.2.3, 74, 75.1, 75.3 ;
Standard P18-504 "Placement of structural concretes" ;
Engineering techniques C2 230 "Hydraulic concrete - Placement " ;
the "Appearance defects of concrete surfaces" Technical guide LCPC (Central Public Works Laboratory), 1991 ;
"Vibration of concrete on site and vibration of concretes" Cimbton information documents.

Datasheet No. VII-5

"Curing and stripping"
Furthermore, concretes are more or less sensitive to
1. Purpose of this datasheet and curing depending on their mix design (strength
acquisition rate), and the nature of the binder (for
generalities
example CEM III and V cements hydrate slowly and
This datasheet describes curing of concrete and consequently require a longer curing time).
examines conditions for stripping parts of the
Stripping may only be done when the placed concrete
structure. It does not deal with special cases in which a
is sufficiently strong and is compatible with
heat treatment is used, nor requirements about surface
construction operations. The stripping time must take
qualities.
account of the concrete mix design and concreting
Curing of concrete consists of protecting concrete conditions ; fresh concrete temperature, weather
surfaces from early drying for a sufficiently long period conditions, etc. These parameters have an influence
varying from 1 to 10 days. It can also limit temperature partly on the hardening rate and also on thermal and
gradients, depending on the curing method used. It is endogenic shrinkage. Thus, stripping must also be
done immediately after concreting for unformed programmed so as to limit risks of endogenic and
surfaces and after stripping for other surfaces. thermal cracking. For example, formwork can be held
in place longer to limit thermal shocks. Nevertheless,
This operation is very important because it controls the time during which formwork is left in place
durability properties of the structure. If there is no must be limited to prevent the risk of cracking due
curing, early drying can cause chalking of the surface, to restrained deformation.
and crazing due to plastic shrinkage. Risks of cracking
due to endogenic shrinkage 1 and thermal shrinkage also Finally, the strength of placed concrete may be
have to be taken into account. monitored by making information test pieces or by
setting up a maturity method (see appendix to this
The need to apply curing depends on weather datasheet).
conditions and the concrete formula. A strong wing,
bright sunshine and low air humidity accentuate the Note : this datasheet is complementary to datasheets
risks of early drying. dealing with the concreting phase (No. VII-2, VII-3,
VII-4 and VII-6).
1 Endogenic : that initiates inside the structure.
Chapter VII : Concreting 1/7 Datasheet No.VII-5 : Curing and stripping


2.1.- Before the works and before concreting
Check concrete placement requirements X

specified on site in the QAP (signed
procedure)
Special points to be treated related to curing and
stripping :
Stripping time ;
Falsework must be removed according to a program Information test pieces may be
produced by the design office and specifying allowable compulsory if constraints applied
deformations and minimum concrete strength. when the falsework is removed
exceed 0.4 .fcj (*)
(*) fcj denotes the characteristic
strength at time "j", taking
account of estimated effects of
bad weather if any
Use of maturity method
techniques can provide a better
means of estimating the strength
of placed concrete
Measures to limit cracking Formwork may be held in place
Some structures or parts of structures are sensitive to to limit thermal shocks.
early cracking, particularly elements with large surface However, formwork must not be
areas subject to drying left in place for too long to
prevent cracking due to
restrained deformations.
Stripping may be done in two
steps : stripping but keeping
formwork close to the stripped
surfaces to limit temperature
gradients
Curing processes
The curing method must be specified, together with
application methods such as :
- formwork held in place throughout the curing time ; Caution with the risk of bond
and spalling of the concrete
- waterproof tarpaulin that may or may not be kept
permanently in contact with the concrete ;
- permeable fabric kept damp by intermittent spraying
;
- curing product for which the NF mark has been The curing product must be
received or satisfying requirements of the particular compatible with the screed
regulation for the NF mark (NF P18 370 and NF P18 waterproofing or it shall be
371) ; eliminated by sanding
- permanent humidification of concrete. Excessive spraying can cause
scouring of concrete

If no special study has been

Beginning and duration of curing
carried out, the minimum curing
time to be observed is given in
CCTG (General Technical
Clauses) leaflet 65A ( 74.6.2). It
depends on ambient conditions
(classes 1, 2 and 3), the ambient
temperature and the concrete
hardening rate (strength class and
nature of cement). Therefore if
curing is done, it can last from 1
to 10 days
In hot weather (T > 25C)
If applicable, special measures specified for
concreting in hot and cold weather.
Special requirements shall be taken when the Whenever possible, concrete
temperature on site is less than 5C or when the outside hot periods. Otherwise,
concrete temperature at the time of placement is likely provide cooling systems.
to exceed 32C
In cold weather (T < 5C)
Ambient temperature < - 5C,

concreting is not recommended ;
Between -5 and 5C, provide for
:
- thermal insulation of formwork
;
- thermal protection of unformed
surfaces (possibly heat with
steam) ;
- leave formwork in place until
the concrete has reached a
strength of 5 MPa.
Note : curing processes involving
humidification, spraying or
immersion cannot be used in
frosty weather.
Method of monitoring the strength of placed

concrete :
Information test pieces
maturity method Call in a specialist from the LPC
(Public Works Laboratory)
network for maturity method
See the cure measurement device
calibration principle in the
appendix to this datasheet, and
refer to the cure measurement
device usage guide on site.

If a maturity method is specified, the

following points shall be checked with the
assistance of a specialist from the LPC
network :
conformity of the calibration procedure to be set

up at the beginning of the construction period ;
the concrete strength shall be checked by
information test pieces until site calibration has
been validated (at the end of initial conformity
inspections) ;
If a calibration was done in the laboratory, include
the parameters obtained (calibration curve and
activation energy) ;
Check if thermocouples are well positioned in visual Conformity with the QAP
the part to be concreted and subsequently their
effective position within the formwork, on the
drawings provided by the design office ;
the calculation of the equivalent age by the visual
maturity method shall begin at the end of
concreting.
visual To estimate the curing time, it
Check that placement and curing control and
may be necessary to use a
stripping control equipment is present.
maximum thermometer, a
hygrometer and an anemometer
in the case of strong winds (> 30
kph)
2.2.- At the end of concreting and during curing
Check that curing of unformed surfaces takes visual

place after the end of surfacing
Check that the curing process is conform with visual

the QAP
If a curing product is used, check the quantities Conformity with the product
applied technical datasheet
If water is sprayed, check :
- that it does not modify the concrete surface ; Excessively concentrated

spraying can scour the concrete
surface
- that all surface areas are properly sprayed ;
- that it is done without interruption. The difference in temperature

between the water and the
concrete surface must be less
than 10C

Check that the curing time is respected X Conformity with the QAP.
The curing time may be fixed by
a minimum concrete strength
criterion or otherwise as a
function of the concrete type and
ambient conditions.
Examples of curing times :
- for a rapid hardening concrete :
1 day (hot weather) to 2 days
(cold weather) ;
- for a slow hardening concrete
(CEM III, CEM IV or CEM V) :
4 days (average ambient
conditions) to 10 days (cold, dry
or windy weather).
Note : if no isothermal
protection is given, curing shall
be extended for the time during
which the temperature is below
5C
When monitoring concrete strength using
information test pieces :
- check that information test pieces are kept under the
same temperature conditions as the concreted part.
When monitoring concrete strength using
maturity method :
- check the results of initial conformity tests during If the calculated strength
the construction period ; according to the maturity
method is greater than the
- check the information provided by information test strength on test pieces by more
pieces during the initial conformity tests. than 2 MPa, a corrective action
shall be set up.
2.3.- Before stripping

Stripping authorization maturity method X Conformity with the QAP.

If no study has been made, the
- check that the concrete strength is sufficient for temperature difference between
stripping ; or the core and the skin shall be
limited to 20C for parts > 50
- check that the formwork is left in place for the cm thick. Temperature check
required time (for curing by keeping the formwork in Information test measurements shall be
place or if there are risks of thermal shock). pieces specifically provided in written
documents.
Attention is drawn to the fact
that the curing by keeping the
formwork in place can cause
early cracks due to restrained
shrinkage. One solution to this
problem is to loosen the
formwork.
2.4.- During and after stripping
Check that stripping operations are carried out visual

progressively and with no shock
After stripping, check that there is no : visual
- excessive deformation of deflected parts ;

- cracking of tensioned parts.
If curing has to be continued after stripping, visual Conformity with the QAP
check that it is applied immediately after stripping.
2.5.- After curing

Check the concrete surface and verify that Visual See also "Concrete surfaces"
there is no : datasheet
- chalking ;
- crazing due to plastic shrinkage ;
- cracking due to endogenic and thermal shrinkage

Quality Assurance Plan ;
material delivery vouchers (curing products) ;
monitoring datasheet (duly filled in at the end of placement) ;
CCTG leaflet 65A : Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete civil engineering structures
(August 2000) ; 74.5, 74.6 and 74.7 ;
documentation leaflet P18-504 "Placement of structural concretes" ;
Les Techniques de l'Ingnieur (the engineer techniques) C2 230 "Hydraulic concrete - Placement" ;
the technical guide on "Concrete strength in the structure : the maturity method". LCPC/IREX/CALIBE, 2003 ;
the technical guide on appearance defects in reinforced concrete surfaces. LCPC (Central Public Works
Laboratory), 1991.

Appendix to datasheet No. VII-5
Production of two series of test pieces derived from a single mix and kept in two different environments
C C
Test pieces kept at 20C Test pieces kept at 5C
2 temperature histories
C
20C
5C
Real age
Comparison of strength curves for the 2 series of test pieces
20C
Rc
5C
Real age
Search for the apparent value of the activation energy that makes the above two curves coincident when the strength is
expressed as a function of the equivalent age
Rc
Equivalent age
Calibration curve

Datasheet No. VII-6

The treatment of construction joints controls the
durability of the zone, transmission of forces and
aesthetics of the surface.
"Concrete construction
Considering the problems mentioned above, accidental
joints" construction joints are not allowed and therefore are
not dealt with herein.

generalities
The purpose of this datasheet is to describe methods to
be used to deal with concrete construction joints.
A concrete construction joint is made when concrete is

cast in contact with set concrete (or concrete that
cannot be vibrated again) and mechanical continuity
has to be provided between the two concretes. Cases of
self-consolidating concrete and shotcrete are not dealt
with.
A distinction is made between accidental concreting

construction joints and deliberately programmed Concrete construction joint area (Photo Stra/CTOA)
concreting construction joints.
Concrete construction joints form sensitive areas (weak

point in terms of mechanical strength, area relatively
easy to penetrate by aggressive agents).

Check that construction documents exist and on documents See "curing and stripping
are signed (drawings and QAP, particularly "datasheet
concreting program and procedure)
Special points to be examined dealing with
Obtaining homogenous
construction joints:
surfaces requires identical
processes for all parts
(concrete mix design,
equipment and placement
method, stripping time,
stripping agent, curing, etc.)
take account of deliberate construction joints to
attenuate their impact (regarding the aesthetics
of the structure);
provisions to eliminate laitance and cleaning of
the construction joint surface (retarding agent,
pressurized water, expanded metal, inflatable
seal for vertical construction joints, etc.);
if a bonding product is used to glue fresh
concrete onto set concrete, make sure that it is
NF certified;
Chapter VII: Concreting 1/3 Datasheet No.VII-6: Concrete construction joints
if a set retarding agent is used, check its

efficiency at the time of the suitability tests;
conditions for use of deactivating agent; A deactivating agent cannot be
used until after a feasibility
study. There is a risk that the
agent may remain in the
construction joint
check that parts not bonding to the support are
eliminated before the construction joint is
made;
availability of standby means (sufficient number visual on the To prevent accidental
of ready-mixtrucks, standby concrete pumps, site construction joints
standby batching plant, etc).
2.2.- While concreting the first part and treating the construction joint
Make sure that:
- all measures defined in advance and described mainly in the Contractors QAP are actually applied and are capable of
achieving the required quality;
- check preparation of the construction joint zone before concreting the second part.
check that the first part is correctly visual

constructed:
careful vibration;
coarse finish.
Conformity of measures applied and the X
visual
means used:
configuration of construction joints;
check the surface preparation method; eliminate

laitance to expose aggregates without loosening
their bond;
possible protection of starter bars. Particularly in the case of
construction in the marine
environment
2.3.- Between concreting of the first and second parts

Firstly, perform acceptance of the construction joint area (first part) after preparation, and secondly assure that
conditions necessary for the second concreting are satisfied.
Acceptance (inspect preparation) of the visual X To be done on the day that

construction joint area the second part is
concreted
check surface roughness;

check that there is no laitance or loose

aggregate;
check cleanliness;
check starter bars;

Shape, lap length, state of
cleanliness
check equipment and material used (conformity

Fresh concrete to set
with the QAP).
concrete gluing product,
concrete
PA: Stop point PC: Critical point

monitoring datasheet (duly filled in at the end of placement);
anomaly sheet if any;
concreting procedure.

Recommendations for making concrete construction joints. FFB/Stra/CEBTP, June 2000, 21p.;
standard P18-504 "Placement of structural concretes";
CCTG (General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65A: Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed post-tensioned
concrete civil engineering structures (August 2000).

Chapter VIII: Bearings
Guide for construction of bridges MEMOAR Collection of technical datasheets
Datasheet No. VIII-1

RANGE AND TYPES OF BEARINGS
"Laminated elastomeric LAMINATED ELASTOMERIC BRIDGE

BEARINGS
bridge bearings" The laminated elastomeric bearing is an elastomeric
block reinforced by steel plates bonded to the
elastomer at the time of the vulcanization (chemical
modification creating long polymer chains under the
1. Purpose of this document combined effect of temperature and pressure).
Elastomer is subjected to forces and displacements
This document deals with requirements related to
(compression, rotation and shear or distortion).
acceptance and installation of laminated elastomeric
Insertion of steel plates into the elastomer block
bearings on bridges and describes the work to be done
contributes to reducing settlement under normal load
by the Consulting Engineer.
and increasing the allowable compression stress
This document shall be used with datasheets No. VIII- without changing the shear stiffness.
3 "Raised embossment" and No. VIII-4
The eventual sliding elements most frequently used in
"Jacking/wedging".
France consist of a PTFE1 sheet fixed on the top of
the elastomer bearing. A polished stainless steel plate
2. Reminders fitted to a steel top plate slides on the PTFE sheet.
The term "Bearing" refers to a device that makes the The main use of laminated elastomeric bearings with a
link between the structure and its support and sliding plate is justified in that they can accept
transmits to the supports forces and rotations applied irreversible displacements (shrinkage, creep).
on the deck of a bridge. The theoretical scheme for
operation of the structure is closely related to the
degrees of freedom of the bearings.
As a reminder, bearings must perform the following functions:
transmit vertical forces due to the weight of the deck and loads
operating;
enable variations in the deck length under the actions of
temperature, shrinkage and creep;
transmit all or some of the horizontal forces due to the effects
introduced by loads operating, the effects resulting from
changes to the deck length, wind effects and accidental actions; Example of bridge with ribbed slabs on laminated elastomeric
enable structural rotations under loads operating or following bearings
deferred deformation of the structure; (Stra/CTOA photo Bridge engineering department)
accept deferred support movements.
POT BEARINGS
(See datasheet No. VIII-2)
Correct mechanical operation, keeping in working
condition and the durability of bridges depend on the
special care to be taken in manufacturing quality, the
choice, design and installation of bearings.
Therefore, it is essential that efficient and perennial

bearings should be available, particularly because the
financial consequences of failures are absolutely
disproportionate to the moderate cost of their supply
(ratio from 1 to 50 or even more).
1 PTFE (PolyTetraFluoroEthylene) or Teflon
Chapter VIII: Bearings 1/7 Datasheet No. VIII-1: Laminated elastomeric bearings
CHALLENGES
The main challenges related to these structural elements concern to their principal role in how the structure functions.
Observed defects are a consequence as much the conception as the design and installation problems. This explains the
importance of the following main points:
respect the positions of bearings at support points and particularly the orientation;
the adequate link between the rotation capability of the bearing and actual rotation conditions occurring in the
structure particularly taking account of rotations in the construction phase;
possibly, the durability of metallic elements due to anti-corrosion protection;
good transition of deck forces to supports through perfect contact at connection interfaces between the bearing and
structural elements (see. datasheet No. VIII-3).
Laminated elastomeric bearing with raised embossments and

location for jacking
(Stra/CTOA photo)
Brief Diagram Comments

Bearing type
description
Laminated Example denomination with the bearing in
elastomeric fully the adjacent figure:
covered with 300 x 400 x 3(10+3)
elastomer with
B according to
top and bottom - 300: width in mm;
standard
elastomer layer - 400: length in mm;
XP T47-815
corresponding to - 3(10+3) = 39 mm: total height;
the nominal half- - 3 x 10 = 30 mm of elastomer distributed in
thickness of an two 5 mm thick outside layers and
elementary layer two 10 mm intermediate layers;
- 3 x 3 = three 3 mm metal plates.
Thick external steel plates are used to prevent

advancing or uplift. Anti-advancing devices
C according to minimum 10 mm (stops) are used when advancing might be a
standard external metal problem, and they must only prevent
XP T47-815 plates advancing but without preventing or
restraining deformations. Stops must come
into contact with the thick plate, the stop
shall never be in contact with the rubber
sheet.
Anti-advance Other types of anti-advance systems exist such

bearing with stops as: stops on a single face, with anchors, striated
(with type C plate of steel for small tangential forces.
bearing)
Note: It is forbidden to stack laminated elastomeric bearings on bridge.

For further details, see 5 "For further information refer to:"
Chapter VIII: Bearings 2/7 Datasheet No.VIII-1: Laminated elastomeric bearings

Guide for construction on bridges MEMOAR Collection of technical Datasheetss
3. Certification / Regulations
Bearings outside the application field
Certification procedure: NF mark of the NF mark
The product concerned is a type B bearing with the In particular, this involves laminated elastomeric rubber
dimensions given in the table (see the "For further bearings:
information refer to:").
type B (apart from table 2 in standard XP T47-815)
Certification of conformity with standard XP T47-815 for size reasons imposed in plan and in thickness. In
is achieved by the right to use the NF mark, and is this case, there are means of acceptance if these
based on the manufacturer's commitment and work bearings are made in a factory that does or does not
done by an external organization. hold the right to use the NF mark;
a sliding type bearing (D and E) according to
Mark NF regulations specify the conditions under standard NF EN 1337-3;
which the NF mark may be placed on products
type B made in a factory other than the factory
conforming with applicable specifications (XP T47-
declared for the request for the NF mark.
815).
List of products concerned (see the "For further

information, refer to:" section) Note: Caution, do not confuse the NF mark with the
Bearing with the NF mark logo CE mark. Although the NF mark is a voluntary
(Stra/CTOA photo) certification, the CE mark (as defined in the DPC
89/106) is compulsory because it is required by the
regulations before a product can be marketed. As soon
as a product is affected by CE marking, an order in
council specifies its application date, end of
manufacturing and end of marketing dates for products
without the CE mark.
At the time of writing this document, laminated

elastomeric bearings are not governed by CE marking.
4. Actions to be carried out.

4.1.- On reception
Nature of the work Means Remarks
Check conformity of the delivery; Visual See CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses) for the
contract and signed drawings.
Delivery form
Check the attestation of conformity of Visual Number, dimensions, composition, NF marking

manufacturer/distributor; (logo, manufacturers or distributor's name)
Check the identification (traceability); Visual Record bearing numbers (side face and bearing
face). Information to be marked on the bridge
documentation
Check that there has been no defect or damage Visual Damaged corners,
during transport and unloading;
Dimensional check (overall dimensions); Tape See bridge construction drawings
Make sure that the main Contractor's internal Acceptance monitoring datasheet for bearings
inspection is actually made.
Chapter VIII: Bearings 3/7 Datasheet No. VIII-1: Laminated elastomeric bearings
Guide for construction on bridges MEMOAR Collection of technical datasheetss
Bearings for which the NF mark has been issued

(See list of elastomeric bearings accepted for the NF mark)
Check that the NF marking is present Visual On the bearing face:

- NF logo;
- manufacturer's or distributor's name (or logo);
- manufacturing number.
The number shall be recorded during acceptance
and it shall be mentioned in the bridge
documentation.
On the side face:

- NF logo;
- manufacturer's or distributor's name (or logo).
Bearings without the NF mark
Work by an RST (Scientific & Technical network) specialist:
Attestation of conformity of the manufacturer if the factory makes other NF products, otherwise special tests designed
to verify conformity with the standard XP T47-815 specifications
Sliding bearings
The sliding plane/elastomeric block assembly shall be delivered as a single-piece part, pre-adjusted with marking of the
orientation, for handling and installation reasons.
Check that there are no defects or damage due to Visual Damaged corners, shear of pre-adjustment rods
transport and unloading for some sliding bearings, scratches on stainless
steel plates, etc.
4.2.- During storage
Check storage conditions: Visual
clean and plane surface;
sheltered from the rain, sun, dirt and dust,

aggressive products such as stripping oil or other
products that could damage the rubber.
Chapter VIII: Bearings 4/7 Datasheet No. VIII-1: Laminated elastomer bearings
4.3.- Before installation properly speaking
Laminated elastomeric bearings
Check that the following documents and special

procedures (if any) exist:
the Quality Management System of the Installation procedure
Contractor responsible for installation;
Construction drawings signed and "Approved for - lower and upper raised embossments drawings
construction"; (see datasheet No. VIII-3 "Raised
embossments");
- a plan view of the bridge showing the
illustration of different types of bearings;
- their dimensions, directions and possible
movements.
Designs note;
Raised embossment manufacturing procedure; See datasheet No. VIII-3 "Raised embossments"
Temporary or final installation procedures for

bearings, breakdown into phases if applicable;
Particular procedure for rebalancing deformations
by distortion of the bearing, in particular taking
account of thermal conditions and the
construction period.
See datasheet No. VIII-3 "Raised embossments"
Check that raised embossment construction
tolerances are respected
Sliding bearings: complementary

Justification designs note giving the value of the Pre-adjustment value of sliding bearings
preliminary adjustment of sliding bearings as a
function of the ambient temperature.
4.4.- During construction STOP POINT

(Before this stop point is cleared, make sure that inspection operations specified for sensitive points in 4.1 to 4.3 have
been done)
Check correct positioning and conformity of the See construction drawing and installation
type of bearing compared with its planned location procedure (orientation)
on the drawings.
Sliding bearings
Check that the blocking device has been

withdrawn and replaced by frangible screws.
If the bearing is not delivered as a single-piece block,
the following shall be checked:
the relative position between the laminated Comparison between the ambient temperature
elastomer and the sliding plate, that depends on during working up and the temperature defined
the ambient temperature (calculated preliminary in the design note

setting);
that the plastic film protecting the sliding stainless
steel has been removed;
that there are no scratches and that the stainless
steel is clean;
that the kraft paper or other protection on the
PTFE has been removed;
the presence of silicone grease on the PTFE and
the lack of dust or grains stuck to the grease.
4.5.- When loading bearings

(It is recommended that this work should be carried out before the structure is accepted)
Check the appearance of bulges in elastomer Visual Homogenous and perfectly compressed
layers; bulges = uniform load distribution.
If there are no bulges in some or all of the
bearing: excessive rotation, planeness or
parallelism defects in raised embossments,
excessive load or unloading in a corner, .
Check contacts between the bearing and support Reglet,

zones; wedges such
as "feeler
wedges"
Check that all formwork elements around bearings Visual
have been removed;
Check that there are no de-bonding between Visual
elastomer and metal plates, cracking, bursting,
cracklings, chaps
Check all raised embossments and wedging Visual Observations made shall also be
integrity (lack of cracking, fragment of concrete, complemented by a local examination of
etc.). the structure (deck and supportss) to check that
there is no damage.
By sliding bearings
As a function of the ambient temperature
Check the relative position between the laminated Reglet
elastomer and the sliding plate;
Lack of dirt, scratch, separation between
Check the condition of the stainless steel of the
stainless steel and sliding plate
sliding plate;
Check that there is silicone grease; Visual
Check that there is no gap between the plate and Visual
the elastomer bearing;
Check that there is no bending of the sliding plate; Visual
Caution for possible condensation and
Check the role of the sliding plane protection, if
accumulation of dust or other
any.
4.6.- Inspection before the bridge is put into service (point 0)

Nature of the work Means1 Remarks
When the structure is accepted, record point 0 for all Note the ambient temperature
bearings (distortion, rotation, raised embossment
defects, etc.).
Measure the bearing thickness at the 4 corners with

a precision of the order of 0.5 to 1 mm;
Measure the distortion and direction, deformation This measurement is essential to have a clear
of the bearing in shear; understanding of the operation of the structure as
a function of the temperature.
The distortion limit under horizontal forces or
displacements is tan = 0.7.
Check that there is no advance, embedment;
Check that there are no de-bonding between
elastomer and metal plates, cracking, bursting,
cracklings, chaps
Check that there is no dirt or pollution such as
runoff water, vegetation, oil;
Observations made shall also be
Check all raised embossments and wedging integrity
complemented by a local examination
(lack of cracking, fragment of concrete, etc.).
of the structure (deck and supports) to check
that there is no damage.
By sliding bearings
Check that sliding works effectively by the presence Caution for excessive distortion
of traces of sliding on the sliding stainless steel;
As a function of the ambient temperature
Check the relative position between the laminated
elastomer and the sliding plate;
Check that there is no bending of the sliding plate. Visual

Standard XP T47-815: Rubber bearings devices - Specifications;
Standards XP T47-802 to T47-814: Rubber bearings devices Test standards;
Documentation guide T47-801: Rubber bearings devices General and terminology;
Standard NF EN 1337-3 (T47-820-3): Structural bearings - Part 3: Elastomeric bearings;
Laminated elastomeric bearings Use on bridges, viaducts and similar structures Technical guide. Stra,
September 2000, 90 p. (Stra reference F0032);
List of products accepted for the NF mark for type B laminated rubber bearings, and the table for the range of
dimensions on Internet site http://www.afnor.fr;
ITSEOA (Technical order for the supervision and maintenance of civil engineering structures): section two - Part
13 "Bearings" Technical guide. Stra, 2003, 67 p. (Stra reference F0230);
Rubber bearings Scientific and technical documents. AFPC, July 1994.
1 See Part 13 Bearings

RANGE AND TYPES OF BEARINGS
LAMINATED ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS (See

"Pot bearings" datasheet No. VIII-1)
POT BEARINGS
Pot bearings consist of a cylindrical elastomer pad

1. Purpose of this document enclosed in a pot that receives the load through a
piston forming a cover to the pot. The pad is usually
The purpose of this document is to check acceptance
made of rubber and can only deform at constant
and installation of pot bearings on bridges. It
volume, which makes it possible to transmit high loads
specifically deals with control actions necessary to
while allowing rotations imposed by the structure. A
verify conformity of the supply of bearings and their
distinction is made between:
installation on the bridge. This document shall be used
with datasheets No. VIII-3 "Raised embossments" and Fixed bearings
No. VIII-4 "Jacking/wedging".
Fixed bearings enable multi-directional rotations only
and prevent any horizontal displacement (or translation
2. Reminders movement on the bearing).
The term "Bearing" refers to a device that makes the Mobile bearings
link between the structure and its support and
transmits to the supports forces and rotations applied Possibilities of sliding (single or multi-directional
on the deck of a bridge. The theoretical scheme for bearings) are provided by means of a honeycombed,
operation of the structure is closely related to the greased PTFE1 sheet engraved in the top part of the
degrees of freedom of the bearings. piston on which a specially treated stainless steel plate
fixed to a support plate called the sliding plate, will be
As a reminder, bearings must perform the following functions: free to slide. The guidance (single-directional bearing)
orients the sliding direction, either laterally or by means
transmit vertical forces due to the weight of the deck and loads
of a median guide usually composed of a key.
operating;
Depending on the magnitude of the dynamic forces
enable variations in the deck length under the actions of and the ratios between the horizontal and concomitant
temperature, shrinkage and creep; vertical forces, the bearings are held in place either by
transmit all or some of the horizontal forces due to the effects simple friction with the structure, or by fasteners and
introduced by loads operating, the effects resulting from mounting brackets or stops systems.
changes to the deck length, wind effects and accidental actions;
enable structural rotations under loads operating or following These bearings are provided with indicators and
deferred deformation of the structure; displacement reglet for monitoring movements in time.
accept deferred support movements. They comprise measures for protecting sliding
elements from dust consisting firstly of a scraper
system around the periphery of the PTFE and usually a
Correct mechanical operation, keeping in working
skirt or a bellows around the periphery of the sliding
condition and the durability of bridges depend on the
plate.
special care to be taken in manufacturing quality, the
choice, design and installation of bearings (for
information, the main installation techniques are
defined in standard T47-816-3).
Therefore, it is essential that efficient and perennial

bearings should be available, particularly because the
financial consequences of failures are absolutely
disproportionate to the moderate cost of their supply
(ratio from 1 to 50 or even more).
1 PTFE (PolyTetraFluoroEthylene) or Teflon.
Chapter VIII: Bearings 1/7 Datasheet No. VIII-2: Pot bearings

CHALLENGES
The main challenges related to these structural

elements are related to their principal role in how the
structure functions. Observed defects relate as much Pot bearing (Stra/CTOA Photo - Bridge Engineering
the conception as the design and installation problems. Department)
This explains the importance of the following main
points:
respect the positions of bearings at support points

and particularly the orientation and direction of
displacements;
the adequate link between the rotation capability of
the bearing and actual rotation conditions occurring
in the structure particularly taking account of
rotations in the construction phase;
the durability of metallic elements due to anti-
corrosion protection;
good transition of deck forces to supports through
perfect contact at connection interfaces between the
bearing and structural elements (See datasheet No.
VIII-3).

Diagrams of pot bearings
Schematic composition
Guide system Sliding part with lateral guide Sliding plate PTFE sheet Piston pot cover Rubber pad Joint
Pot Lower plate
Gauge if required
Fixed bearing
Single-directional bearing with central guidance
Single-directional bearing with lateral guidance
Multi-directional bearing

3. Regulations
In order to be allowed access to the European market, pot bearings will eventually have to be CE marked as described
in Directive for Product Construction 89/106. As soon as a product is concerned by CE marking, an order specifies its
application date, end of manufacturing and end of marketing dates of products that are not CE marked.
At the time of writing this document, pot bearings are not subject to CE marking.

Before acceptance on site, pot bearings are supposed to have been subjected to an external factory production control,
with the purpose of assuring that the supplies are conforming with the specifications at the manufacturing stage, and
that the manufacturer's quality system is sufficient to assure control over manufacturing of components according to
the drawings, and their assembly and assembled bearings. This action is only carried out if it is specifically defined in the
contract. The following steps are involved.
4.1.- On reception of bearings
Check conformity of the delivery; Geometric characteristics (heights, preliminary

settings, parallelisms) conforming with the contract
CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses) and signed
drawings.
Delivery forms.
Identification plate including:

Check marking of the bearing (traceability)
type;
force and displacement capacities;
position;
manufacturers or distributor's references;
identification of the position on the bridge, the
orientation and direction of displacement
Lack of visible defects, particularly shocks
Check that there are no defects or damage during
transport and unloading;
See 3 in NF EN 1337-11
Check transport, handling and storage conditions;
No breakage or deformations
Check temporary blocking devices;
Acceptance monitoring sheet for bearings

Make sure that the main Contractor's internal
control is actually made.
4.2.- When storing
Check storage conditions Visual
clean and plane surface;
sheltered from the rain, sun, dirt and dust,

aggressive products such as stripping oil or other
products that could damage.

4.3.- Before installation properly speaking
Check that the following documents and special

procedures (if any) exist:
the Manufacturer Control System the Contractor
Installation procedure (Respect standard NF T 47-
responsible for installation;
816-3)
Construction drawings signed and "Approved for - lower and upper raised embossments drawings
construction"; (see datasheet No. VIII-3 "Raised embossments");
- a plan view of the bridge showing the illustration
of different types of bearings;
- their dimensions, directions and possible
movements.
Design note, and for sliding bearings, justify

Pre-setting value of sliding bearings
calculation giving the preliminary setting for
sliding bearings in conformity with the ambient
temperature (and if possible and justified, the
deck temperature);
- raised embossment construction procedure;
See datasheet No.VIII-3 "Raised embossments"
Temporary or final installation procedures for

bearings, breakdown into phases if applicable.
Check that raised embossments construction
See datasheet No.VIII-3 "Raised embossments"
(concrete) or bearing plates (metal) tolerances are
respected
4.4.- During installation STOP POINT

(Before this stop point is cleared, make sure that inspection operations specified for sensitive points in 4.1 to 4.3 have
been done)
Check that the environment is clean;

See construction drawing
Check that the bearing position is respected
(location, orientation, displacement direction);
Check preliminary settings of sliding bearings as a Comparison between the ambient temperature
function of the ambient temperature (and the deck during installation and the temperature defined in
temperature if possible and if justified); the design note
Check that the internal inspection planned by the See installation procedure
Contractor is applied;
Check conformity of anchorages; Position of anchorage and respect of the procedure
Check temporary and final wedging. See datasheet No. VIII-3 "Raised embossments"
and
No. VIII-4 "Jacking/wedging"

4.5.- When loading bearings

(It is recommended that this work should be carried out before the structure is accepted)
The bearing is considered to have been put into service when the bearing reaction from the final bridge is transferred to
the bearing.
Check application of the internal inspection

specified by the Contractor and particularly:
specified provisions for elimination of
temporary wedging;
removal of temporary attachment devices;
cleanliness of the environment;
recording of measurements before and after Heights, displacements (position of the

release; indicator), rotation
estimate of bearing reaction values; See datasheet No. VIII-4 "Jacking and wedging"
recording of temperatures; Thermometer With weather records 48 h before
contacts between bearings and support zones; Reglet, wedges

such as "feeler
wedges"
integrity of raised embossments and wedging. No cracking and/or breakage
Observations made shall also be

complemented by a local examination of
the structure (deck and supports) to check that
there is no damage.
Check that the required concrete strength is

achieved before transferring the load into the
raised embossments.
4.6.- Inspection before the bridge is put into service (point 0)
Nature of the work Means1 Remarks
Precise record of values necessary for monitoring These initial observations are complemented by
the long term behavior of all bearings (heights, records kept during the work period during
rotations, displacements) and possibly bearing structure modifications related to the
reactions (to be evaluated from pressures as a construction phasing (phased construction
function of jack characteristics); with keying or modification of bearing
reactions by jacking) see 3.4.
Check effective sliding; By the presence of displacement traces on the
stainless steel plate
Check effectiveness of protection devices;
Check the integrity of pads and wedging.
1 See part 13 "Bearings"


Standard T47-816: Rubber bearings Pot bearings - Parts 1 (Introduction), 2 (Technical datasheet) and 3
(installation of pot bearings);
Standard NF EN 1337-1 (T47-820-1): Structural bearings Part 1: General design rules;
Standard NF EN 1337-2 (T47-820-2): Structural bearings Part 2: Sliding elements;
Draft standard EN 1337-5 (T47-820-5): Structural bearings Part 5: Pot bearings;
Standard NF EN 1337-11 (T47-820-11): Structural bearings Part 11: Transport, intermediate storage and
assembly;
Pot bearings Use on bridges, viaducts and similar structures Stra technical guide September 2000, 58 p. (Stra
reference F0033);
ITSEOA (technical order for the supervision and maintenance of civil engineering structures): section two - Part
13 "Bearings" Technical guide Stra, 2003, 67 p. (Stra reference: F0230).


cases
In this part, the lower pad may be composed of:
"Bearing Raised the grill-reinforced concrete part fixed to the

stringer or the crosshead (for small laminated
embossments" elastomeric bearings);
or by wedging mortar when the raised embossment
height is less than 5 cm;
or by superposition of these two parts in other
1. Purpose of this document cases.
The purpose of this document is to describe the
inspection of the construction of lower raised
embossments and upper raised embossments of
laminated elastomeric bearings and pot bearings used
on bridges. It is complemented by the following
datasheets:
No. VIII-1 "Laminated elastomeric bearings";

No. VIII-2 "Pot bearings";
No. VIII-4 "Jacking / wedging".
2. Reminders
The following text contains large extracts from the
Stra/LCPC (Publics Works Central Research
Lower and upper raised embossments
Laboratory) guide '"Environment of laminated
of a laminated elastomeric bearing
elastomer bearings Compilation of standard
(Stra/CTOA Photo Bridge Engineering Department)
practice".
Raised embossments form the environment of

bearings.
The design of this environment shall enable:
operation of bearings under optimum conditions;

easy inspection of bearings;
easy replacement of bearings or repair of their
environment.
A typical arrangement particularly well suited to the

case of laminated elastomeric bearings is illustrated by
the sketch in the following figure that is indifferently
applicable to the longitudinal direction and the
transverse direction. The main dimensions (in cm) Lower and upper raised embossments of a pot bearing
given between brackets are minimum dimensions. (Stra/CTOA Photo)
Typical arrangement Longitudinal section

Upper raised embossment Bearing
Plane and horizontal face Intrados
Support edge Support top face
Lower raised embossment
* may possibly be reduced to 12 cm in some special
Chapter VIII: Bearings 1/7 Datasheet No.VIII-3: Bearing raised embossments

Different methods are used to make these raised embossments. The following table shows methods that could be
considered as a function of the bearing type and the structure type:
Laminated elastomeric bearings Pot

bearings
Cast in situ Prefabricated Cast in situ Prefabricated

concrete structure structure concrete structure structure
LOWER RAISED EMBOSSMENT
/////////////// ///////////////
1 ////////////////
placement on flowing mortar /////////////// ///////////////
///////////////
cast in perfectly leveled //////////////// ////////////////
formwork //////////////// ////////////////
/////////////// ///////////////
by caulking /////////////// /////////////// 2 2
/////////////// ///////////////
by grouting or gravity pouring /////////////// /////////////// 3 3
UPPER RAISED EMBOSSMENT

/////////////// ////////////////
prefabricated /////////////// ////////////////
/////////////// ////////////////
cast at the same time as the deck 4 /////////////// 5 ////////////////
///////////////
by caulking /////////////// 6
///////////////
by grouting /////////////// 6
/////////////// method not used
1 This method can be adopted for bearings for which the base is inscribed in a 600 mm square. Minimum height of
the mortar bed 30 mm, maximum height 50 mm. The pot engraving shall be less than 10 mm.
2 Ticklish method that is not usually used for lower raised embossments.
3 The bearing is firstly placed on three or four wedges with small dimensions in plan located outside the bottom
surface of the pot or any other device that can be adjusted beforehand to make it horizontal. Measures will have to be
taken to prevent air bubbles from getting trapped.
4 The structure is formed around the bearing. The sandbox method is sometimes replaced by polystyrene, but
appropriate measures shall be taken to compensate for settlement and to prevent engraving of the bearing.
5 The formwork shall be perfectly connected to the upper plate and it shall be watertight all around it to prevent any
concrete runs on the functional parts of the bearing (this technique is not much recommended).
6 Working up of the bearing after pouring the deck (temporary bearings are used until the deck has been completely
poured). Final bearings may sometimes be placed on the lower raised embossments.
Special cases
composite steel concrete and metal structures
when the slab is poured, the bearings that support the steel frame are subject to significant rotations that can
exceed rotations in service. This usually requires the use of temporary bearings during this construction phase;
due to its flexibility, the underside of the steel structure is usually not horizontal at the level of the final bearings; a
metal wedge is inserted between the bearing and the lower member of the structure, in order to create a horizontal
seating. This wedge has a minimum thickness of 40 mm and is machined with two plane faces (see T47-816-3
article 6.2). The horizontality tolerance of the skew wedge shall be less than 3 / (see T47-816-3 article 6.13).
The pot bearing is fixed by screws onto this skew wedge.
installation of anti-advance device

These devices are put into place when the bearing could otherwise advance (see datasheets No. VIII-1 for laminated
elastomeric rubber bearings and No. VIII-2 for pot bearings).
Raised embossments shall have a minimum overlap of 5 cm from stops.
Check existence of reference documentation

bearing installation drawing; With the data necessary for assembly
(particularly dimensions, levels, lateral
and longitudinal positions, tolerances,
quality of materials from which the
raised embossments are made)
raised embossment construction drawings. With the nature and thickness of the
formwork, the grill reinforcement
provided to reinforce raised
embossments and the planned
arrangements for jacking
Check the location of the lower raised embossments Tape Tolerance from theoretical bridge
and arrangements for jacking axels: 1 cm for the plan position of
the raised embossments
Suitability test (if applicable) This test is recommended to produce

raised embossments by caulking, by
grouting or by gravity pouring for large
bearings.
It consists of making a control raised

embossment under construction
conditions (identical dimensions,
clearly specified operators, weather
conditions similar to those for the
construction period).
STOP POINT (acceptance of suitability)

3.2.- During the work
3.2.1.- Check of lower raised embossments
When the laminated elastomeric bearing is placed on the raised embossment
Raised embossment poured in a levelled formwork

Check preparation of the raised embossment location Visual See datasheet No. VII-6 "Concrete
(repair); construction joints"
Check raised embossment reinforcement; Visual Number and diameter of grill

reinforcement, cover
Check the watertightness, the wedging and the level of Visual

the formwork (horizontality); Spirit-
level
Conformity of the concrete or the wedging product; Registration to the NF mark (wedging
products) desirable
Check the levelling of the concrete or wedging product; Tape Formwork height
STOP POINT (authorization of use of products)
Monitoring the use of micro concrete (or special See datasheets No. VII-4 "Vibration"
wedging mortars); and VII-5 "Curing of concrete and
stripping"
Check planeness and horizontality of the upper raised Spirit- - 1 mm tolerance on the raised
embossment surface; level embossment surface
Check the top dimension of the lower raised Precision - tolerance of 10 mm from an
embossment. level absolute mark;
- tolerance of 10 mm from a raised
embossment on the same line of
bearings for a cast in situ structure;
- tolerance of 5 mm from a raised
embossment on the same line of
bearings for a prefabricated structure.
Case in which the pot bearing is placed on flowing mortar
Check watertightness and wedging of the formwork; Visual
Check the mortar height; min 30 mm, max 50 mm
Place the bearing and check the horizontality of the Spirit-

bearing. level

STOP POINT (authorization to use products)
Check the quality of the contact between the mortar and the bearing on the periphery, after stripping;
Check the bearing levelling dimension (tolerances identical to above).
Case in which the (pot) bearing is placed and fixed before construction of the lower raised embossment
See STOP POINT in datasheet No. VIII-2 "Pot bearings"
Raised embossment made by grouting or gravity

pouring
Conformity of products; Product accepted for the NF mark or
special products accepted after
suitability test (for rapid hardening
products)
Installation conditions; Manufacturer's instructions
Conformity of equipment means; See construction procedure
Check raised embossment height; Maximum un-reinforced height
= 50 mm
Check the formwork watertightness; Shall resist expansion effects of the

wedging product
Arrangements to prevent air bubbles from being Construction procedure

trapped under the bearing.
This ticklish method is usually not
Raised embossment made by caulking
used for making the lower pad.
However, if it is to be used
see "Upper raised embossment made
by caulking "
3.2.2.- Installation of bearings
See No. VIII-1 "Laminated elastomeric bearings " and VIII-2 "Pot bearings"
3.2.3.- Check upper raised embossments
3.2.3.1 Prefabricated upper raised embossment

Check raised embossment dimensions; Tape Minimum thickness: 6 cm
Check the location in the deck formwork; Conformity with the construction
drawing
Check the wedging efficiency; The prefabricated small slab shall not
move while the deck is being
concreted
Check the watertighness is complete between the deck Visual

formwork and the prefabricated small slab .

STOP POINT (authorization to concrete the deck)
3.2.3.2 Upper raised embossment cast at the same Note: correct construction of this
time as the deck raised embossment requires that the
formwork should be constructed
carefully and precisely with a
possibility of stripping in this very
small area. This requires the
preparation of a detailed procedure.
Check the formwork and its stability;

See procedure
Check watertightness of the formwork around the Visual Protect functional parts of the pot
periphery of the bearing; bearing
Check that the formwork is perfectly clean before The upper pad formwork is a low
concreting; point at which various debris (binding
wire, etc.) can collect.
Check reinforcement.
STOP POINT (authorization to concrete the deck)
3.2.3.3 Upper raised embossment made by caulking

Conformity of products; Used during suitability tests
Installation conditions; Manufacturer's instructions
Conformity of equipment means; See construction procedure
Check formwork support devices. Shall resist lateral ramming of mortar

(see compilation of standard practice
Stra/LCPC - Publics Works Central
Research Laboratory)
STOP POINT (caulking authorization)
Ditto lower raised embossment made

3.2.3.4 Upper raised embossment made by
by grouting or pouring by gravity. In
grouting
this case, it is usually necessary to
provide vents through the deck
thickness to prevent air bubbles from
getting trapped near the top.
3.3.- On acceptance
See datasheets No. VIII-1 "Laminated elastomeric bearings" and VIII-2 "Pot bearings".


Standard P18-821: Special products for hydraulic concrete constructions Hydraulic binder based levelling and
sealing products - Guaranteed standardized characteristics;
List of products accepted for the NF mark Special products for use in hydraulic concrete construction, can be
viewed on the AFNOR (Standard French Organization) site (http://www.afnor .fr);
Standard T47-816-3: Rubber bearings. Pot bearings. Part 3: installation of pot bearings;
Standard NF EN 1337-11 (T47-820-11): Structural bearings - Part 11: Transport, storage and installation;
Compilation of standard practice Environment of laminated elastomeric bridge bearings Technical guide .
Stra/LCPC, October 1978, 51 p. (Stra reference F7810);


"Jacking / Wedging"
1. Purpose of this document

The purpose of this document is to describe essential
work done by the Consulting engineer during jacking
operations of a bridge.
This document, together with datasheets No. VIII-1

"Laminated elastomeric bridge bearings", No. VIII-2
"Pot bearings" and No. VIII-3 "Raised embossments",
describes how to achieve the supply and installation of
jacking measures respecting safety rules and rules for
satisfactory operation of the structure.
2. Reminders
By definition, jacking is the operation that consists of
lifting or lowering a deck using jacks (arranged as close
as possible to existing bearings, unless there are any
special jacking arrangements). In general, the deck is
kept in a reference plane parallel to the original plane.
A jacking operation is necessary in the following cases:
replacement of temporary construction bearings by

final bearings;
relaxation of distorted elastomeric bearings;
settlement of bearings;
positioning of the deck at its final level when it has
been constructed higher in order to maintain
sufficient clearance.
The challenges and risks related to this phase are severe

in terms of: Deck jacking operation
(Clermont-Ferrand LRPC [Regional Public Works
safety of users and personnel (movement of very Laboratory] photos)
large masses);
damage to structures (deck and support);
durability of installed bearings.
Therefore close involvement of the Consulting

engineer is essential.
Chapter VIII: Bearings 1/5 Datasheet No. VIII-4: Jacking / Wedging

3.1.- Before the jacking operation properly speaking

A contradictory inspection of the structure shall be carried out before any work is done to limit subsequent disputes
(particularly if there is any sign of damage to the structure).
Check that reference documents exist and are

signed
design note; Preliminary check:
- determination of allowable transverse and
longitudinal level differences;
- justification of stressed zones (stringers,
crossheads, transverse girders, etc.);
- evaluation of loads (with or without
traffic).
specific jacking procedure (to be supplied by the

Contractor), particularly including:
- the jacking diagram (number of pumps, hydraulic For the external inspection, this procedure
diagram, number, positioning and type of jacks); shall be analyzed (possibly with the support
- the jacking program (order of jacking of bearing of an RST [Scientific & Technical Network]
lines, number of steps and corresponding heights, specialist), carefully considering
provisions specified for restarting jacking for which displacement monitoring
a second set of jacks may be necessary depending instrumentation (allowable tolerances)
on tolerances, provisions for wedging, etc.). and safety measures foreseen to
compensate for failures in hydraulic circuits
(screws on jacks, wedging) and
displacement measurement devices.
Acceptance of jacking, wedging and inspection During the preparation phase

equipment
pumps, jacks, manometers; Check capacities, calibration, setting the
tare, precision of manometers, lock nuts,
pressure limitation, etc.
wedges, distribution plates; Check the number, type, thickness and

dimensions
displacement monitoring equipment. Check the calibration of gauges,

measurement range, condition of reglets,
precision of comparators
Note that the same inspections shall have been carried out on the standby equipment provided for jacking, wedging
and monitoring of displacements.

Check freedom of displacement of the deck at the

following points:
expansion joints;
safety barrier rails;
pedestrian parapets;
formwork between the gravel guard low wall and

structural end parts;
sound screens;
network problems (water, gas, telephone, public

lighting, electricity, etc.).
Temporary supports (fitted with jacks)
Stringer or crosshead (normal case during bridge

construction).
make sure that jacks are correctly positioned on raised

embossments or the jacking area, and that contact
exists between jacks, the distribution plates and the
structure
Bents In this configuration, requirements

according to the regulations for temporary
structures shall be applied (see (chapter 4 in
CCTG - General Technical Clauses - part
65A). Check temporary works supervisors
duties.
Cantilevers
check the connection device to the bearing (anchorage,

clamping) and to the parts themselves (reinforced
concrete or metal).
Check equipment installation
pumps; Operation, limitation, standby

jacks; Operation, standby
manometer; Condition
gauges, reglets; Adjustment as a function of the travel
distance, attachment, protection (wind, false
manoeuvres)
wedges; Present close to the place of use
transverse retaining system (if applicable); Conforming with the drawing
jacking logic controller (if applicable); Configuration, existence of pressure or
displacement alarm thresholds and
particularly check of their activation and
possibilities for printing the results

directly (see note in 3.2)

Check neutralization of the system in case
of an incident on a gauge if the operation is
servo-controlled
special instructions in case of failure of the equipment Special procedure
(pressure or displacement)
STOP POINT (jacking authorization)
Reminder: the control station and agents responsible for monitoring shall not be located in risk areas.
3.2.- During the jacking/wedging operation
Jacking
Check that displacements between jacking
Check real loads on "separation" of the structure
points respect tolerances fixed in the design
(simplified measurement of bearing reactions);
note
Check that the jacking program is respected and
particularly check progress of the different phases Note: when displacements are monitored
(start, middle, end) and fixed tolerances; centrally (automatic or lifting controller), it
Check information in the monitoring sheet at each level is recommended, at previously defined
that requires that pressures and displacements should levels or whenever an anomaly occurs, that
be mentioned for the jacked line (and others if they are results should be printed (screen copy)
influenced); directly rather than processing the data later
on.
Transverse displacement check;
Special inspection for execution of jacking restarts; Jack travel distance less than the total
displacement
Check safety wedging to assure that fixed tolerances are Jack lock nuts are screwed tighter as
respected even following an incident on a jack or pipe. progress is made
Wedging
Check that planned measures are respected (position of The challenge in this inspection is even
wedges, stacking, tightness of lock nuts); greater when the structure is to be operated
during this operation.
Check the survey of all altitudes after removal and

verification of the tolerances.
The structure is not authorized to return onto the bearings See datasheets VIII-1, VIII-2 and VIII-3
until after acceptance of the raised embossments (see
"Raised embossments" datasheet) and the bearings in
position.

STOP POINT Return the structure to its original position: removal of jacks
Check altitudes (level after removal of jacks and Final dimensions shall be recorded and
settlement) and check tolerances; compared with expected dimensions for the
final acceptance.
Examination of the structure when loading bearings to See datasheets VIII-1 and VIII-2
check that there is no damage.

Compilation of standard practice - Environment of laminated elastomeric bearings - Technical guide. Stra/LCPC
(Publics Works Central Research Laboratory), October 1978, 51 p. (Stra reference F7810);
ITSEOA (technical order for the supervision and maintenance of civil engineering structures): Section two - Part
13 "Bearings" - Technical guide. Stra, 2003, 67 p. (Stra reference F0230).

Chapter IX: Road restraint systems
Datasheet No. IX-1

Installation of road
restraint systems
(Safety barriers and
pedestrian parapets) Pedestrian parapet
1. Presentation
This document relates to the installation of road
restraint systems (safety barriers and pedestrian
parapets) on a bridge deck.
The purpose of a road restraint system is to assure the

safety of road users and third parties underneath the Safety barrier for level N [YM2]( Stra/CTOA photo Bridge
bridge. Strict regulations are applicable for road Engineering Department)
restraint systems: safety barriers are approved and
pedestrian parapets shall comply with a performance
standard.
Approval, or conformity with the standard, certifies

that the product is suitable for its use but it is
particularly important that the said product is installed
in accordance with the description accompanying the
approval text. An error in installation or a
nonconformity from one of the drawings defining the
product in the technical annex accompanying the Safety barrier for level H [YM3]
approval text may have consequences on the (Stra/CTOA photo)
effectiveness of the device. If any functional problems
arise following an accident, then the person responsible PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION
for the installation may be held liable. For example, it is
not impossible that courts will examine details about In principle, these equipments are not to be painted on
whether or not the said instructions were respected site because the only protection accepted in standards
based on an expertise. Therefore careful attention shall and approval texts is industrial protection by hot
be paid to the following recommendations. galvanizing. However, this protection may be
complemented by a coat of paint also applied in the
Installation should also take account of the advantages workshop, using industrial procedures.
of good durability of the product and ease of repair
after an accident (repairs that shall be made respecting Moreover, in all cases, the inspector must assure that all
the basic rules for the product, as demonstrated by liable to rust parts are protected against corrosion
recent jurisprudence). (included non-standard equipment or accessory).
Special isolation arrangements for steel accessories used
Before installation, it should be checked that road to fix aluminium elements shall not be forgotten to
restraint systems on approaches and connections prevent any corrosion due to a galvanic couple.
between different road restraint systems have been
fully taken into account, particularly their compatibility Therefore, the inspector shall take care to detect any
with the different equipment at the end of the structure metallic part of any origin whatsoever that has not
(inspection pits, evacuation of water, footpath, etc.), received sufficient protection and shall inform the
engineer to get the part painted before installation, and
The choice of the road restraint system shall be at least before the concrete parts are stained by rust.
considered at the preliminary design stage, and this
choice cannot be modified during the work phase.
Chapter IX: Road restraint systems 1 Datasheet No. IX-1: Installation of road restraint systems

Caution
The following actions apply to the installation of road restraint systems on a bridge for:
pedestrians (pedestrian parapet 1 );

light vehicles (safety barrier with level N 1) except for safety barriers used in priority out of the bridges, namely GS
model barriers;
heavy good vehicles (safety barrier with level H 1), except for safety barriers used in priority out of the bridges,
namely concrete barriers (models GBA, DBA, MVL, ) and some steel barriers (model BHO, ) for which
reference shall be made to texts dealing with these products and to the construction inspection as it is made on
road based on construction monitoring documents for these products. In most cases, installation on the bridge is
the continuity of a construction site for road section and will only form a small part of it. The main reference
documents in this situation are standards NF P98-413, NF P98-420, NF P98-431 and NF P98-443.
Nature of the work Remarks
Check that reference documentation exists

Definition of stop points in particular
(quality documents)
Quality Assurance Procedure (QAP) for
Installation;
element construction drawings, signed in Short specs registration, anchor drawing for pedestrian parapet
advance by the Consulting engineer posts or layout drawing for safety barrier support plates, special
arrangements for expansion joints, position of supports with
respect to the empty of the joint, etc.
installation plan and construction program; Order of operations and planning of the works
PPSPS (Prevention plan related to safety and Imposed recommendations regarding safety (often the final
health protection). pedestrian parapet replaces the site pedestrian parapet without
necessarily performing the same functions)
Acceptance of anchor zones
The QAP of the company placing the road restraint system normally includes a stop point at his arrival on site and
that applies to acceptance of anchor zones.
It is recommended that the points mentioned in annex A should be verified as a minimum during this particularly
important stop point in which the work quality is checked.
CLEAR THE STOP POINT signatures of persons involved on the site monitoring sheet;
(with or without reserve(s) or motivated refusal)
production of an anomaly sheet if required.
1 See 3 describing the documentation in force
Check the suitability of storage areas Avoid re-handling (unsuitable handling machinery). Check
availability with other participants
Check on conformity of procured elements
traceability of components; Batch N, delivery forms, etc.

In the case of NF certified products, check that the NF marking
exists
geometry; Conformity with construction drawings
appearance; No deteriorated or damaged pieces that could reduce quality

when straighteningIt shall be formally refused that the
Contractor makes anchorage for a pedestrian parapet in
which there are visible manufacturing defects
check protection of steel elements against In principle, an on-site verification of protection

corrosion; thicknesses can be made for information purposes using
an inspection instrument (ELCOMTRE or MIKROTEST
or similar), that can easily be obtained (see Bibliography).
Although these instruments can be easily handled, training
should be provided on their use before using them on site
(remember to adjust to zero before starting).
This verification can also be made during the works and during
acceptance.
assemblies;
welding; Thickness of weld seams
anchor fasteners (verification of the quality of

safety barrier anchor bolts);
check delivered quantities. Conformity with the order

2.2.1.- General
Make sure that previously defined provisions described in quality documents are actually applied and are capable of
assuring the required quality.
2.2.2.- Installation operations properly speaking

2.2.2.1.- Pedestrian parapet
Caution with provisional wedges using dry wood: the wood will swell it is soaked in water, and sometimes becomes
difficult to remove, and can even cause spalling of the edge of the recess.
Stop point: Verify the points given in the list in annex B after wedging and before giving authorization to anchor
the pedestrian parapet.
CLEAR THE STOP POINT authorize concreting of anchorages in recess

(with or without reserve(s) or motivated refusal) or
authorize controlled tightening of anchor bolts.
2.2.2.2.- Safety barriers
- Case of concrete/metal safety barriers (Models BN1, BN2, )
For construction of the "reinforced concrete" part of road restraint systems, refer to the corresponding MEMOAR
collection of datasheets (execution of reinforcement, placement of concrete, formwork, curing, etc.).
For monitoring the installation of steel elements used with some road restraint systems, refer to the "metal safety
barriers" chapter given below.
- For metal safety barriers

check the position and adjustment in level and plan; centering on starter reinforcement
check temporary wedging for good concreting; possibility of temporarily using support attachment
screws on the anchor part for this wedging
check the presence and stability of two anchor

distributors (anchor type BN4 or similar);
check planeness and horizontality of the anchor plate; since wedgings is prohibited between the plate of the
anchor part and the plate of the support, it is preferable
to make the adjustment using the anchor part fixed to
the support
adjustment of supports; Reminder of placement tolerances:
vertically; out of vertical tolerance = 0.5 cm over the height

in alignment. out of alignment tolerance in plan or in elevation = 1
cm from the ideal line over the entire length of the
bridge
Stop point: Verify the points given in the list in Annex C before giving authorization to concrete the
anchor zone.
authorize concreting of anchorages in the recess

CLEAR THE STOP POINT
or
(with or without reserve(s) or motivated refusal)
authorize controlled tightening of anchor bolts.
2.2.3.- Monitoring fastening

2.2.3.1.- Pedestrian parapet
- For fastening by anchorage in recess
Nature of the work remarks

conformity of anchor concrete or mortar B35 concrete with size grading adapted to the volume to be
specified in the Quality Assurance Procedure filled, possibly designed for resistance to frost - thaw cycles and
(QAP); de-icing salts
cleanliness of recess and lack of water;
check the time between production and do not allow any added water that would cause shrinkage cracks
installation;
check the surface of the anchor concrete. thorough surfacing adjusted such that water cannot collect
adjacent to the anchorage
- For fastening by plates and anchor bars or bolts
- sealing in waiting
Note: The sealing of bars in waiting are already embedded at this level of progress of the work. Therefore the
inspector will go on to the next phase "monitoring tightening of the anchors".
- in set concrete (drilled holes + anchorage)

identification of cornice reinforcements; (examination of the reinforcement drawing and for example
confirmation by Ferroscan electromagnetic detection)
tracing of anchors;
check the drilling diameter and depth;
check that the hole is cleaned;
fill in the hole; using a product with the NF mark in the category of sealing
products (rules and installation conditions defined in the
technical instructions that should appear in the QAP)
placement of the threaded rod. positioning using a template
2.2.3.2.- Safety barriers

reception of the anchor concrete;
Structural concrete fabricated, transported and installed under
the same conditions as the concrete of the structure
vibration; The diameter of poker vibrators should be adapted to the

reinforcement dimensions
check of good concreting Sound anchor parts with a hammer after disassembly of
support (1 support out of 10)
Take samples for external inspection

Check that the concrete actually rises through the hole in the
anchor plate
2.2.4.- Monitoring of anchor tightness

- presence of all rods;
- check protection of nuts or screw heads;
- controlled tightness of nuts using a calibrated

torque wrench.
2.2.5.- Reconditioning of protected surfaces

The check on reconditioning of surfaces adjacent to any damage shall be done in accordance with the requirements
in CCTG (General Technical Clauses) part 56.
2.3.- On acceptance
In principle, this acceptance operation is the starting point for the guarantee for the anticorrosion protection. It shall
be done in the presence of the contractor, and the pedestrian parapet installation company when it works as a
subcontractor.
It assumes that the checks mentioned in the above stop points have been done.

general appearance inspection;
verification of dimensions;
check the tightness of anchor bolts or rods and Under the conditions fixed by standards or technical documents
fasteners used for the product, by sampling; with the approval text for the product
check the watertightness around the anchor bolts;
satisfactory reconditioning of all damaged zones;
check the thickness of the corrosion protection;
check the passage of expansion joints; Joint gap compared with the gap in the expansion joint
examination of the results of inspections done in

the framework of the works;
check that the site monitoring sheet has been
correctly filled in;
check the connection with the road restraint
systems on approaches of the bridge;
hand over the maintenance instructions. See instructions model in the guide GC (see cl. 3 below)

in the Stra technical guide GC collection:
Pedestrian parapet Technical guide. Stra, April 1997, 118 p. (Stra reference F9709);
Safety barriers for retaining lightweight vehicles Safety barriers with level N on shoulder Layout in Central
Part of the bridge" Technical guide. Stra, September 2001, 187 p. (Stra reference F0115);
Safety barriers for retaining heavy good vehicles Safety barriers with level H2 or H3 Technical guide. Stra,
September 99, 161 p. (Stra reference F9916);
Bridge lateral equipment Protection against corrosion Technical guide. Stra, November 1996, 43 p. (Stra
reference F9672);
CCTG part 56 "Protection of metal structures against corrosion";
The standards listed below;
XP P98-405 Road safety barriers - Pedestrian parapet for bridges and civil
engineering structures Design, manufacturing, implementation
FD P98-406-1 Road safety barriers - Model S8 steel Composition, operation,
installation and mounting conditions, components
NF EN 1317-1 Road restraint systems - Part 1 : Terminology and general
criteria for test methods
NF EN 1317-2 Road restraint systems - Part 2: Performance classes, impact test
acceptance criteria and test methods for safety barriers
NF P98-409 Road safety barriers Performance, classification and
qualification criteria (to be replaced in the short term by NF
standards EN 1317-1 et 2)
NF P98-410 to 413 Road safety barriers - Steel guard rails (profiles A and B)
XP P98-421 Road safety barriers BN4 safety barriers Composition,
operation, holding performances, installation and mounting
conditions, components
XP P98 422 Road safety barriers Reinforced concrete and metal BN1 and
BN2 safety barriers - Composition, operation, holding
performances, installation and mounting conditions,
components
XP P98-424 Road safety barriers - BN5 safety barrier - Composition,
operation, holding performances, installation and mounting
conditions, components
The approval texts listed below;
Approval text Name of the barrier Containment level Constituent
material
C96.88 dated 3.12.96 GCDF N2 Steel

C99-64 dated 16.09.99 TETRA S13 H2 Steel
C99-64 dated 16.09.99 TETRA S16 H3 Steel
C 95-68 dated 28.07.95 BN4-16 H3 Steel
C 98-09 dated 06.01.98 Bhab H3 Steel
NF mark - Road equipment Safety barriers, issued by ASQUER mandated by AFNOR CERTIFICATION.
ANNEX A
STOP POINT
FOR ACCEPTANCE OF ANCHOR ZONES
FOR PEDESTRIAN PARAPETS
Fixing by anchorage in recess Fixing by plates and anchor rods or bolts

longitudinal and transverse layout of recess; longitudinal and transverse layout of anchors;
dimensions of recess (check dimensions of one recess verticality of anchor rods and length of the visible part;
out of 10);
conditions for extraction of formwork installed to make cleanliness of anchor rods and particularly lack of
recess; laitance;
cleanliness of recess and definition of means used to condition of the finished level above the cornice
clean them (if necessary carrying out tests); (possibility of adjusting the verticality of the support
provided with a plate).
lack of water and definition of means to eliminate it;
lack of splinter, spalling or cracks facing or close to
recess.
FOR SAFETY BARRIERS

- Metal (type BN4)

examination of starter reinforcements; diameter, spacing, number according to the reinforcement
drawing
spacing between anchors;
position of anchors with respect to the expansion joint

gap.
ANNEX B
STOP POINT
BEFORE EMBEDDING PEDESTRIAN
PARAPETS

check that imposed tolerances are respected: It may be accepted for supports to be perpendicular to a
alignment of the handrail, verticality, alignment and sloping longitudinal section, unless specifically
elevation of supports; mentioned in the contract. It is easy to verify the
alignment by eye.
Reminder of installation tolerances:
max out of plumb 0.5 cm over the height;

maximum alignment error in plan and in elevation
1 cm from the ideal line over the entire length of the
bridge concerned.
quality of the concrete or mortar for the anchorage; If rods are anchored in drilled holes, the inspector shall
make sure that the mortar used has received the NF
mark in the category of anchor products
correct setting of the coupling(s) at the expansion

joints;
effectiveness of temporary wedging if anchoring in a It is not recommended that wood wedges should be used
recess; to position supports in recess: risk of the wood swelling
and the risk of not being able to remove the wedges after
anchorage. It is preferable to use templates and brackets
for this temporary support
no void under the support plates if embedded by

anchors;
presence of all anchor rods.
ANNEX C
STOP POINT
BEFORE CONCRETING ANCHOR ZONE FOR
METAL SAFETY BARRIERS
check conformity of spacing between supports, correct Reminder of installation tolerances :

position of anchor plates (level, orientation, etc.),
check that anchor parts are conforming in structural max out of plumb 0.5 cm over the height ;
reinforcement, the stability of anchor parts, recess,
etc. ; alignment: 1 cm from the ideal line over the entire
length of the bridge.
check conformity of the structural reinforcement in the
anchor zone of the road restraint systems;
concrete quality.
Chapter X: Waterproofing layers
Guide for construction on bridges - MEMOAR Collection of technical datasheets
Datasheet No. X-1

Effective action can only be taken through a
preventive inspection at the time that the concrete is
poured. Once the concrete has set, it will be too late.
"Working up of This is why it is essential to assure that the
corresponding directives describing requirements for
waterproofing layers" surface conditions are satisfied. Allow for the use of
reference documents that consist of standard plates
(see CCTG - General Technical Clauses - part 65A,
comment on article 74.4).
1. Purpose and general about
waterproofing layers Once the concrete has set, make sure that it has not
been irremediably soiled by products that would
This document relates to the working up of the impregnate it (gasoline, gas oil, oil, etc.) and that
waterproofing layer on a road-bridge deck. would reduce the bond between the waterproofing
layer and the support.
The purpose of a waterproofing layer is to protect the
bridge structure, and mainly the deck slab or slab (in The most frequent cause of such soiling is
other words the horizontal parts) against the harmful compressors. If it is impossible to park them out of
effects of runoff water and noxious products the deck, then local protection for concrete shall be
transported by it (mainly but not only deicing salts). provided, or even better receptacles should be
The cost of this equipment is not negligible, and the fastened under the machinery.
risk of a waterproofing defect making the equipement
ineffective should not equal to zero. The Remember that concrete cure other than simply
waterproofing layer is essential for the durability sprinkling with water and using curing products
and perenniality of the structure. necessarily requires a bond suitability test to check
that the curing product used has no influence on
This is why it is important to take the following bond with the support Usually, this means that the
aspects into consideration: curing product has to be removed by sanding and the
responsible persons for this operation shall be named
choice of the technique and the Contractor very at the time of the contract or when the curing
early in the project (in CCTG [general technical technique is accepted.
clauses] part 67, Title I, Annex 2, article 3, it is
strongly recommended that this choice should be Before the waterproofing layer is placed, a detailed
made "before the service order to pour the deck concrete [or the contradictory inspection of the extrados shall be
first concrete of the prefabricated element: beam or segment"]); carried out in the presence of the waterproofing
check the competence and qualification of the contractor (See. annex 1 and CCTG part 67 title I,
application contractor (by analysis of installation art. 9.1.3) to check that the support is conforming
references and by contacts with the Consulting with the waterproofing contractors contract. The
engineers concerned); main Contractor is responsible for assuring
conformity with CCTG part 65A, even if
provide an appropriate and complete control plan
reconditioning techniques may be left to the
(internal, external and outside inspections);
competence of the waterproofing contractor.
at the time of concreting, make sure that the
extrados has the required qualities and that provisions
at the bridge edges or around the side of the
waterproofing layer have been applied correctly
(upstands in sealed rebates, connexions to
penetrations, etc.) ;
assure that the work is not done in haste at the end
of the construction period or in bad weather.
Surfacing of bridge decks
The waterproofing layer shall be applied on an

appropriate support, to facilitate installation and to
assure good durability of the product.
Chapter X: Waterproofing 1 Datasheet No. X-1: Working up of waterproofing layers



Check that reference documentation exists
(quality documents)
Technical Advice or similar document;
installation manual; Can only be viewed on site under the control of the
application contractor
Quality Assurance Procedure (QAP).
check that procured products are conforming - If the waterproofing system to be placed has not received a
with the order; Technical Advice or similar document Identification
tests according to the procedure in part 67, title I, article
8.2, repeated in article III.5 in the Technical Advices
- Check labels (title, expiration date in plain text) and the
integrity of the packaging
check product storage conditions See QAP and Technical Advice
check conformity of equipment means See QAP
make sure that application teams are qualified See QAP
check the support condition See. annex 1

2.2.1.- General
Make sure that previously defined provisions described mainly in the installation manual are actually applied and are
capable of assuring the required quality.
2.2.2.- Actual construction operations

2.2.2.1.- Actions common to all waterproofing layers
Reminder: At this level of the works, the support has been accepted and therefore the selected waterproofing
system can be placed.

a) Application of primers (CCI: Cold Coat Impregnation or resin)
Verification
Points to be checked Remarks
means
Cleanliness of support; Visual No dirt after reception of the support
no humidity on the support; Visual No application on a damp surface or under the rain
nature of the applied product; Visual Conformity with the QAP
conservative sampling; Hermetically For separate components, take samples respecting

closed mix proportions
receptacles
application methods; Visual See installation manual
appearance after application. Visual No omissions or accumulation
b) Treatment of singular points (rebats, upstands)
Check that the treatment of special points Visual, tape Note: in some cases, this phase is not the last and an
(upstands, penetrations, etc.) is inspection of these elements may take place at any time
conforming during installation of the complex
Refer to the installation manual for the product and

the QAP
c) Acceptance of the waterproofing
This acceptance operation is important.. In the case of a separate contract dealing with waterproofing only, in
principle the acceptance operation is the starting point for the duration of the contractual guarantee (5 years) to be
specified in the contract (see CCTG, part 67, title I, annex 1 related to the CCAP - Particular Conditions of
Contract). If waterproofing is subcontracted, this acceptance may be useful if it is necessary to distribute
responsibilities for subsequent degradations before placement of the bituminous surfacing layers.
2.2.2.- Actions specific to a waterproofing layer type
Mastic Asphalt waterproofing (See. annex 2)
Bituminous surfacing layer (Bituminous concrete)
2nd layer of coarse aggregates mastic asphalt

1st layer of mastic asphalt
Isolation layer
(perforated kraft paper or glass mesh)
Bituminous Cold Coat Impregnation Stra/CTOA photo Bridge
Engineering Department
Concrete support
Waterproofing by single layer prefabricated sheet (See.

Annex 3)
Prefabricated Bituminous sheet

(based on polymer bitumen)
Bituminous Cold Coat Impregnation or resin
Stra/CTOA photo
Waterproofing by prefabricated sheet + Asphalt (See. annex 3)

2nd layer of coarse aggregates mastic asphalt

Prefabricated Bituminous sheet (based on
polymer bitumen)
Bituminous Cold Coat Impregnation or resin

primer
1.
Concrete support
Stra/CTOA photo
FMAS (thin adhesive film of resin) type waterproofing (See. annex 4)
Gravel bedding layer
Waterproofing layer cast in place (resin)

Primer
Stra/CTOA photo
Concrete
Waterproofing by MHC processes (See. annex 5)
Bituminous surfacing layer
(base or wearing course)
2.
Protection of the binder layer by aggregates
Sprayed pure bituminous binder: bond
3.
layer / waterproofing
20 to 25 mm waterproofing bituminous
4. micro-concrete used with finisher)
Impregnation and bond layer (Bituminous Cold
Coat Impregnation or bituminous emulsion)
Stra/CTOA photo

STER 81 : Surfacing, waterproofing and wearing

3. Documents to be supplied to the
courses for bridge decks Sub-files for surfacing of
Consulting engineer concrete support and its updates No. 1, 2 and 3;
Contractor's Quality Assurance Procedure; Technical Advices in force (the list of Technical
Stra Technical Advice for the product or Advices is available on the Stra Internet site:
equivalent (see 5 in the Technical Advice www.setra.equipement.gouv.fr);
presentation note); the Secretariat of the "Commission for Road Bridge
quality record documents (clearance of stop point, Waterproofing Technical Advices" at Stra: 46
anomaly sheets, corrective action sheets). Avenue A. Briand - BP 100 - 92225 Bagneux Cedex
Tel. : 01.46.11.32.13
4. Documents to be viewed on the site
standard plates. A set of plates is on sale at Stra as
the most recent revision index of the installation reference F0232;
Manual of the waterproofing system;
standard NF P98-216-1 Tests on surface courses.
Site book. Determination of the macrotexture - Part 1: sand
5. For further information refer to: patch test.
CCTG part 65A and its addendum (Construction

of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete civil
engineering structures. Special part No. 2000-3,
August 2000;
CCTG part 67 title 1: Waterproofing of road
bridges with cement concrete support. Special part
No. 85-32 bis;

Annex 1
Examination of the
support
1. Purpose
This annex relates to preparation and acceptance of the support for a concrete bridge deck prior to construction of
the waterproofing layer.
2. Work to be done
Meeting between the various participants to examine the The purpose of this meeting is to determine if
deck. the condition of the support is consistent with
the selected waterproofing type
Consulting engineer;
Civil Engineering Contractor;
waterproofing contractor;
external inspection.
2.2.- Examination methods

2.2.1.- General
Make sure that measures planned for preparation of the support are actually applied and are sufficient to achieve the
required requirements.
2.2.2.- Criteria adopted

The criteria mentioned below are critical points, and the stop point finalizes the examination of all of these points.
Work by a
specialist
1- Search for planeness defects
general; On 10 m No See CCTG part 65A, 2 cm max

difference
locals. 2 m straight edge No 8 mm max difference

20 cm straight No 3 mm max difference
edge
2- Examination of the concrete surface

texture
roughness; Standard plates Yes Part 67 title 1 art 9.1.2.2

Sand patch Yes According to standards in force
Comparison with No According to CCTG part 65A chap.
the initial 7, art 74.4
suitability test

presence of laitance; Visual No None

Sounding with No
hammer
bond of resurfacing; Mallet No Shall not sound "hollow".
Dynamometer* Yes According to standards in force

See. STER 81, sub-file ST, table 4
surface cohesion. Visual Yes No powder or deliquescent state
3- Search for soiling
oil products (grease, oil, gas oil, etc. ; Visual inspection No Products to be eliminated
completely (see recommendations
in STER 81, ST sub-file, 5.2.2.3)
curing product residues; Information from No "

civil engineering
grout; Visual inspection No "
earth, dirt, clay, etc. Visual inspection No "
4- Examination of construction provisions
upstands and downstands; Visual No Check conformity of shapes and

examination, tape dimensions specified on drawings
signed by the Consulting engineer
condition and geometry of drip grooves; " No
formwork not flush; " No
rebats for plates of water evacuation " No

devices.
2.3.- Clear the stop point
STOP POINT BEFORE PLACING THE WATERPROOFING LAYER
(See support examination report)
Clear the stop point Write one or more anomaly sheets

Annex 1a
Examination report for the

support
BRIDGE INDICATION :
Examine the entire bridge surface
Partial examination of the bridge surface
Examined zone::
...
...
GENERAL INFORMATION :
Participants in examination of the support:
Title of the waterproofing process or the selected product:
Concrete age : Use of a curing product: Yes
No
OBSERVATIONS TO BE MADE ON SITE :
1) Defects affecting the geometry and texture of deck concrete:
Parameter Conforming Not conforming Comments

Geometry (CCTG part 65A)
General planeness (depression, etc.)
Local planeness (hollows, unevenness,
etc.)
Roughness
2) Defects concerning the surface condition of the concrete:
Parameter Conforming Not conforming Comments

Support cohesion
Bond of resurfacing
Cracking yes no

3) Soiling:
grout
dust, earth
oil products
4) Defects affecting singular points:
drip grooves (condition and geometry)
formwork not flush
sharp edges
DECISION:*
A) The support is conforming, the Contractor can apply the waterproofing layer now:
Over the entire examined zone
Over the following zones
B) The support is not conforming, the Contractor shall present to the Consulting engineer with proposals for
corrective actions on non-conforming points mentioned in III.
Note: A waterproofing layer cannot be placed until the zones considered have been made conform and the stop
point has been formally cleared in a new report.
Prepared in.. date
The Consulting engineer or his representative
* Cross out the inapplicable comment

Annex 2
Actions specific to working up of mastic

asphalt processes
2sd layer of coarse aggregates mastic asphalt
1st layer of mastic asphalt
Isolation layer (perforated kraft paper or glass mesh)
Bituminous Cold Coat Impregnation (CCI)

Concrete support photo Stra/CTOA
Note: For some of the verification means defined below (for example hygrometers), the inspector may call in an
approved specialist or check that the application contractors equipment is in perfect working condition and that
this equipment is used correctly.
Application of the CCI and the isolation layer (perforated kraft paper or glass mesh)
Apart from points in 2.2.2.1.a, it will be checked:
Verification
means
ambient and deck temperature; Thermometer It is essential to check these parameters before
starting to apply mastic asphalt layers
drying the CCI; Feel Check that drying times are respected
methods of applying the isolation layer. Visual Check overlap of strips and the lack of creases
Special case of the resin primer
Verification
means
time between primer / waterproofing layer; Thermometer - Respect minimum and maximum times
(See placement specifications and technical
datasheets)
- These times are related to the ambient temperature
temperatures; Ambience / Determination of the dew point and the ambient
contact temperature
thermometer
hygrometry; Hygrometer Determination of the hygrometry and the dew point
(see Stra Technical Advice)
check on consumption. Calculation By calculation of the applied quantity (kg) / covered
surface area

Application of the mastic asphalt layer(s)
Verification
means
factory outlet indentation check bulletin; Documentation - This document shall accompany the product
delivery
- Check if the nature and name of the product are

conforming with the Stra Technical Advice
product temperature; Thermometer Conformity with the Stra Technical Advice

installation methods; Visual Conforming with the QAP
dimension of stop rulers; Tape Correspondence with the thickness of the applied
coarse aggregates mastic asphalt
product samples; Molds Take at least two samples from each carrier
mark coated zones (by carrier). Ten-meter Mark these indications on a drawing or a diagram
tape
Acceptance of the coarse aggregates mastic asphalt layer
Verification
means
appearance of the covered deck; Visual Check uniformity and continuity of the covered
surface (no creases, cracks, blisters or swelling, etc) )
All defects shall be corrected
thickness; Tape / Calculate the tonnage / covered surface area ratio

calculation
indentation tests on products put on the By a Check conformity with the Stra Technical Advice
bridge. specialized
laboratory
Application of a thermal protection

Once cooled (few hours), this type of layer can tolerate typical site vehicular traffic.
The traffic of earthwork engines on tires or tracks will not be allowed unless precautions have been taken in
agreement with the waterproofing contractor.

Annex 3
Actions specific to working up of the following

processes :
- Prefabricated single layer sheet (F.P.M.)
- Prefabricated sheet + asphalt (F.P.A.)
2nd layer of coarse aggregates mastic asphalt (in case

of FPA)
Prefabricated Bituminous sheet (based on polymer bitumen)
Bituminous Cold Coat Impregnation or resin primer

Concrete support
photo Stra/CTOA
Application of the CCI

Apart from the points in 2.2.2.1.a, it will be checked:
Verification
means
starting to apply waterproofing layers
drying the CCI. Feel Check that drying times are respected
Special case of the resin primer
Verification
means
time between primer / waterproofing layer; Thermometer - Respect min and max times
(See Installation Manual and technical datasheets)
- These times are related to the ambient temperature
temperatures; Ambience / Determination of the dew point and the ambient

contact temperature
thermometer
hygrometry; Hygrometer Determination of the hygrometry and the dew point

(see Stra Technical Advice)
check on consumption. Calculation By calculation of the applied quantity (kg) / covered

surface area

Application of the prefabricated sheet (F.P.M or F.P.A)
Verification
means
support cleanliness; Visual No dirt after acceptance of the support
presence of humidity if any; Visual See Stra Technical Advice
record ambient and support temperatures; Ambiance / Respect the installation Manual
surface
thermometer
nature of the applied bituminous Labeling Check the exact name of the product compared
prefabricated sheet; with the Stra Technical Advice
roll storage conditions; Visual Vertical storage only
conservative sampling; sample 1m2 in full width
placement means Visual Conforming with the installation manual and the
QAP
upstands in rebats; Visual Check that the sheet is properly engaged in the drip
groove and is welded in the corner
respect working up drawing; Visual Application "in tiles" offset joints

(no more than three sheet thicknesses), strips
parallel to the longitudinal center line of the bridge
respect overlaps; Tape, visual Longitudinal and transverse (see installation manual)
regular melting of the sheet; Visual A slight bulge of molten bitumen shall form in front
of the roller
Do not overheat and avoid creases
close and chamfer the joints; Visual Particularly in the longitudinal direction
roller pressing ; Visual Must be done as the work progresses

Check on cleanliness and effectiveness of the roller
pressing equipment
prevention of risks of damaging the sheet. Visual No vehicle traffic or storage on the sheet before
application of the surfacing layer (FPM) or the
mastic asphalt layer (FPA)

Acceptance of the sheet waterproofing (F.P.M or F.P.A)
Verification
means
[YM3]bond tests; Dynamometer Operation to be done by a specialized organization
Allow for repair of tested zones
search for general placement defects. Visual It is recommended that a specialized organization
Feel should be called in to help.
A special search will be made to find any
discontinuities, blisters, swelling, creasing, burns or
zones with poor bond.
All defects shall be repaired
Thermal protection of the sheet

- For F.P.M: If the Bituminous surfacing layer is not placed quickly (see QAP and Stra Technical Advice) make
sure that the planned measures are actually taken (this will usually involve protection using a geotextile covered
with sand + gravel);
- For F.P.A: A priori, the sheet does not need to be protected, but take account of the time that will elapse before
application of the coarse aggregates mastic asphalt.
Application of the layer of coarse aggregates mastic asphalt (for F.P.A. processes)
Verification
means
ambient and deck temperature; Thermometer See Technical Advice
presence of humidity on the support; Visual No water on the support
factory outlet indentation check bulletin; Documentation This document shall accompany the product
delivery
Check if the nature and name of the product are
conforming with the Stra Technical Advice
asphalt truck traffic; Visual Check that there is no damage to the sheet
(punching, dirt accumulation, etc.)
temperature of the applied product; Thermometer Shall comply with the Stra Technical Advice
dimension of guide rulers; Tape Shall correspond to the applied thickness of

coarse aggregates mastic asphalt
Installation methods; Visual Shall comply with the QAP
product samples; Molds Take 2 samples from each carrier

Acceptance of the layer of coarse aggregates mastic asphalt (for F.P.A.

processes)
Verification
means
appearance of the covered deck; Visual Check uniformity and continuity of the covered
surface (no cracks, blisters or swelling, etc) )
thickness; Tape / Calculate the tonnage / covered surface area ratio

calculation
indentation tests on products used. By a specialized

laboratory
Application of a thermal protection (for F.P.A processes)

Once cooled (few hours), this type of layer can tolerate typical site vehicular traffic.
The traffic of earthwork engines on tires or tracks will not be allowed unless precautions have been taken in
agreement with the waterproofing contractor.

Annex 4
Actions specific to working up of the thin film of resin

bonding to the support (F.M.A.S.) process
Gravel bedding layer
Waterproofing layer cast in place (resin)

Primer
Concrete photo Stra/CTOA
Application of the waterproofing layer (resin)

Verification
means
time between primer / waterproofing layer; Thermometer - Respect minimum and maximum times
(See Installation Manual and technical sheets)
- These times are related to the ambient
temperature
temperatures; Ambient / Determination of the ambient temperature

contact
thermometer
hygrometry; Hygrometer Determination of the hygrometry and the dew

point (see Stra Technical Advice)
produce applied mix inspection test pieces; Molds In order to perform Shore A hardness tests and
tension /elongation tests by a specialized
organization
check on consumption. Calculation By calculation of the applied quantity (kg) /

covered surface area ratio
Gravels bedding layer
Verification
means
Same procedure as for checks on the waterproofing layer
gravels Visual/ Check the nature, packaging and storage of

labeling gravels

Acceptance
Verification
means
uniformity of the application; Visual No appearance defects (discontinuity, bubbles,
etc.)
All defects shall be corrected
If necessary, complementary tests shall be carried
out to enable acceptance or refusal
bond; Dynamometer Tests to be done on the existing waterproofing by

a specialized laboratory. Allow for repair of tested
zones
thickness; Magnifying The measurement shall be made by a specialized

glass - laboratory on cores used for bond tests.
micrometer
Shore A hardness tests; Hardness meter Tests to be done by a specialized laboratory on

cast test pieces prepared at the same time as the
application on site
tension tests; Tension press Tests to be done by a specialized laboratory on

cast test pieces prepared at the same time as the
application on site
take complementary conservative samples of To be done by a specialized laboratory

basic products (base and hardener) for
further analysis in case of problems (see
CCTG - General Technical Clauses - Part
67, title I article 8.3.2.1).
prevention of risks damaging the
waterproofing. - Traffic banned until shore A hardness 70 is
obtained.
- Limited site traffic

Annex 5
Actions specific to working up of the high speed

means (M.H.C.) process
Bituminous surfacing layer
(base or wearing course)
Protection of the binder layer by aggregates
Sprayed pure bituminous binder: bond
layer / waterproofing
20 to 25 mm waterproofing bituminous
micro-concrete used with finisher)
Impregnation and bond layer (bituminous cold
coat Impregnation or bituminous emulsion)
photo Stra/CTOA
Application of primer
Verification
means
starting to apply the next layers
drying the primer ; To feel Check that drying times are respected
record ambient and support temperatures; Ambiance / Respect the Technical Advice and the QAP (use
surface the most severe)
thermometer
Application of waterproofing bituminous micro-concrete
Verification
means
record ambient and support temperatures; Ambiance / Respect the Technical Advice and the QAP (use
surface the most severe)
thermometer
nature of the product used; Visual (delivery For each truck, check the exact name of the
form) product and its manufacturing location.
Conformity with the Technical Advice and the
QAP
product temperature; Thermometer Conformity with the QAP
Conservative sampling. sampling Take a 3kg sample per truck in order to perform
characterization tests by external inspection (see
7.3.2 of update No.1 in STER 81 and as a
function of tests carried out for the QAP)

Working up methods; Visual - Conforming with the QAP

spreading and compacting workshop;
- Characteristics of machines (finisher, compactor
with tires, cylinders)
- Number of compactor passes
applied thickness; Gauge Conforming with the QAP
quantities used; Calculation According to weighing forms
layer appearance; Visual Check the level, continuity and uniformity (no
swelling or cracking)
joint repair methods; Visual Conforming with the QAP
coring in the layer. Coring machine Possibly for measurement of the compacity and
thickness; conformity with the QAP and
installation manual
Allow for repair of tested zones (see procedures

defined by the process holder and update No. 1 of
STER 81)
Application of the waterproofing and/or bond layer (depending on the techniques)
Verification
means
nature of the product; Visual (delivery Name conforming with the Technical Advice and
form) the QAP
spreading equipment; Visual Conforming with the Technical Advice and the
QAP
support cleanliness; Visual No dust and dirt
support and ambient temperatures; Thermometer
support humidity; Visual Conforming with the Technical Advice and

the QAP
product temperature; Thermometer
product proportioning; Dishes Determined by weighing of control dishes

(weight/surface area ratio)
Make sure that this operation is actually done
(internal or external inspection)
Conservative sampling; Receptacle In order to carry out characterization tests by the

external inspection
film appearance Visual Continuity and uniformity of the thickness

Application of granular protection
Verification
means
nature of the product; Visual Name according to the Technical Advice
product proportioning; Visual - Avoid omissions and excesses

- Have a proportioning control zone made off the
bridge to facilitate the final visual inspection
surface temperature of the bond and/or Contact Conforming with the QAP (application of the
waterproofing layer; thermometer granular protection shall not degrade the bond /
waterproofing layer)
spreading. Visual Spreading method according to the Technical

Advice
Application of bituminous surfacing layers

Note: The hot rolled asphalt layer located immediately above the waterproofing layer forms an integral
part of the waterproofing complex and therefore shall be inspected as such.
Verification
means
cleanliness of the bond and/or Visual Eliminate excess, and allow to dry well if it has
waterproofing layer; rained
integrity of the waterproofing and/or bond Visual Make sure that public works machines
layer; (particularly finisher and trucks) do not damage
this layer
check on hot rolled asphalts. Delivery form, - Check if the nature and thickness are
gauge conforming with the QAP
- Proceed as for an inspection of hot rolled
asphalt for pavements
Acceptance
Acceptance of the waterproofing layers by examination of the results of tests and the visual condition: no
discontinuity, no lesions, blisters or swellings, etc. All defects shall be corrected based on procedures defined by the
holder of the process and/or the STER 81 guide update No. 1.
Acceptance shall apply mainly to surface characteristics and respect of leveling according to normal variations for
the acceptance of pavement surface layers.

Chapter XI: Expansion joints
Datasheet No. XI-1

Warning: This part is applicable to new bridges. If
this document is used for old bridges, the Consulting
engineer shall adapt it to take account of special
"Working up arrangements related to this type of structure (road
signs installation for example).
of expansion joints"
1. Purpose of this document and

general information about expansion
joints
This document applies to the working up of a
expansion joint on a road bridge.
The term "expansion joint" consists of a set of

indissociable elements composed of:
X the expansion joint itself;
Y footpath kerb upstands (or road restraint system

longitudinal beams);
Z water drainage systems, waterproofing closing

systems and system for connection to the bridge
water drainage device;
[ the footpath expansion joint (or the service

passage);
\ the kerb cover.
An expansion joint shall enable free movement of

elements facing the structure (usually the deck with
respect to an gravel guard low wall), while supporting
traffic. It shall also be waterproof or it shall collect
water correctly, and it shall not be a source of noise
or vibration.
It is an important equipment for the safety of users

and the durability of adjacent parts of the structure. It
resists traffic loads and is subject to aggressiveness of
the environment. Its durability depends closely on a
good choice of the product, and the good quality of
its construction.
Works related to the working up of expansion joints

on new bridges is preferably done when there is no
traffic and after the wearing course has been finished.
Sufficient time shall be allowed to do this work under
good conditions. Stra/CTOA photos
Depending on the materials used, this work shall be
done under weather conditions defined by the
manufacturer, unless special products or systems are
used to create a microclimate, but these are
expensive solutions and not always very efficient.
Chapter XI: Expansion joints 1 Datasheet No. XI-1: Working up of expansion joints
Brief description of the most frequent types of joints
Flexible Expansion Joint

This expansion joint is working up within the thickness of the
surfacing that has already been placed.
It is poured in place with the materials, the binder and aggregates.
Nosing Expansion Joint

This type of expansion joint has lips or edges (in concrete, resin
mortar, metal, elastomer or others) that hold a rubber profile so as
to prevent penetration of water and foreign bodies.
(with metal edges)
Mat Expansion Joint

This expansion joint uses the elastic properties of an elastomer strip
or pad to allow the expected structural movements. The strip is
fixed by e.g. bolts to the structure.
(mat deformable in shear)
Cantilever joint
This expansion includes symmetric elements that are anchored on
both sides of the parts facing the structure.
(with comb)
Supported Expansion Joint
This expansion joint comprises comb (or not) elements that are
anchored on one side of the structure. These elements are
supported on mating comb (or not) elements fixed on the opposite
side.
Reminder
Buried Expansion Joint

The design of this type of expansion joint uses the elasticity of the
surfacing that will be deformed. It is placed such that a large area of
the wearing course distributes the deformations, and:
- creates a bridge between the structural elements;

- forms the junction with the waterproofing.
Modular expansion joint by support beams

This expansion joint consists in a succession of rails sustained by
beams supported on each side of the space between facing parts of
the structure. Rubber profiles are inserted between the rails.


Check that the reference documentation exists
(quality documents)
Technical Advice or equivalent;
Quality Assurance Procedure (QAP);
construction drawings for the expansion joint Short specs registration of expansion joint, drainage, position of
and the footpath expansion joint previously anchors in the reinforcement, special arrangements for the
signed by the Consulting Engineer*; footpath, etc.)
construction program; Works phasing and planning
Installation manual; Can only be viewed on site (Contractors know how)
Existing of the "site monitoring" sheet It shall be filled in by the Team Leader as the work progresses
Reminder: this sheet shall include all elements necessary to
achieve traceability of installation of the expansion joint
check that the supplies are conforming with the See annex A (Flexible expansion joints)
order for the procured expansion joint model
check conformity of equipment means See annex B (other expansion joints)
check that the installation personnel is qualified See QAP and Technical Advices
reference of the anchor concrete and transition

strip
* Reminder: these drawings are normally accompanied by requirements of adjustments on recess and expansion
joint instructions depending on temperatures during installation.

2.2.1.- General
Make sure that predetermined arrangements described in quality documents are actually applied and are capable of
assuring quality required. The site monitoring sheet is one of the quality documents necessary to assure
traceability of the measures taken.
2.2.2.- Preparation actions common to all types of joints
Points to be checked Means Remarks

check setting out of the recess with respect to Marking of See deck and gravel guard low wall construction
the center line of the structural gap between the the gap on the drawings
structural elements (for example deck and cornice side
abutment wall); In situ
statement
check the sawing operation through wearing Visual Do not damage the deck concrete or the
course; gravel guard low wall (see the construction
drawing and previous boring if applicable)
check measures taken for the expansion joint See installation manual and construction drawings
upstand at the level of the footpath kerb (or on for the expansion joint
the longitudinal beam of the road restraint
system);
check that the gap between structural elements Visual This point is important to prevent blocking
is clean; of the expansion joint when closing
check that the drainage device of the The waterproofing shall also be closed at the
waterproofing / surfacing interface, the level top of the bridge, even when there is no
waterproofing closure and the drain outlet are drain
conforming. (See installation manual and expansion joint
construction drawings)
2.2.3.- Critical point and stop point

Correct working up of the different products is essential to assure durability of the joint. Therefore, it is
recommended that the inspector himself should be present at this time to assure that installation operations are
correctly respected, or to have a laboratory selected by the Consulting engineer performs this external inspection.
The Contractor's QAP normally contains a critical point before the joint is poured, that we recommend should be
transformed into a stop point.
Case of flexible expansion: It is recommended that at least the points in the list given in annex A should be
checked during this stop point that is particularly important to check the work quality.
Case of other joint types: At this stage in work progress, it is recommended that there should be a critical point
for acceptance of the recess and before installation of the differents parts of the expansion joint. As for flexible
expansion joints, a stop point should then be provided before the expansion joint is poured at least to check the
points given in the list in annex B.
CLEAR THE STOP POINT signatures of participants on the site monitoring sheet;
(with or without reserve (s) or motivated
refusal) issue of an anomaly sheet, if any.
2.2.4.- Joint installation actions

- See annex A (Flexible expansion joints)
- See annex B (other joint types)
2.3.- On acceptance
In principle, this acceptance operation is the starting point for the contractual guarantee duration (3 or 5 years) to be
provided in the contract; it shall be done in the presence of the contractor and the manufacturer/installer of the
joint when he works as a subcontractor. It assumes that the inspections mentioned in the above mentioned stop
points have been made 1 .

general appearance of the joint surface; Visual
level/adjacent surface; 3 m ruler Reminder of installation tolerances:

0/-2 mm from the adjacent surfacing
cleanliness of the adjacent surface and closely of Visual

the expansion joitn works;
1 This operation shall be done in the presence of the Contractor and the joint manufacturer/installer when he works as a
subcontractor.
clearance of the gap between the gravel guard low Visual This point is important to prevent
wall and the structure; blocking of the expansion joint in
closing. It may be checked during installation
operations or later by an observation from the
bearing stringer.
examination of the tests result carried out during - Check conformity of the products (concrete,
the works; binder, etc.) ;
- Check watertightness of the joint (to be
checked during heavy rain or by pouring a
sufficient quantity of water);
- Check the drainage system (special
requirements may be provided to test the
efficiency of the drain and closing of the
waterproofing).
conformity of the kerb upstand; Shall enable continuity of the lateral channel
water flow
collection of water coming from drain on the Conformity with the construction drawing
underside of the deck;
check that the bearing stringer or the crosshead
are clean;
footpath expansion joint or service passage joint; Described in annex C
check that the site monitoring sheet is properly The site monitoring sheet shall be
filled in. submitted to the Consulting engineer.
Start traffic
(according to information in the installation manual,
as a function of weather conditions and the materials used)

Road bridge expansion joints Technical guide Stra, July 86, 107 p. (Stra reference F8737);
the Technical Advice in force for the expansion joint model concerned (the list of Technical Advice in force is
available from the Stra Internet site: www.setra.equipement.gouv.fr);
Drainage of road bridges Technical guide. Stra, June 89, 106 p. (Stra reference: F8940) (particularly 2.5
"Drainage of the waterproofing/surfacing interface");
the Secretariat of the "Expansion Joint Technical Advice Commission" at Stra: 46 Avenue A. Briand - BP 100 -
92225 Bagneux cedex Tel. : 01.46.11.32.13.
ANNEX A
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS TO
FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS TYPE
Before starting the work

Check that the supplies of the procured joint
are conforming with the order
traceability of joint components; Batch No. - Delivery forms;
Visual
storage and cleanliness of aggregates; Aggregates in pre-proportioned bags and not
Touch in the open air. No dust when touched
Tape
nominal dimensions of the bridging plate; See installation manual
binder storage conditions. Kept dry and sheltered from the weather
Check conformity of equipment means

Visual
melting tank No previously molten binder
thermometers to measure
the ambient temperature; Verification
certificate
the binder temperature; Verification

Correct behavior of the expansion joint
certificate
depends on different factors including the
binder and aggregate temperatures, which is
the aggregate temperature. Verification
why it is necessary to assure that measurement
certificate
instruments are reliable.
Template
measurement of layer thicknesses
vibrating plate
Visual
concrete mixer Clean and free of dust
During the work
STOP POINT BEFORE POURING FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS TYPE
CHECK ON THE RECESS
dimensions
cleanliness
Stra/CTOA
of the concrete sides and the hot rolled asphalt edge; photo
of the gap between structural elements.
CHECK ON THE DRAINAGE DEVICE
dimensions;
The drain positioned in the thickness of

drain position;
the joint will reduce bond between the
joint and the adjacent surfacing and will
jeopardize its durability. It is strongly not
recommended that to be used, and only a
"weephole" type drain should be accepted (see
Technical Advice concerned)
connection to the bridge water drainage system.
PROTECTION OF AREAS CLOSE TO THE EXPANSION JOINT WORKS
adjacent surface;
expansion joint surroundings.
AVAILABILITY OF INSPECTION AND SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
thermometers;
layer thickness measurement template;
conservative sampling equipment;
etc.
TREATMENT OF THE KERB AND FOOTPATH AREA
CHECK GOOD WEATHER CONDITIONS

(see precautions for rainy weather in the instruction manual)
Joint installation actions properly speaking

make sure that the recess is perfectly dry and that Visual No dampness
water does not reach the waterproofing/surfacing
interface;
Visual
check that the gap between structural elements is Presence of the back-up material
perfectly sealing;
check the position of the bridging plate; Tape Plate "overlapping" the gap between structural
elements
periodic check of the binder temperature (at the Thermometer The binder temperature check made
outlet from the melting tank); using the melting tank dial is not reliable
See specified temperature range in the

installation manual
Thermometer See temperature range specified in the

check the aggregate temperature;
installation manual
check the thickness of each layer; Template Thickness often of the order of 4 cm
check that each layer is well saturated with binder; Visual
Excess binder on the surface is a factor

Check the finishing layer Visual
in the risk of rutting
ANNEX B
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS TO EXPANSION JOINTS OTHER

THAN FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS TYPE

Check that the supplies of the procured
joint model are conforming with the order
traceability of joint components; Batch No. - Delivery form
nature of materials; Check that any wedging or anchorage

products have received the NF mark or are
part of the approved list
Storage conditions;
dimensional check; Check the main dimensions comparaison with

expansion joint drawings and Technical
Advice diagrams for the joint concerned
appearance check. No traces of shock and oxidation, damage,

etc.
Check conformity of equipment means

Verification
thermometers;
certificate
Diameter adapted to the reinforcement

poker vibrator;
density
boring equipment if any;

Compressor with dry air
hole cleaning equipment;
Micro-concrete
material mixing equipment;
Some types of joints have non-
device to maintain expansion joint in openning;
negligible restraint forces that require
adapted means (see installation manual
concerned)
Calibration It is essential to respect the tightening

anchor bolt tightening or tensioning equipment
certificate or tensioning procedure for good
(torque wrench, jacks).
behavior of the expansion joint under traffic
according to short length anchor rods used.
During the work
STOP POINT BEFORE POURING JOINTS
CHECK THE RECESS AND STARTER REINFORCEMENT
Recess Starter reinforcement
dimensions cover;
cleanliness spacing and diameter;
- of concrete faces and edges of asphalt concrete); steel quality.
- the gap between structural elements.
CHECK ON COMPLEMENTARY REINFORCEMENT
cover;
spacing and diameter;
position with respect to anchors;
steel quality.
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
drain position;
closing of waterproofing.
STABILITY OF PLACEMENT ARMS
JOINT SETTING
in openning (as a function of the bridge temperature);

in levelling.
CONCRETE ACCEPTANCE
TREATMENT OF THE KERB AND FOOTPATH AREA
PROTECTION OF AREAS CLOSE TO THE EXPANSION WORKS
Expansion joint before

concreting
(photo Stra/CTOA Bridge
Engineering Department
Joint placement actions properly speaking
complementary reinforcement; See installation manual
check that the anchors are perfectly positioned See installation manual
with respect to the starter reinforcement;
For anchors by rods sealed in drilled holes, check
conformity of the anchor length using a template
watertightness between elements of the joint; See installation manual
continuity of rubber waterproofing profiles; Cutting or butt connections shall be forbidden. The profile shall
be procured in a single piece to be fitted in the joint from one
upstand to the next. If the site is done in phases, the excess
length shall be stored, or installation shall be done in a single
phase at the end of the work
setting in openning of the expansion joint; See installation design charts relative to the bridge temperature
setting in levelling of the expansion joint; Reminder of installation tolerances:

0/-2 mm from the adjacent surfacing
concreting the expansion joint; Take samples to create information test pieces
tighten or tension the anchor bolts. This operation is only possible if the quality of the
concrete or anchor material makes it possible (which is
why information test pieces are important to assure that the
required strength is achieved and why a critical point or even
better a stop point is necessary).
ANNEX C:
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS
TO FOOTPATH EXPANSION
JOINTS
Reminder A footpath expansion joint may include the following

parts:
Transverse equipment sections adjacent to the
expansion joint (footpath joints, downstands, joint the structural joint located under the footpath, at
covers and kerb covers) have the following main the waterproofing level (see 6.2.3.2 in the "Road
functions: bridge expansion joints" guide;
it enables free movement of the structure; Without this waterproof joint linked to the expansion
joint or construction of a system for protection of
they enable surface continuity;
bridge ends and for recovery of water from
and for the joint at the structure level: footpaths, bridge ends would certainly be damaged by
they enable waterproofing or recovery of water by runoff water).
appropriate devices independent of the footpath
expansion joint (which is at the level of the pedestrian the joint at the level of pedestrian traffic (see
traffic). 6.2.3.3 in the "Road bridge expansion joints") ;
Noise and vibration problems do not usually arise for the junction between the two elements mentioned
this type of equipment. above and the expansion joint also called the
upstand or the upstand kerb (see 6.2.3.4 in the
Effective and reliable treatment of this different parts "Road bridge expansion joints" guide ") ;
that form "footpath joint(s)" is a difficult operation protection elements such as kerb covers and joint
(each bridge is a special case) that requires special covers necessary due to joint upstand systems, the
studies starting when the DCE (Contractor Tender skews of the bridges, cornices or longitudinal beams.
Document) is written.
It is difficult to correct incomplete stipulations

and lack of clarity of construction drawings
during construction. This is why construction
drawings shall contain detailed and dimensioned
views of expansion joint and footpath expansion
joints (as far as adjacent to the cornice
downstand in the case of concrete cornices or
gutter cornices) and all information necessary for
satisfactory construction.
As shown in the following sketch, the crowding often

encountered in footpath leave no doubt about the
need to have construction drawings.
Perspective view of parts concerned by an expansion joint in a

footpath
Actions to be carried out


make sure that measures designed to make the Record of observations
waterproofing or to collect water have been taken
before the construction of footpaths;
check that elements contained in footpaths (pipes,
ducts, etc.) include devices for assuring the
possibility of expansion corresponding to the
movement capacity of the expansion joint.
During the work

check the quality of materials; See annex A or B of this part
check that the materials are used correctly;
check the position of the joint upstand with Must not be a source of aggression for traffic and shall enable
respect to the kerb; continuity of the water flow
check recomposition of footpath kerbs; Make sure that footpath kerbs will not hinder free
expansion of the bridge
check correct and conforming fixing of kerb The fixing shall be on the side above traffic or it is comprise a
covers, if any; special device. Make sure that free expansion of the bridge is not
hindered
check that arrangements are made so that Formwork and protection

concrete does not obstruct the joint gap located
behind the upstand part, nor the grooves in the
metal sections for insertion of the rubber profile if
any.
On acceptance

check watertightness in the upstand area and the Examine the underside of the deck at the joint during heavy rain
footpath expansion joint; or by pouring a sufficient quantity of water
check perfect cleaning of the crosshead and

correct positioning of flexible drain pipes.
Chapter XII: Site audit
Datasheet No. XII-1

The quality reference documentation acceptance
procedure is described in the "Analysis of the QAP"
datasheet and tests given in technical datasheets for
"Quality control" each subject.
3. Principles
Therefore, the objective is to assure that QAPs are
The purpose of this datasheet is to describe the actually put into practice and are not simply
quality control procedure to check conformity with documents describing good intentions, that
the contract and to propose acceptance to the monitoring datasheets are not simply filled in at the
Supervisor. end of the work and that inspections are carried out
as the work progresses and are interpreted, and that
It includes all internal and external inspections and anomalies are detected and treated.
its purpose is to provide a quality management tool
for work done under Quality Assurance. On the other hand, the Supervisor's inspections are
simplified. It then becomes possible to act
differently, in other words rather than checking
2. Reminders everything, simply checking the skill and work of
the Contractor's responsible for inspections.
In the context of the Quality Assurance Plan However, it is essential to be present at key steps in
(QAP), Supervisors must ask works contractors to the production (stop points).
do some inspections of their own construction, thus
calling them to a grater responsibility. Therefore, In this maind, execution of some tests can be
the method that the Supervisor used to control programmed to verify tests done by the Contractor
progress within the construction site is slightly rather than checking conformity of the inspected
modified. element, the objective being to validate them before
accepting a batch.
The stakes involved for the community always
require that the quality of works should be Therefore, quality control will require a
guaranteed and therefore that inspections made by combination of actions of types :
the contractor should be validated.
"audit" that may be general or specific to a
To achieve this, all steps in the new process must be domain or a part of the structure ;
respected :
monitoring ;
acceptance of the quality reference
documentation (all QAPs) ; clearing stop points ;
check that the reference documentation is tests and trials.

applied ;
The objective is to set up a necessary and sufficient
inspection of the major steps in construction by combination to check global conformity and to
tests : make a decision with regard to the Supervisor, given
that a priori, the entire batch must be refused if
design tests ; there is any doubt about a result of an internal
suitability tests ; inspection that was not done or was badly done.
status tests (related to a stop point) ;
by batch conformity tests ; 4. Actions to be carried out
treatment of non conformities ;
A true work scenario should be set up by the
the bridge acceptance inspection ; supervisor after acceptance of the quality reference
documentation by defining external inspection
the quality summary analysis. actions for all work and for each technical domain,
by selecting methods to be used regardless of the
Chapter XII : Site audit 1/2 Datasheet No.XII-1 : Quality control

type of work (continuous, intermittent, isolated) and Treatment of nonconformities

their frequency or assignment.
analysis of the origin of the problem ;
The method of validating external inspection tests take account of preventive measures ;
related to conformity shall be defined. effective proposal to restore conformity or to
achieve acceptance within a satisfactory time
The Supervisor thus chooses whatever specific (if functions of the element are not involved),
skilled help is necessary for the technical fields or reject.
concerned and for Quality Assurance, particularly
for carrying out audits.
Acceptance inspection and quality summary
analysis
5. Important points to be examined effectiveness of the test program ;
The following non-exhaustive list presents essential analysis of test results ;
quality control points : execution of the initial detailed inspection ;
summary analysis of all inspections and
Existence of the quality reference conclusion.
documentation and application of QAPs
6. Documents to be viewed
presence of QAPs on the site (particularly
procedures and monitoring datasheets) ; The quality control is carried out with reference to
understanding of the construction operation the following documents :
by the persons concerned ;
filling in monitoring datasheets as the work CCTG leaflet 65 A : Construction of
progresses rather than after the work to reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete civil
complete the (formal) file (simply ticking engineering structures ;
boxes without consideration of the specific
meaning of each is also not allowed) ; CCTP CCAP ;
effective involvement of the quality Manager
Current standards ;
(presence on site and the ability to anticipate is
necessary) ; Quality reference documentation for the works
automatic opening of anomaly datasheets (if ;
the Contractor does not detect an anomaly
independently of the Supervisor, his all QAPs ;
inspections are artificials). general organization note ;
Inspection of major steps and certificate of construction procedures ;
conformity monitoring datasheets ;
site inspection ; inspection plan.
effective supply of design or reference files ;
execution and interpretation of suitability
tests ;
respect stop points and corresponding
preliminary operations carried out (respecting
the required notice and respecting response
times) ;
carry out tests according to the inspection plan
;
effective interpretation of test results and
follow up decided upon ;
consistency between the results of internal and
external inspection tests to validate the
Contractor's results board.
Chapter XII : Site audit 2/2 Datasheet No.XII-1 : Quality control

Chapter XIII: Operations prior to
acceptance
Datasheet No. XIII-1

"The initial detailed
inspection"
1.- Purpose of this datasheet

This datasheet relates to the initial detailed inspection
(IDI) carried out between the end of construction (or
repair or strengthening) of the structure and
acceptance. It applies to completed structures; if
some equipment has not been installed or some work
has not been done, then the inspection should be
completed when possible.
2.- Reminders
The IDI is defined in a circular letter dated december
26, 1995 from the Highways Department which
revises the first part of the technical guidelines for the
monitoring and maintenance of engineering
structures (ITSEOA date october 19, 1979).
It is compulsory for all new structure and it must be

done before open to traffic, or exceptionally as soon
as possible afterwards. It defines the reference state
that the manager can use to evaluate changes to the
structure in time.
It can take place in several phases and in particular it

can include detailed inspections planned before,
during and after the loading tests.
The IDI must be done at the initiative of the

responsible for construction, and the future manager
must participate in it.
It precedes acceptance, which is the operation by

which the client declares that he accepts the structure
with or without reservations.
After use, the IDI report is filed in the bridge Inspection gangway
documents. (Strasbourg LRPC - Regional Public Works Laboratory -
photos)
Operations performed prior to acceptance include in
particular:
the inspection of the completed structures;

the detailed inspections of the structure before,
during and after loading tests;
the loading tests (purpose of datasheet XIII-2
"Tests and interpretation of tests").
Chapter XIII: Operations prior to acceptance 1/3 Datasheet No.XIII-1: The initial detailed inspection
3.- Important points to be examined

The inspection shall be done by qualified engineering structure inspectors, supervised by a design supervisor also
qualified in the inspection of engineering structures.
Usually, inspections will require special access means including vehicles fitted with roof platforms, cradles,
gangways, etc.
Visual checking that each part of the engineering X

structure specified in the contract actually exists
Check the general condition of each part of the X

engineering structure; position, shape, verticality (or
horizontality or slope, etc.).
Visual checking that there are no defects on each 2

X
part of the engineering structure 1
For reinforced concrete bridge parts Use observations made during the
construction
records of cracks;
conformity of facings.
For prestressed concrete bridge parts: Use observations made during the
construction
no cracks;
conformity of facings.
For steel bridge parts: Use external inspection results

assemblies;
corrosion protection.
For bearings: See corresponding datasheet
check wedging and positioning;
uniform state of compression;
check bushings.
For expansion joints and footway joints: See corresponding datasheet
check opening and level adjustments of the

joint;
1These services may be done by LRPCs (Regional Public works laboratories) which have qualified personnel, appropriate
means and corresponding procedures.
2 Normally, the Contractor is required to provide means to access the different engineering structure parts, in accordance with
the CCTP (Particular Technical Clauses). Also take advantage of site installations and some construction phases that enable
access to some engineering structure parts for which it is necessary.
check the condition of attachments and

flashing;
check the waterproofing of the joint.
For restraint systems: See corresponding datasheet
check that elements are continuous with each

other, and that anchors are present;
check that ends are treated correctly.
For the water drainage system:
check that they are connected.
For maintenance or inspection devices: These devices may possibly be

verified by a specialized
organization
check their existence, condition and function.
Check treatment of defects mentioned during the X

construction
The above list is not exhaustive. For example, it does not include pavements, footways, the area of influence,
auxiliary devices (anti-seismic, etc.),
4.- Documents to be supplied to the project manager

Inspection reports before, during and after loading (in which the project manager can participate);
The IDI report (which shall comply with the outline given in fascicle 02 of the second part of the technical
guidelines for monitoring and maintenance of engineering structures).
5.- For further information refer to:

Fascicle 61 title II of CPC "Design, calculation and tests of engineering structures Loading and tests program
for road bridges";
The Technical Guidelines for Monitoring and Maintenance of Bridges (ITSEOA) dated october 19, 1979 revised
by the circular letter dated December 26, 1995 issued by the Highways Department;
all fascicles making up the second part of the "ITSEOA", and in particular fascicle 02: "General on monitoring";
the CCAG-Works (Book of General administrative clauses).
Datasheet No. XIII-2

"Tests and interpretation
of tests"
1.- Purpose of this data sheet

This datasheet applies to execution and interpretation
of loading tests carried out at the end of the Loading of a slab bridge
construction (or repair or strengthening) of the (Strasbourg LRPC - Central Public Works Laboratory - photo)
structure, and before its acceptance.
2.- Reminder
Operations performed prior to acceptance include in
particular:
the inspection of the completed structures;

the detailed inspections of the structure before,
during and after loading tests;
the loading tests (purpose of this datasheet).
Weighing a lorry on scale (Strasbourg LRPC photo)
These tests allow to verify the instantaneous behavior
of the new structure under loading; they normally
include:
application of loads;
detailed inspections of the bridge before, during
and after the application of loads;
measurement of deflections and the levels of
bearings (before and after the application of loads).
They precede acceptance, which is the operation by

which the client declares that he accepts the bridge
with or without reservations.
These tests can only be performed after that the Levelling measurement (Strasbourg LRPC photo)
wearing course and final adjustment of bearings have
been made. The most recently poured concrete must
be at least 28 days old.
Measurement of reactions at support

(Strasbourg LRPC photo)
3.- Impor tant points to be examined

3.1.- Bef or e the tests
Check that reference documents exist and have X

been signed by the project manager:
hypothesis note;
calculation note;
loading program. (1)

(1)
Check marking of the position of lorries and X
measurement points
(1) The preliminary inspection is
Check that the preliminary inspection has X
based on an IDI (see the ITSEOA
actually been made and that it was sufficient to
- technical order for the
select zones to be verified during loading
supervision and maintenance of
civil engineering structures - leaflet
02)
(1)
Check the characteristics of lorries (weighing X
certificates)
Make sure that scaffoldings and gangways X

necessary to make the measurements and
inspections are correctly positioned
(1) The assistance of an LRPC (Regional Public works laboratory) which has qualified personnel may be required
for this inspection, if the LRPC does not get involved in the inspection.
3.2.- Dur in g execution of the tes ts
Check that measurements at no load are made X (1)

before loading
Check positions of lorries X (1) The loading order must be

respected
Inspection of most stressed sections X (1)
Check preselected areas X (1)
Check that the planned measurements are made X (1)
Check that measurements at no load are made X (1)

after unloading
Inspection after unloading X (1)

(1) The assistance of an LRPC which has qualified personnel may be required for this inspection, if the LRPC does
not get involved in the inspection.
3.3.- Dur in g i nter preta tion of the tes ts

X
Become familiar with the specifications fixed by
the site CCTP
X
Compare the results of measurements with the
results of calculation notes
X The organization responsible for
Obtain the opinion of the test organization on its
inspection issues a report
work and the results obtained
If there is a nonconformity with the specifications X

ask the Contractor and his design office for an
opinion
X The Contractor issues a result
Have the external inspection design office
analysis note
validate the Contractor's opinion
X
Follow any corrective measures
4.- Documents t o be s upplie d to t he project manager

calculation note;
loading program;
weighing certificates;
results obtained by the service provider appointed to make the measurements;
Contractor's opinion on the results;
test report according to article 25 of fascicle 61 title II of CPC (to be included in sub-file 2 of the bridge
documents "Reference elements for management");
Nonconformity sheets if any.
5.- For f urther infor mation, refe r to:

fascicle 61 title II of CPC "Design, calculation and tests of engineering structures Loading and tests program
for road bridges" ;
the "Loading tests for road bridges and footbridges" guide. Technical guide. Stra, september 2006, 56 p. (This
document can be downloaded on Stra website: http://www.setra.equipement.gouv.fr);
the CCAG -Works (Book of General administrative clauses).
Chapter XIV: Durability zero point
No datasheet
Chapter XV: Structure works
documentation file
2. Production and composition of

Datasheet No. XV-1 documents by the Site supervisor
"Structure works 2.1. - Preamble
documentation file" In order to be complete and reliable, the site

Supervisor shall begin writing documents in the
structure works documentation file as soon as the
work is started or even during the preparation
period, and shall complete these documents as the
work progresses ; (if these documents are written
generalities about the bridge file during the winter period (during bad weather) or at
the end of the construction period, the result will be
This datasheet applies to the method used by the site
incomplete documents (omission), errors (confusion
supervisor to produce documents to be collected on
between several sites), and even missing documents
site during the construction work for a bridge or
(sequence of several work sites). Consequently, the
retaining structure, and necessary for the bridge file.
structure works documentation file should be
The bridge file that must be produced for all updated at least once every month, in a meeting
temporary or permanent bridges designed to carry between the contractors, and the Clients and
public traffic with a span of two meters or more and Supervisors concerned, and a written trace of these
for retaining structures with a height above the updates should be kept in the site reports.
ground greater than or equal to two meters shall
2.2. - Design notes and drawings for
include technical, administrative, legal information
temporary structures and construction
and possibly cultural information necessary for
processes (document 1.6)
efficient subsequent management of this bridge.
In most cases, only as-built drawings for temporary
The works file is composed of three sub-files : structures (showing accepted modifications and
modifications observed during construction) are
sub-file 1 : Design and Construction ; managed on site. The list of received drawings is
sub-file 2 : Reference elements for management ; printed by the BEOA (Design Office for Civil
sub-file 3 : Life of the structure ; Engineering Structures) with dates of acceptance ; the
submission date of as-built drawings certified by the
and must be initiated when the Supervisor COP (contractor temporary works supervisor) is
responsible for the design and construction of the added.
bridge starts the design work.
2.3. - Parts of the QAP specific to the
works and backfill contiguous with
The table of components of each sub-file is attached them. External inspections (document
in the appendix. Documents to be partially or 1.7)
completely produced by the site supervisor are shown
Internal inspection
in the table in bold and are explained below in this Management of the Quality Assurance Plan on site by
datasheet (this datasheet only concerns sub-files 1 the Contractor consists of assuring that the QAP and
and 2 ; sub-file 3 "life of the structure" is the particular procedures signed by the Supervisor are
responsibility of the structure manager and is outside performed correctly (do everything that is written),
the scope of "Memoar" datasheets). this execution including transcription of the results of
all checks and tests on construction monitoring
Note : in order to facilitate creation of the works file
documents attached to the QAP and to particular
and updating it later, the numbers of documents
procedures (write what is done) (material approval
making up the structure works documentation file
sheets signed by the Supervisor must appear in the
(using the numbers defined in ITSEOA (technical
QAP).
order for the supervision and maintenance of civil
engineering structures leaflet 1) shall not be modified. These documents are used to collect and then store
information about real construction conditions and to
provide proof that the internal inspection has been
done (keep what is written). Inspection and test
sheets and nonconformity sheets and processing of
these sheets if applicable, are included in documents
Chapter XV : Structure works documentation file 1 Datasheet No.XV-1 : Structure works documentation file
to be attached to the structure works documentation B5 Site log (document 1.10)

file.
The site log is filled in by the inspector (with
It is useful to remember that a procedure must reference to the Contractor's log, and adding his own
contain the description of interfaces to be satisfied observations to it).
throughout execution of the procedure. Thus,
It forms the bulletin of actions taken on site and it
clearing the stop point before concreting a part of the
must be filled in daily. It can thus be used as a
structure requires declarations of conformity related
reference document during searches for information
to temporary works procedures (COP - temporary
in order to solve any disputes.
works supervisor), reinforcement, formwork and
inserts, and prestressing procedures if applicable It should contain :
(CMP contractor prestressing supervisor). Specific
information about the "concreting" procedure is also a) in the header
available (mix design, concreting plan, curing and
form stripping plan, inspections plan and expected The works title ;
results, etc.). The identity of the Contractors and
subcontractors and the main permanent
External inspection
representatives of each ;
The contract must have its Quality Master Plan that
specifies the main external inspection operations that the names of staff assigned to inspections.
the Supervisor intends to do or to have done. The
Supervisor must be given sufficient notice for these b) each day
tests and inspections so that he can organize his
actions. the date and working hours ;
weather conditions and possibly water levels ;
The Supervisor usually manages external inspection information (work force, qualification, etc.) about
documents. It is good practice if a copy of all external the Contractor's personnel ;
inspections arrives on site. all information about operation of the site
equipment ;
Summaries analysis
all incidents and the duration of each ;
The signature of a clear stop point datasheet is the
preferred moment to summarize internal and external a precise description of the works with sketch or
inspections, draw up the list of documents submitted drawing if required ;
or to be submitted, and to file them by part of the indication of samples taken for tests.
structure and by procedure, in document 1.7 of the
structure works documentation file. c) in comments
2.4. - Minutes of site meetings any site incidents ;

(document 1.9) inspections by engineers and verbal instructions
Minutes of site meetings written by a representative given by them ;
of the Supervisor (the most frequent case) or by the checks made by the inspector ;
Contractor, shall be signed by the Supervisor and by observations made to the contractor.
the Contractor. 2.6. - Certified as-built drawings and
photos file during the works
Each set of minutes shall consider at least the (document 1.12)
following points :
The works shall be done in accordance with drawings
approval of the previous minutes or comments ; signed by the Supervisor.
report on work progress by the Contractor
The list of received drawings is produced by the
(nature, etc.) ;
BEOA (Design Office for Public Works) with the
work forecast and rescheduling of the acceptance (signature) date ; the submission date of
construction planning ; as-built drawings certified by the internal inspection
update on received or expected documents ; Supervisor is added.
miscellaneous subjects (site incident, etc.).
Modifications made during the works shall be :
shown by sketch as accurately as possible by the

site Supervisor on the signed drawing ; 3. For further information refer to :
transferred as a clean copy by the Contractor's
design office to form the certified as-built The Technical Instruction for Monitoring and
drawing. Maintenance of Works. Highways and Road
Traffic Department, October 19 1979, 51 p.
Document 1.12 will include : Part 1 : Chapter 5 ;
Part 2 : Leaflet 01 Works file. Stra/LCPC ,
1 set of signed drawings, completed by the site 2000, 131 p. ;
Supervisor ; implementation of Quality Assurance Plans -
1 set of drawings certified by the Contractor, Construction of reinforced concrete and
including the "as-built" comment. prestressed concrete structures - Guide for
Contractors and Supervisors. Technical guide.
Photos taken during the works shall December 1991, 53 p. (Setra (Technical Centre
include a legend and shall be dated. for Highways & Motorways) reference F9175) ;
2.7. - Other documents

The site Supervisor shall also actively participate in
producing the following documents in subfiles 1 and
2:
correspondence about execution of the works

(document 1.8) ;
specific documents : special construction
processes, (document 1.11) ;
test file (loading program, results and
interpretations) (document 1.13) ;
reference report (document 2.2) ;
summary analysis document (document 2.4) ;
list of network utility managers and network
drawings (document 2.8.2).
APPENDIX
TABLE OF DOCUMENTS FOR A BRIDGE WORKS DOCUMENTATION FILE OR
A RETAINING STRUCTURE WORKS DOCUMENTATION FILE
Normal structure works documentation file

Sub-file 1 Design, construction
Document Document description

No.
General geological and geotechnical studies

1.1
Geotechnical studies specific to the structure

1.2
Hydraulic study
1.3.1
Noise study
1.3.2
Wind study
1.3.3
Reference to the contract file (including the DCE - Contractor Tender Document)
1.4
Design notes including assumptions surveys

1.5
Design notes and drawings related to temporary works and construction

1.6
processes
Specific parts of the QAP for the structure and contiguous backfill with it.
1.7
External inspection
Correspondence related to the structure construction

1.8
Minutes of site meetings

1.9
Site log, including the actual construction calendar

1.10
Specific documents : special implementation processes, etc

1.11
As-built certified drawings and file of photos taken during the works
1.12
Tests file including loading program, results obtained and interpretation of

1.13
results
Operations leading to a change to the reference state

1.14
Normal structure works documentation file
Sub-file 2 Reference elements for management

number
2.1 Photographs file
2.2 Reference state :
initial detailed inspection report ;

initial topometric survey ;
reference measurements on installed devices
(if applicable).
2.3 Notification document including the design of exceptional load and the military load
2.4 Summary analysis document
2.5 Inspection and maintenance instructions
2.6 File describing works done on the bridge later.
2.7.1 Bridge management convention (if there is one)
2.7.2 Rules and conventions related to network utilities
2.8.1 List of sites managers concerned by the structure
2.8.2 Lists of network managers and network drawings
2.9 Manager transfer report
Sub-file 3 Life of the structure

No.
3.1 Calendar for checks, inspections and particular supervision operations
3.2 Inpection file
3.3.1 List and intervals of systematic specialized maintenance operations
3.3.2 Calendar for these operations
3.4 List of various guarantees with expiration dates
3.5 Operation file not justifying a new reference state
3.6 Important events and exceptional actions having affected the structure
3.7 Reinforced Inspection, extra Inspection and diagnostic file
Bibliography
Regulatory texts Guide documents Miscellaneous Useful addresses
Textes rglementaires / Regulatory texts
Rgles de calcul des constructions en acier. Rgles CM 66 ; Design rules for steel constructions. CM 66 rules
Rgles de calcul et de conception des charpentes en bois. Rgles CB 71 ; Rules for the calculation and design of
wood structures; CB 71 rules
Rgles de conception et de calcul des charpentes mtalliques en alliage daluminium. Rgles AL 76 ; Rules for
conceptual and detailed design of aluminum alloy structures. AL 76 rules
Rgles dfinissant les effets de la neige et du vent sur les structures. Rgles NV 99 ; Rules defining snow and wind
effects on structures. NV 99 rules
Calcul des structures en acier. Eurocode 3 ; Eurocode 3 DAN - Design of steel structures. Eurocode 3
Calcul des structures en bois. Eurocode 5 ; Eurocode 5 - Design of wood structures. Eurocode 5
Conception, calcul et preuves des ouvrages d'art - Programme de charges et preuves des ponts-routes. Fascicule
61 titre II du CPC ; Design, calculation and tests of bridges Loading and test program for road bridges. CPC (common
requirements book) title II leaflet 61
Conception, calcul et preuves des ouvrages d'art - Conception et calcul des ponts et constructions mtalliques
en acier. Fascicule 61, titre V du CPC. Fascicule spcial n 78-9 ter ; Design, calculation and tests of bridges -
Conceptual and detailed design of steel bridges and constructions. CPC title V leaflet 61. Special leaflet No. 78-9 ter
Rgles techniques de conception et de calcul des fondations des ouvrages de gnie civil. Fascicule 62 titre V du
CCTG. Fascicule spcial n 93-3 TO ; Technical design and calculation rules for foundations for civil engineering
structures. CCTG (Book General Technical Clauses) title V leaflet 62. Special leaflet No. 93-3 TO
Articles 3.3.11 et 4.10 des rgles BPEL 91 rvis 99 - Rgles techniques de conception et de calcul des ouvrages et
constructions en bton prcontraint suivant la mthode des tats limites. Fascicule spcial n 99-9, avril 1999 ;
Articles 3.3.11 and 4.10 in BPEL 91 rules revised in 99 - Technical design and calculation rules for prestressed concrete
structures and constructions using the limit states method. Special leaflet No. 99-9, April 1999;
Terrassements gnraux. Fascicule 2 du CCTG. Fascicule spcial n 2003-2, mars 2003 ; General earthworks.
CCTG (General Technical Clauses) leaflet 2; Special leaflet No. 2003-2, March 2003
Fourniture daciers - Armatures haute rsistance pour constructions en bton prcontraint par pr ou post-
tension. Fascicule 4, titre II du CCTG. Fascicule spcial n 83-14 quater, 1983 ; Supply of steels High strength
reinforcement for pretensioned or post-tensioned prestressed concrete constructions. CCTG title II leaflet 4. Special
leaflet No. 83-14 quater, 1983
Protection des ouvrages mtalliques contre la corrosion. Fascicule 56 du CCTG. Fascicule spcial 2004-3, 2004 ;
Protection of steel structures against corrosion. CCTG (General Technical Clauses) Leaflet 56; Special leaflet No. 2004-3,
2004
Excution des ouvrages de gnie civil en bton arm ou en bton prcontraint. Fascicule 65A du CCTG. Fascicule
spcial n 2000-3, aot 2000 ; Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete Civil Engineering
structures CCTG (General Technical Clauses) leaflet 65A; Special leaflet No. 2000-3, August 2000;
Excution des ouvrages de gnie civil en bton arm ou en bton prcontraint. Additif au fascicule 65A du CCTG.
Fascicule spcial n 2000-4, aot 2000 ; Construction of reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete Civil
Engineering structures. Addition to CCTG leaflet 65A. Special leaflet No. 2000-4, August 2000
tanchit des ponts-routes support en bton de ciment. Fascicule 67 titre 1 du CCTG. Fascicule spcial n 85-
32 bis ; Waterproofing of concrete road bridges. CCTG title 1 leaflet 67. Special leaflet No. 85-32 bis
Excution des travaux de fondation des ouvrages de gnie civil. Fascicule 68 du CCTG ; Execution of foundation
works for civil engineering structures. CCTG leaflet 68
Excution de travaux proximit de certains ouvrages souterrains, ariens ou subaquatiques de transport ou de
distribution. Dcret 91-1147 du 14 octobre 1991. JO du 9 novembre 1991 ; Execution of work close to some
underground, overhead or underwater transport or distribution structures. Decree 91-1147, October 14 1991. Official
Bulletin, November 9 1991
Rglement de lagrment et du contrle des procds de prcontrainte et dispositifs dancrage. Arrt du 14 avril
1989. Fascicule spcial n 89-6 ; Regulations for the approval and inspection of prestressing processes and anchorage
devices. April 14 1989 order. Special leaflet No. 89-6
Annexes I V au rglement de l'agrment et du contrle des procds de prcontrainte et dispositifs dancrage -

Approbation C.I.P du 4 janvier 1990 ; Appendices I to V in the regulations for approval and inspection of
prestressing processes and anchor devices - C.I.P (Interministerial Prestressing Commission) approval, January 4
1990
Rglementation concernant lemploi de la prcontrainte. Circulaire 89-26 du 17 avril 1989. Fascicule spcial n 89-
6 ; Regulations for the use of prestressing. Circular No. 89-26, April 17 1989. Special leaflet No. 89-6
Complments la rglementation de la mise en uvre de la prcontrainte (coefficient de transmission). Circulaire
n 94-33 du 19 avril 1994. BO n 94-12 ; Supplements to the regulations and the use of prestressing bars. Circular No.
94.34, April 19 1994. Official Bulletin No. 94-12
Complments la rglementation et lutilisation des barres de prcontrainte. Circulaire n 94.34 du 19 avril 1994.
BO n 94-12 ; Supplements to the regulations and the use of prestressing bars. Circular No. 94.34, April 19 1994.
Official Bulletin No. 94-12
Complments la rglementation de la mise en uvre de la prcontrainte extrieure. Circulaire n 99-53 du 20 aot
1999. BO 99-16, 10 septembre 1999 ; Supplements to the regulations for placement of external prestressing. Circular
No. 99-53, August 20 1999. Official Bulletin 99-16, September 10 1999
Utilisation dunits intermdiaires de prcontrainte avec ancrages incomplets. Circulaire n 2002-57 du 4 septembre
2002, BO n 2002-17, 25 septembre 2002 ; Use of intermediate prestressing units with incomplete anchors. Circular
2002-57 September 4 2002. Official Bulletin No. 2002-17, September 25 2002
Avis technique des coulis dinjection pour conduits de prcontrainte. Circulaire n 99-54 du 20 aot 1999. Fascicule
spcial n 99.11 du Bulletin Officiel du Ministre de l'quipement ; Technical recommendation for grouts for
prestressing ducts. Circular No. 99-54, August 20 1999. Special leaflet 99.11 of the Ministry of Development Official
Bulletin
Rglementation concernant la hauteur des blindages. Dcret 65.48 du 08 janvier 1965 modifi par le dcret 95.608
du 6 mai 1995 ; Regulations for the height of lagging. Decree 65.48 January 08 1965 modified by decree 95.608 May 6
1995
Garde-corps double fonction (GCDF). Circulaire d'homologation n C 96.88 du 3 dcembre 1996 ; Double function
pedestrian parapet (GCDF). Circular No. C96.88, December 3 1996
Barrire de scurit "BN4-16". Circulaire d'homologation n C 95-68 du 28 juillet 1995 ; "BN4-16 safety barrier.
Approval circular No. C95-68, July 28 1995
Barrire de scurit "TETRA S13". Circulaire d'homologation n C 99-64 du 16 septembre 1999 ; "TETRAS S13"
safety barrier. Approval circular No. C99-64, September 16 1999
Barrire de scurit "TETRA S16". Circulaire d'homologation n C 99-64 du 16 septembre 1999 ; "TETRAS S16"
safety barrier. Approval circular No. C99-64, September 16 1999
Barrire de scurit habille "Bhab". Circulaire d'homologation n C 98-09 du 6 janvier 1998 ; "Bhab" cladded safety
barrier. Approval circular No. C98-09, January 6 1998
Instruction Technique pour la Surveillance et l'Entretien des Ouvrages d'Art (ITSEOA) - Premire partie :
Dispositions applicables tous les ouvrages. Instruction du 19 octobre 1979 rvise par la lettre circulaire DR du
26 dcembre 1995. DRCR, 51 p. ; Technical order for the inspection and maintenance of civil engineering structures
(ITSEOA) Part 1; Requirements applicable to all structures. October 19 1979 instruction revised by DR circular on
December 26 1995.
Documents guides / Guide documents
Rpertoire des textes et documents techniques essentiels ouvrages d'art - Janvier 2005 ; Directory of essential
technical bridge texts and documents, January 2005
Mise en uvre des Plans d'Assurance de la Qualit - Excution des ouvrages en bton arm et en bton
prcontraint - Guide pour les entrepreneurs et les matres d'uvre. Guide technique. Stra, dcembre 1991, 53 p.
(rfrence Stra : F9175) ; Implementation of Quality Assurance Plans - Construction of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete structures - Guide for Contractors and Project management supervisors. Technical guide. Stra,
December 1991, 53 p. (Stra reference F9175)
Avis de recommandation aux matres douvrage publics propos de la gestion et de lassurance de la qualit lors
de la passation et de lexcution des marchs de travaux. Recommandation n T1-87. BO n88-11, 20 avril 1988 ;
Recommendation notice to public clients dealing with management and quality assurance when issuing and during
execution of work contracts. Recommendation No. T1-87. Official Bulletin No. 88-11, April 20 1988
tablissement du schma directeur de la qualit (SDQ) - Recommandation n T1-89 aux matres douvrage publics
de btiment. BOCCRF, 27 mars 1990 (voir notamment G5 : Suivi des oprations - points critiques - points d'arrt)
; Production of the quality master plan (SDQ) - Recommendation No. T1-89 to public building clients. BOCCRF
(Report of the opinions of the Competition Council), March 27 1990 (in particular, see G5: Monitoring of operations -
critical points - stop points)
Guide pour la commande et le pilotage des tudes douvrages dart. Guide technique. Stra, novembre 1997, 116 p.
(rfrence Stra : F9761) ; Guide for control and management of bridge design. Technical guide. Stra, November
1997, 116 p. (Stra reference F9761)
Recueil des rgles de l'art - Les pieux fors. Guide technique. Stra/LCPC, dcembre 1978, 197 p. (rfrence Stra :
F7809) ; Compilation of good practice - Bored piles. Technical guide. Stra/LCPC (Central Public Works laboratory),
December 1978, 197 p. (Stra reference F7809)
Caractristiques microstructurales et proprits relatives la durabilit des btons. Mthodes dessai n 58. LCPC,
fvrier 2002, 87 p. ; Microstructural characteristics and properties related to the durability of concrete. Test methods
No. 58. LCPC, February 2002, 87 p. ;
Btons - Bases et donnes pour leur formulation. Eyrolles ; Concretes bases and data for their mix design.
Eyrolles
Durabilit des btons. Presses de lcole nationale des ponts et chausses, 1992, 453 p. ; Concrete durability
Matrise de leau dans les btons. Guide technique. LCPC, mai 2001, 91 p. ; Control of water in concretes. Technical
guide. LCPC, may 2001, 91 p
Dfauts d'aspect des parements en bton. Guide technique. LCPC, 1991 ; Skin defects of concrete. Technical guide..
LCPC, 1991
Techniques de lIngnieur C 2 230 Bton hydraulique - Mise en uvre - J.M. Goeffray ; Hydraulic concrete -
Placement (Engineering techniques C 2 230)
Mise en uvre du bton sur chantier - Fiche technique. Cimbton, juillet 2001 ; Placement of concrete on site -
Technical datasheet. Cimbton, July 2001
La vibration du bton sur chantier et la vibration des btons - Fiches techniques. Cimbton, juillet 2001 ; Vibration
of concrete on site and vibration of concretes Technical datasheets. Cimbton, July 2001
La rsistance du bton dans louvrage : la Maturomtrie. Guide technique. LCPC/IREX/CALIBE, 2003 ; Concrete
strength in the structure: Maturity method. Technical guide. LCPC/IREX/CALIBE, 2003
Excution des reprises de btonnage - Recommandations. FFB/Stra/CEBTP, juin 2000, 21p. ; Concrete
construction joints Recommendations. FFB/Stra/CEBTP (Building and Public Works Experimental Center), June
2000, 21p
Prcontrainte extrieure. Guide technique. Stra, fvrier 1990, 120 p. (rfrence Stra : F9024) ; External
prestressing Technical guide. Stra, February 1990, 120 p. (Stra reference F9024)
Coulis pour injection de coulis de prcontrainte. Note dinformation srie "ouvrages d'art" n 21. Stra/CTOA,
juillet 1996, 8 p. ; Grout for injection of prestressing grout. Information note in the "bridges" series No. 21
Stra/CTOA, July 1996, 8 p
Surfaage, tanchit et couches de roulement des tabliers d'ouvrages d'art. STER 81 et ses mises jour n 1, 2
et 3 ; Surfacing, waterproofing and wearing coarses for bridge decks. STER 81 and its updates No. 1, 2 and 3
Collection du guide technique GC du Stra ; Stra Railing (GC garde-corps) technical guide collection
- Garde-corps - Guide technique. Stra, avril 1997, 118 p. (rfrence Stra : F9709) ; Pedestrian parapets Technical
guide. Stra, April 1997, 118 p. (Stra reference F9709)
- Barrires de scurit pour la retenue des vhicules lgers - Barrires de niveau N en accotement -
Amnagement en TPC - Guide technique. Stra, septembre 2001, 187 p. (rfrence Stra : F0115) ; Safety barriers
for retaining lightweight vehicles Level N barriers on hard shoulders Layout in TPC Technical guide. Stra,
September 2001, 187 p. (Stra reference F0115)
- Barrires de scurit pour la retenue des poids lourds - Barrires de niveau H2 ou H3 - Guide technique. Stra,
septembre 1999, 161 p. (rfrence Stra : F9916) ; Safety barriers for retaining heavy trucks Level H2 or H3
barriers Technical guide. Stra, September 1999, 161 p. (Stra reference F9916)
- quipements latraux des ponts - Protection contre la corrosion - Guide technique. Stra, novembre 1996, 43 p.
(rfrence Stra : F9672) ; Bridge lateral equipment Protection against corrosion Technical guide. Stra,
November 1996, 43 p. (Stra reference F9672)
Marque NF-quipements de la route - Barrires de scurit, dlivre par l'ASQUER mandat par AFNOR
CERTIFICATION ; NF mark - Road equipment Safety barriers, issued by ASQUER mandated by AFNOR
CERTIFICATION
Appareils dappui en caoutchouc frett - Utilisation sur les ponts, viaducs et structures similaires - Guide technique.
Stra, septembre 2000, 90 p. (rfrence Stra : F0032) ; laminated elastomeric bridge bearings Use on bridges,
viaducts and similar structures Technical guide. Stra, September 2000, 90 p. (Stra reference F0032)
Appareils dappui en caoutchouc - Documents scientifiques et techniques. AFPC, juillet 1994 ; Rubber bearings -
Scientific and technical documents. AFPC, July 1994
Appareils dappui pot de caoutchouc - Utilisation sur les ponts, viaducs et structures similaires - Guide technique.
Stra, septembre 2000, 58 p. (rfrence Stra : F0033) ; Rubber pot bearings - Use on bridges, viaducts and similar
structures Stra technical guide September 2000, 58 p. (Stra reference F0033)
Recueil des rgles de l'art - Environnement des appareils d'appui en caoutchouc frett - Guide technique.
Stra/LCPC, octobre 1978, 51 p. (rfrence Stra : F7810) ; Compilation of standard practice - Environment of
laminated elastomeric bridge bearings - Technical guide. Stra/LCPC, October 1978, 51 p. (Stra reference F7810)
Joints de chausse des ponts-routes - Guide technique. Stra, juillet 86, 107 p. (rfrence Stra : F8737) ; Road
bridge expansion joints Technical guide. Stra, July 86, 107 p. (Stra reference F8737)
Assainissement des ponts-routes - Guide technique. Stra, juin 89, 106 p. (rfrence Stra : F8940) ; Drainage of
road bridges Technical guide. Stra, June 89, 106 p. (Stra reference F8940)
preuves de chargement des ponts-routes et passerelles pitonnes". Guide technique. Stra, mars 2004, 56 p.
(rfrence Stra : 0404) ; Load tests for road bridges and footpaths. Technical guide. Stra, March 2004, 56 p. (Stra
reference 0404)
ITSEOA - deuxime partie. Fascicule 01 "Dossier douvrage" - Guide technique. Stra/LCPC, 2000, 131 p. ;
ITSEOA part two. Leaflet 01 "Structure works documentation file" - Technical guide. Stra/LCPC, 2000, 131 p.
ITSEOA : deuxime partie. Fascicule 02 "Gnralits sur la surveillance" - Guide technique. Stra/LCPC, 2002,
63 p. (rfrence Stra : F7800202) ; ITSEOA: part two. Leaflet 02 "Generalities on inspection " Technical guide.
Stra/LCPC, October 2002, 63 p. (Stra reference F7800202)
ITSEOA : deuxime partie. Fascicule 13 "Appareils dappui" - Guide technique. Stra, 2003, 67 p. (rfrence
Stra : F0230) ; ITSEOA: Part two. Leaflet 13 "Bearings" - Technical guide. Stra, 2003, 67 p. (Stra reference:
F0230)
Divers / Miscellaneous
Liste des armatures de prcontrainte homologues ou bnficiant dune autorisation demploi (disponible auprs
du Secrtariat de la Commission Interministrielle de la Prcontrainte (CIP) 1 ) ; List of approved prestressing
reinforcement or reinforcement with authorization for use (available from the CIP Secretariat) 2 )
Liste des procds de prcontrainte (torons et barres) intrieure, extrieure, agrs ou bnficiant d'une
autorisation de distribution (disponible auprs du secrtariat de la CIP) ; list of prestressing processes (strands and
bars), internal, external, approved or authorized for distribution, available from the Secretariat of the Interministerial
Prestressing Commission (CIP)
Liste des coulis de prcontrainte bnficiant dun avis technique (disponible auprs du secrtariat de la CIP) ;
List of prestressing grout for which a technical recommendation has been issued (available from the CIP Secretariat)
Notices techniques des procds de prcontrainte agrs (disponibles auprs des Entreprises Distributrices
Spcialises) ; Technical instructions for approved prestressing processes (available from Specialized Distribution
Contractors)
Liste des centrales admises la marque NF-BPE (tlchargeable sur le site de la Marque NF) ; List of batching
plants accepted for the NF-BPE mark (can be downloaded from the NF Marks site)
Liste des adjuvants pour btons admis la marque NF (tlchargeable sur le site du CERIB) ; List of admixtures
for concrete accepted for the NF mark (can be downloaded from the CERIB - Study and Research Center of the
Concrete Industry - site)
Liste des liants hydrauliques admis la marque NF (tlchargeable sur le site de la Marque NF) ; List of hydraulic
binders accepted for the NF mark (can be downloaded from the NF Marks site)
1 La CIP sera remplace terme par l'ASQPE (Association pour la Qualification de la Prcontrainte et des
Equipements des ouvrages de btiments et de gnie civil).
2 The CIP will be eventually replaced by the ASQPE (Association for Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment
used in buildings and civil engineering works).
Liste des fabrications admises la marque NF appareils dappui en caoutchouc frett type B (tlchargeable sur
le site de la Marque NF) ; List of products accepted for the NF mark for type B laminated elastomeric bridge
bearings (can be downloaded from the NF Marks site)
Liste des fabrications admises la marque NF - Produits spciaux destins aux constructions en bton
hydraulique (tlchargeable sur le site de la Marque NF) ; List of products accepted for the NF mark Special
products for use in hydraulic concrete construction (can be downloaded from the NF Marks site)
Liste des avis techniques "Etanchits des ponts-routes" en vigueur (disponible sur le site Internet du Stra) ;
List of "Waterproofing of road bridges" technical recommendations in force (available on the Stra Internet site)
Liste des avis techniques "Joints de chausse des ponts-routes" en vigueur (disponible sur le site Internet du
Stra) ; List of "Road bridge expansion joints" technical recommendations in force (available on the Stra Internet
site)
Adresses utiles / Useful addresses
Secrtariat de la "Commission des Avis Techniques Joints de chausse des ponts-routes" (Stra, 46 Avenue A.
Briand - BP 100 - 92225 Bagneux cedex. Tl. : 01.46.11.32.13) ; Secretariat of the "Technical Recommendations
Commission for Road Bridge Expansion Joints" (Stra: 46 Avenue A. Briand - BP 100 - 92225 Bagneux cedex Tel.
01.46.11.32.13)
Secrtariat de la "Commission des Avis Techniques Etanchits des ponts-routes" (Stra, 46 Avenue A. Briand -
BP 100 - 92225 Bagneux cedex. Tl. : 01.46.11.32.13) ; Secretariat of the "Technical Recommendations Commission
for Waterproofing of Road Bridges" (Stra: 46 Avenue A. Briand - BP 100 - 92225 Bagneux cedex Tel.
01.46.11.32.13)
Secrtariat de la Commission Interministrielle de la Prcontrainte ou de l'ASQPE (LCPC, 58 Boulevard
Lefbvre, 75732 Paris Cedex 15) ; Secretariat of the Interministerial Prestressing Commission (CIP) or the ASQPE -
Association for Qualification of Prestressing and Equipment used in buildings and civil engineering works - (LCPC,
Internet sites:
- AFCAB : http://www.afcab.com/
- AFNOR : http://www.afnor.org/
- ASQUER : http://www.asquer.asso.fr/
- CERIB : http://www.cerib.com/
- Cimbton : http://www.infociments.fr/
- LCPC : http://www.lcpc.fr/
- NF Marks: http://www.marque-nf.com/
- PILES : http://www.piles.setra.equipement.gouv.fr/
- Stra : http://www.setra.equipement.gouv.fr/
Glossary
CIP
Commission interministrielle de la prcontrainte
(Interministerial prestressing commission)
AE CMP
Acte d'engagement (Commitment document) Charg de la mise en oeuvre de la prcontrainte
(Prestressing supervisor);
AFCAB
Association franaise de certification des armatures COP
du bton (French Association for Certification of Charg des ouvrages provisoires (Temporary works
concrete reinforcement) Supervisor)
AFNOR CPC
Association franaise de normalisation (French Cahier des prescriptions communes (Common
Standard Association) requirements book)
ASQPE DE
Association pour la qualification de la prcontrainte Dtail estimatif (Cost estimate)
et des quipements des ouvrages de btiments et de
gnie civil (Association for Qualification of DICT
Prestressing and Equipment used in buildings and Dclaration dintention de commencement de travaux
civil engineering works) (Declaration of Intent to Begin operations)
ASQUER DPC
Association pour la qualification des quipements de Directive produits de construction (Construction
la route (Association for qualification of road Products directive)
facilities)
DTU
BPUF Document technique unifi (Unified Technical
Bordereau des prix unitaires et forfaitaires (Unit and Document)
Fixed Price Schedule)
EDS
CAPT-DCE Entreprise distributrice spcialise (Specialized
Conception automatique des pices techniques de Distribution Contractor)
dossier de consultation d'entreprise (Automatic design
of technical documents in the contractor tender EIF
document). Enduit d'imprgnation froid (Cold applied
rendering)
CCAG
Cahier des clauses administratives gnrales (General ETA
conditions of contract) European Technical Approval
CCAG - PI FD
CCAG (General conditions of contract) Fascicule de documentation (Documentation leaflet)
Prestations intellectuelles (Intellectual services)
FMAS
CCAG - T Film mince adhrent au support (Thin film bonding
CCAG (General conditions of contract) Travaux to the support)
(Works)
FP
CCTG Feuille prfabrique (Prefabricated sheet)
Cahier des clauses techniques gnrales (General
Technical Clauses); FPA
Feuille prfabrique + asphalte (Prefabricated sheet
CCTP + asphalt)
Cahier des clauses techniques particulires (Particular
Technical Clauses);
FPM PC
Feuille prfabrique monocouche (Prefabricated single Point critique (Critical point)
layer sheet)
PE
HDPE Procdure d'excution (Construction procedure)
High density polyethylene
PTFE
IDI Polytetrafluoroethylene
Initial Detailed Inspection
QAP
ISO Quality Assurance Plan
Prefix of an international standard
RC
ITSEOA Rglement de consultation (Call for bids rules)
Instruction technique pour la surveillance et l'entretien
des ouvrages d'art (Technical order for the inspection RMC
and maintenance of civil engineering structures). Ready mixed concrete
LPC RST
Laboratoires des ponts et chausses (Public Works Rseau scientifique et technique (Scientific and
Laboratory) technical network)
LRPC SDQ
Laboratoire rgional des ponts et chausses (Regional Schma directeur de la qualit (Quality master plan)
Public Works Laboratory)
SOPAQ
LCPC Schma organisationnel du plan d'assurance qualit
Laboratoire central des ponts et chausses (Central (Quality Assurance plan organization chart)
Public Works Laboratory)
STER
MHC Surfaage, tanchit et couches de roulement des
Moyens haute cadence (High speed means) tabliers douvrages dart (Surfacing, waterproofing
and wearing courses for bridge decks)
NF
Prefix of an approved French standard XP
Prefix for a tentative standard
NF EN
Prefix of an approved French standard that includes XP ENV
a complete European standard Prefix for a tentative standard containing a complete
European prestandard
NF EN ISO
Prefix of an approved French standard that includes
a complete European and ISO international
standard
NF ISO
Prefix of an approved French standard that includes
a complete ISO international standard
PA
Point d'arrt (Stop point)
MEMOAR, Mmento pour la mise en oeuvre sur ouvrages
d'art, est un document ralis par le RST : Stra, LCPC, CETE
pour la surveillance des travaux d'ouvrages d'art.
Il est ralis sous forme d'une collection de fiches (traitant

chacune d'une spcialit) que le contrleur de travaux peut
consulter au quotidien pour contrler la bonne marche de
son chantier.
Cette collection est destine tous les services constructeurs

chargs d'une opration de matrise d'uvre publique
(Services de l'tat, Conseils Gnraux, )
Il annule et remplace le guide GMO du Stra.
The Stra belongs

This document is awailable and can be downloaded on Stra website: to the scientific and
http://www.setra.equipement.gouv.fr technical network
of the French Public
Work Ministry (RST)
Cover - Photographers: METATTM
The Stra authorization is required for reproduction of this document (all or even part)
2007 Stra - Reference: 0754A - ISRN: EQ-SETRA--07-ED51--FR+ENG

CEREMA Construction OA PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEREMA Construction OA PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

=OMMT

The Stra supports the public owner

The Stra, producer of the state of the art

The Stra, a work in partnership

Collection les outils

This document is the translation of the work "MEMOAR

These datasheets are separated into two major families:

datasheets that provide keys to supervision:

Chapter I: Preparatory actions

1 February 2005 Analysis of the QAP

2 February 2005 Layout of structures and topographic monitoring of works

3 February 2005 Order of external check of detailed design

4 February 2005 Review of detailed design principles

5 February 2005 Signature of the assumption and design notes

6 February 2005 Signature of construction drawings

Chapter II: Foundations

1 February 2005 Execution of excavations for shallow foundations and execution of

2 February 2005 Diaphragm walls and barrettes

3 February 2005 Sheet piles walls

4 February 2005 Bored piles

Chapter III: Reinforcing steels

1 February 2005 Reinforcing steels - Prefabrication, transport, storage and placing

1 February 2005 Bare strands

2 February 2005 Protected strands

3 February 2005 Prestressing bars

4 February 2005 Prestressing ducts

5 February 2005 Anchorages

6 February 2005 Installation of prestressing ducts

7 February 2005 Threading and tensioning of prestressing tensile elements

8 February 2005 Protection products and cachetage

Chapter V: Temporary works

1 February 2005 Stability of formwork

2 February 2005 Concrete surfaces

3 February 2005 Shoring and falsework

Chapter VI: Prefabrication

1 February 2005 Prefabrication in the factory

1 February 2005 Concrete mix design and suitability survey

2 February 2005 Production of concrete in plant - Transport and acceptance on site

3 February 2005 Placement of concrete

4 February 2005 Concrete vibration

5 February 2005 Curing and stripping

6 February 2005 Concrete construction joints

Chapter VIII: Bearings

1 February 2005 Laminated elastomeric bridge bearings

2 February 2005 Pot bearings

3 February 2005 Bearing Raised embossments

4 February 2005 Jacking / Wedging

Chapter IX: Road restraint systems

Chapter X: Waterproofing layers

1 February 2005 Working up of waterproofing layers

Chapter XI: Expansion joints

1 February 2005 Working up of expansion joints

1 February 2005 Quality control

Chapter XIII: Operations prior to

1 February 2005 The initial detailed inspection

2 February 2005 Tests and interpretation of tests

Chapter XIV: Durability zero point

1 Current draft Durability zero point

Chapter XV: Structure works

1 February 2005 Structure works documentation file

Datasheet No. I-1

"Analysis of the QAP"

- the general organization document